Invitation To Tender

INVITATION TO TENDER
FOR
A4-5F CONNECT LAB RENOVATION
TENDER NUMBER：XMUM23T1001
TENDERER COMPANY NAME:
---------------------------------------------------------
EMPLOYER:
XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION DEVELOPMENT SDN. BHD
(ALSO KNOWN AS XIAMEN UNIVERSITY MALAYSIA)
ARCHITECT:
TAN CE ARCHITECT
D-20-02, Menara Mitraland, No. 13A, Jalan PJU 5/1,
Kota Damansara, 47810 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan
CLOSING DATE & TIME : 14th April 2023, 9:30 am-10:00 am
Page 1 of 262
Table of Content
PART 1: INVITATION TO TENDER .......................................................................................................... 4
PART 2: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS ............................................................................................. 5
1. INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 5
2. CONDITIONS OF TENDERING ...................................................................................................... 5
3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER ............................................................................................................. 9
4. OPENING OF TENDER .................................................................................................................... 9
5. EVALUATION OF TENDER ........................................................................................................... 9
6. AWARD OF CONTRACT............................................................................................................... 10
PART 3: FORM OF TENDER .................................................................................................................... 11
PART 4: BILLS OF QUANTITIES ............................................................................................................. 13
1. BILL NO. 1 – PRELIMINARY ITEMS .......................................................................................... 13
2. BILL NO. 2 – BUILDING WORKS ................................................................................................ 27
3. BILL NO. 3 – M&E WORKS .......................................................................................................... 36
4. SUMMARY OF TENDER ............................................................................................................... 44
PART 5: APPENDICES ................................................................................................................................ 46
1. APPENDIX 1: DRAWING .............................................................................................................. 46
2. APPENDIX 2: SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICE ................................................................................ 66
3. APPENDIX 3: SCHEDULE OF TENDERER’S PARTICULARS ................................................. 71
4. APPENDIX 4: TENDER CLARIFICATION QUESTIONAIRE .................................................... 75
5. APPENDIX 5: FORMAT OF PERFORMANCE BOND ................................................................ 80
6. APPENDIX 6: CHECK LIST OF REQUIRED DOCUMENT........................................................ 82
PART 6: SPECIFICATION & PREAMBLES............................................................................................ 83
SECTION I – BUILDING WORKS ............................................................................................................. 83
1. DEMOLITIONS AND WORKS ON SITE ...................................................................................... 83
2. EXCAVATOR.................................................................................................................................. 84
3. CONCRETOR .................................................................................................................................. 87
4. BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK ........................................................................................... 101
5. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY ..................................................................................................... 105
6. ROOFER AND RAINWATER GOODS ....................................................................................... 110
7. PREFABRICATED TIMBER ROOF TRUSSES .......................................................................... 112
8. IRONMONGER ............................................................................................................................. 114
9. STEEL AND IRONWORKER....................................................................................................... 114
10. METAL WORKER ........................................................................................................................ 117
11. PLASTERER .................................................................................................................................. 119
12. MABLE AND GRANITE .............................................................................................................. 122
13. TILER ............................................................................................................................................. 123
14. PAVIOR ......................................................................................................................................... 126
15. ALUMINIUM WORKS ................................................................................................................. 128
16. GLAZING ...................................................................................................................................... 131
17. SANITARY FITTINGS ................................................................................................................. 133
18. PAINTER ....................................................................................................................................... 133
19. WATERPROOFING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 137
20. SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES (WHITE ANTS) CONTROL .................................................... 138
SECTION II – M&E WORKS ................................................................................................................... 139
1. LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION ................................................ 139
2. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................... 152
3. INTERIOR LIGHTING FITTINGS & INSTALLATION ............................................................. 154
4. EARTHING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 159
Page 2 of 262
5. LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE ............................................................................. 160
6. SATALLITE MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM .................................................... 164
7. CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS ............................................................ 166
8. CABLES, BUSBAR TRUNKING, CABLE ACCESSORIES & WIRING DEVICES ................. 168
9. WIRING METHODS ..................................................................................................................... 170
10. INTERNAL TELEPHONE INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 174
11. COLD WATER AND SANITARY PLUMBING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.................... 176
PART 7: PAM CONTRACT 2006 (WITH QUANTITES) ...................................................................... 209
Page 3 of 262
PART 1: INVITATION TO TENDER
PROJECT NAME: A4-5F CONNECT LAB RENOVATION

Building and Mechanical & Electrical (M&E) Works
TENDER NUMBER : XMUM23T1001
Dear Sir/ Madam

You are hereby invited by Xiamen University Malaysia (XMUM) to submit a tender A4-5F Connect Lab
Renovation Project.
TENDER PROCESS AND TIMELINE

All intended Tenderers must comply with the following datelines to be eligible for consideration: -
Tender Notice 24th March 2023
Site Visit 31st March 2023, 10.30am
Final Query Submission Date 4th April 2023, 5.00pm
Registration Date 29th March – 13th April 2023, 9.00am – 5.00pm
Closing Date (Tender submission) 14th April 2023, 9.30am – 10.00am
Evaluation Date 14th April 2023, 10.00am
Notification of Award By 28th April 2023
All tender documents must be sealed and submit to the address below:
Room 303, Multi-purpose Hall (Block B1),
Xiamen University Malaysia,
Jalan Sunsuria, Bandar Sunsuria, 43900 Sepang, Selangor
XMUM has the right to clarify or vary the terms of this tender document, and to extend the tender opening and
closing date. If XMUM considers any question or request for clarification to be of material significance, both
the query and the response will be sent by email to the Tenderer. It is the responsibility of the Tenderers to
check their email periodically for any updates before the Closing Date and to incorporate these updates into
their tender submission.
For further enquiries, please contact Ms. Goh (03-7610 2062) or send email to procurement@xmu.edu.my.
Page 4 of 262
PART 2: INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Project Description
1.1.1. Project Name: A4-5F CONNECT Lab Renovation
1.1.2. Project Content: renovation of 2 new labs
1.1.3. Project Location: Level 5, Block A4, XMUM campus
1.2. Definitions
1.2.1. “Employer” herein is referring to XMU Jiageng Education Development Sdn Bhd and shall
include his or its heirs, personal representatives, successors and assigns.
1.2.2. “Consultant” or “Architect” herein is referring to TAN CE Architect, the architect who is
designated by the Employer to provide consultant service for the Project.
1.2.3. “Work” herein is referring to the scope of work of the Project covered by this tender as
stipulated in the bills of quantities hereinafter.
1.2.4. “Contract Bills” herein is comprise the following documents:
i. Instructions to tenderers;
ii. Form of Tender;
iii. Preliminaries;
iv. Specification & Preambles;
v. Bill of Quantities (BQ); and
vi. Any other documents specifically mentioned in any of the above documents.
1.3. Qualification of Tenderers
The following conditions shall be met for tenderer who plan to participate in this tender:
1.3.1. registered with Suruhanjaya Syarikat Malaysia (SSM);
1.3.2. having valid CIDB license with at least G3 Grading;
1.3.3. having sufficient experience in the renovation works during last 5 years;
1.3.4. qualified on the pre-qualification procedure to participate in this tendering process;
1.3.5. good commercial reputation and well-designed system in financial accounting;
1.3.6. no illegal record when participate in procurement;
1.3.7. other qualifications required by the tender documents.
1.4. The Employer expressly reserves the right to reject any or all tenders and the Employer shall not be held
liable for any costs, loss or damage howsoever incurred by the Tenderers.
2. CONDITIONS OF TENDERING
2.1. Visit to Site
2.1.1. Before tendering, the Tenderer shall visit the site and its surroundings and satisfy himself as to
the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and nature of the site, the extent and nature of
the Works, materials and goods necessary for the completion of the Works, the means of
communication with and access to the site, the accommodation he may require and in general
obtain for himself all necessary and affecting his tender.
2.2. Query
2.2.1. In the event of any query about this tender including difference or discrepancy being found
between any tender document supplied to the Tenderer and those in the Tender Table Document
or between any documents included therein, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Tenderer to
apply in writing to the Employer to have the issue rectified before the final query submission
date fixed herein.
2.2.2. Any reply the Employer may make to such application shall be by way of an Addendum and
will be sent to all Tenderers. Such Addendum shall become part of the tender documents and
Page 5 of 262
tender received will be deemed to include any explanation, modification or extension to the
original document contained therein.
2.3. Tender Documents
2.3.1. The Tenderer shall carefully examine the Condition of Contract which shall be that published
by Pertubuhan Akitek Malaysia (P.A.M.), PAM CONTRACT 2006 (WITH QUANTITIES),
together with any amendments, addition or modifications thereto, the Contract Bills, the
Drawings and any other tender documents issued to them.
2.3.2. The Form of Tender and the documents attached to it shall not be detached from one another
and no alteration or mutilation (other than filling in all blank spaces) shall be made in any of the
documents attached hereto.
2.3.3. Tenders must be submitted in accordance with these instructions and any further instructions
contained in other documentation issued by the Employer. This Instructions to Tenderer, in so
far as they may affect or relate to the execution of the Contract shall be deemed to form part of
the Contract.
2.3.4. Alterations: The Tenderer shall not alter this document. Any proposed alteration is to be given
in a separate letter accompanying the tender. In the preparation of Tender, the Tenderer should
refrain from departing from the existing terms, conditions or stipulations or inserting new terms,
conditions or stipulations into this document and by virtue of his submission of his Tender, it is
deemed that he has clarified all doubts etc. pertaining to the various documents constituted
herein.
2.3.5. All responses to this Invitation to tender must be in English.
2.3.6. The Tender should be completed legibly in black ink using a black ballpoint pen or clearly
typed.
2.4. Form of Tender
2.4.1. The Tenderer must submit a bona-fide tender on the Form of Tender provided, together with the
copy of the Contract Bills provided, duly filled in, signed and dated. Form of Tender which is
incomplete or unsigned will render the tender invalid.
2.4.2. The tender must be signed or sealed or otherwise executed in such manner that is shall be
binding on the Tenderers if accepted. Tenders not properly executed may be rejected.
2.4.3. Only authorized representatives of the Company can sign the Tender Documents. Power of
attorney or certified copy thereof granting authority to sign shall be enclosed with the tender.
2.4.4. The Tenderer shall provide a written statement (self-designed by the Tenderer with the company
seal thereon) declaring that in the three years before tender deadline, there’s no record of serious
violations in the business activities. The declaration letter shall be attached as Appendix 9.
2.5. Completion Date of the Work
2.5.1. Time for completion is of major importance under this Contract. Wherever fixed time for
completion is indicated in the Contract, the Tenderer must ensure that his tender is able to meet
the requirement as to time performance and his tendered rated and prices shall be deemed to
include all measures necessary for him to adhere to this requirement.
2.6. Pricing of Contract Bills
2.6.1. No alterations shall be made by the Tenderer to the text of the Contract Bills. If any alteration,
addition or note is made by him such alteration, addition or note will not be recognized and the
text of the Contract Bills as originally prepared by the Quantity Surveyors will be strictly
adhered to.
2.6.2. Any items which the Contractor considers have no value shall have dashes or other suitable
marks placed against them in the cash columns and any items not priced and without dashes or
other suitable marks shall be deemed to be of no value. The amount appearing as the totals of
the Final Summaries at the end of these Bills and marked “Carried to Form of Tender” shall be
transferred to the Tender Form, Ringgit and Sen without any alteration or rounding off.
2.6.3. The sum of the amounts of all items of the Contract Bills priced by the Tenderer shall truly
represent the Tender Amount. The rates set down by the Tenderer against each item in the
Contract Bills, unless expressly provided to the contrary, shall be held to include for the supply
Page 6 of 262
of materials including cutting and waste, unloading, storage, packing, carriage and cartage,
hoisting; all labour for fabricating, setting, fitting and fixing in position; use of plant,
supervision, fuel, establishment charges; duties/levies, taxes, profit and any other expense and
everything else necessary for the due and proper completion of each item.
2.6.4. If softcopy of the Contract Bills is provided for ease of your tender price computation, the
Tenderer shall take note that all official tender submission MUST be based on hardcopy of the
Original Tender Documents which shall be completely filled by hand (priced BQ shall not be
printed from softcopy), and this softcopy of BQ shall not be used for tender submission.
2.7. Errors in Pricing
2.7.1. Before the signing of the Contract any sums or unit rates inserted by the Tenderer in the tender
which are obviously erroneous shall be adjusted so as to form a fair and reasonable basis for the
valuation of variations in accordance with Clause 11 of the Conditions of Contract, but the total
of the Final Summary shall represent the same amount of such errors will be calculated as a
percentage adjustment in the Final Summary as described in paragraph 2.5.4 hereof.
2.7.2. If there is a difference between the words and the numbers, the amount spelled out in the words
shall prevail.
2.7.3. Should the Contractor make any errors in his extensions and/or casts or in carrying forward to
or in casts of the summary, such errors shall, before the signing of the Contract, be so rectified
and adjusted that when correctly calculated, the total of the Final Summary shall represent the
same amount as that tendered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender. The nett aggregate
amount of such errors, whether a net deduction or a net addition, will be calculated as a
percentage adjustment in the Final Summary. All unit rates throughout the Contract Bills shall
be subject to such percentage discount or premium as the case may be, and the adjusted rates
shall be used for the assessment of variations under the Contract. Provided always that
Provisional or Prime Cost Sums shall be excluded from the calculation and shall not be subject
to such percentage discount or premium.
2.8. Outline Work Programme
The Tender is to be accompanied by:
2.8.1. Preliminary Works Programme in the form of a bar-chart derived from a critical path analysis.
2.8.2. An outline of the methods by which the Tenderer proposes to carry out the Works including
deployment plans of the plant and equipment (diagrams, charts and other illustrations).
2.8.3. A list of site management personnel together with their resume who will be directly involved
and responsible for this project.
2.9. Earnest Money
2.9.1. Any tender not accompanied by the Earnest Money will be disqualified.
2.9.2. The Earnest Money shall be retained and shall remain valid until the expiration of the One
Hundred Twenty (120) days after the closing of the tenders or until such earlier time as a tender
shall have been definitely accepted. Thereafter, the Earnest Money shall be refunded in full to
the unsuccessful tenderers. In the case of the successful tenderer, the Earnest Money referred to
in the Condition of Contract has been deposited and the formal agreement duly executed.
2.10. Forfeiture of Earnest Money
If the Tenderer shall: -
2.10.1. withdraw his tender before the expiry of the Tender Validity Period, or
2.10.2. impose additional terms, conditions or stipulations after the final date fixed for the submission
of tenders (in which case it shall be deemed to be withdrawal of his tender), or
2.10.3. in the event of the tender having been accepted, refuse and fail to execute the Contract or to
deposit the Performance Deposit or fail to proceed with the Works, then in any of such events,
the Employer shall without prejudice to any other rights he may possess, forfeit the Earnest
Money.
2.11. Tender Validity Period
2.11.1. Tenders shall remain valid for a period of One Hundred Twenty (120) days from final date fixed
for submission of tenders stipulated in the Tender Notice and the Employer reserves the right to
Page 7 of 262
extend this period if deemed necessary provided that such extension of the Tender Validity
Period shall have the written consent of the Tenderer.
2.12. Oral Interpretations
2.12.1. Oral Interpretations of any of the Tender Documents requested and received by any Tenderer
shall not be considered to modify any of the provisions of the Tender Document. Any
clarification or modification to any of the Tender Documents shall be made in writing by the
Architect/Employer in the form of Addendum.
2.13. Standards
2.13.1. All workmanship, materials and components throughout the Works shall comply with the
Malaysia Standards and/or Codes of Practice; or as the case may be, the British Standards
and/or Codes of Practice or other Standards or Codes as are stipulated in the Specifications.
2.14. Performance Bond
2.14.1. The successful Tenderer shall submit a Performance Bond equivalent to in the format of Bank
Guarantee before the commencement of any work under the Contract.
2.14.2. In the event of the Contractor’s failure to perform the Contract due to bankruptcy or any other
reason the amount of the performance bond will be utilized to off-set any additional cost or
expenditure in obtaining another Contractor to completer the Works.
2.15. Schedules of Particulars
2.15.1. All schedules of particulars attached to the Tender Documents including particulars of Sub-
Contractors, Material and Equipment etc. proposed by each Tenderer to be employed on the
Works are to be completed and submitted with this tender.
2.16. Currency for Tender and Payment
2.16.1. The prices quoted in the tender shall be in Ringgit Malaysia (“RM). Payment will be made in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract, in Malaysia, in Malaysian Ringgit.
2.17. Notice of Tenderer
2.17.1. Every notice to be given to the Tenderer may be posted to the Tenderer’s address given in the
tender documents and such posting shall be deemed good service of such notice.
2.18. Cost of Tendering
2.18.1. The tenderer shall bear all costs and expenses associated with the preparation and participation
in the tender.
2.18.2. The Employer will not be responsible or pay any expense or loss which may be incurred by the
Tenderer in connection with the preparation of this tender.
2.19. Acceptance or Rejection of Tender
2.19.1. The Employer reserves the right to reject any or all tenders. The Employer does not bind
himself to accept the lowest or any tender, nor to assign any reason for the rejection of any
tender.
2.20. Confidentiality of Tender Documents
2.20.1. The Tenderer (whether or not he submits a tender) shall treat the details of the tender documents
as private and confidential.
2.20.2. The Tenderer must not inform anyone else of their tendered price except where disclosure is
necessary to obtain insurance premium.
2.20.3. The Tenderer must not obtain or attempt to obtain any information about any other party’s
Tender or proposed Tender before the contract is awarded
2.21. Jurisdiction According to Malaysian Law
2.21.1. It shall be understood that any foreign Tenderer who participated in any manner in the tender
consents to submit to the jurisdiction of any court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction in
Malaysia on any question or matter arising from the Tender Documents, award and
implementation of the Contract, and binds himself to accept the judgement or order of any such
court or tribunal of competent jurisdiction.
2.22. Effect of Conditions of Tendering on Contract
Page 8 of 262
2.22.1. These Conditions of Tendering insofar as they may affect the execution of the Contract shall be
deemed to form part of the Contract.
2.23. Tenderers should note that during this tender process they should not contact any of the Employer
Tender Evaluation Members, staff, employees or advisers or any third parties connected to the
Employer or any advisers to this tender outside of the process outlined within this section and elsewhere
within this document.
2.24. All forms of corruption, bribery and kickback whatsoever, either directly or indirectly, are strictly
prohibited.
3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER
3.1. Tenderers shall submit their tenders by hand and all sealed tenders must be received by the Employer at
Room 303, Xiamen University Malaysia, Jalan Sunsuria, Bandar Sunsuria, 43900 Sepang, Selangor
Darul Ehsan on 14th April 2023 (“Closing Date”) between 9.30am – 10.00am. Any tender delivered
after the Closing Date and Time for whatever cause or reason arising shall be disqualified. The
Employer shall in no way be held responsible for any loss or late tender submitted.
3.2. The Tenderer must submit the tender in both hardcopy and softcopy. Hardcopy of tender document shall
have 2 copies: one (1) original and one (1) duplicate. Please indicate “ORIGINAL” or “DUPLICATE”
at the top right of the cover page. Both copies of tender documents shall put into a sealed envelope
together with softcopy in pen drive (non-refundable). Any tender failed to meet this requirement will
render the tender invalid.
3.3. Any unsealed envelope or envelope bearing identifying mark shall be rejected.
3.4. The tender document shall clearly indicate each section of the documents, compile and bind them into
one booklet. Any tender failed to meet the requirement will render the tender invalid.
3.5. The softcopy of tender document shall have same content as in hardcopy especially product
briefing/brochure. Please label clearly the tender number and name of company on pen drive.
3.6. The Tenderer must not arrange with any other party in the submission of a Tender, except in the
circumstances where sub-contracting and/or joint ventures are applicable.
3.7. Tenders sent via courier, mail, facsimile, email or other electronic means shall not be accepted.
3.8. The Employer will not issue acknowledgement of receipt of tender documents to any Tenderers.
4. OPENING OF TENDER
4.1. The opening of tender will be performed at Room 303, Xiamen University Malaysia immediately upon
the expiry of tender Closing Time which is at 10.00am of 14th April 2023 in the presence of all the
tenderers or their authorized representatives.
4.2. Representative of the Tenderer attending the opening of the tender shall be a staff or employee of the
Tenderer.
4.3. Tenderers may be invited for further discussion and clarification of the tender.
4.4. The total number of Tenderers received, the Tenderer’s name, prices offered, discount (if any) and such
other relevant details will be read out at the tender opening. Tenderer may in their Tender Document
highlight information which they consider to be commercially sensitive or confidential in nature, and
should state the precise reasons for its sensitivity.
5. EVALUATION OF TENDER
5.1. A Tender Evaluation Committee is to be established by the Employer to review, evaluate and rank all
Tenderers.
5.2. The overall evaluation process will be conducted in a fair and equitable manner, so that the Employer is
able to consider the value for money of each proposal. This would mean that different clarification/
information may be sought from different tenderers.
5.3. The evaluation criteria described in this Invitation to Tender document (if any) will be used to determine
the final decision as to which Tenderers will be awarded a Contract.
Page 9 of 262
5.4. Under no circumstances may any member of the Tender Evaluation Committee separately, on their own
initiative, informally and without mandate from the Tender Evaluation Committee, enter into direct
communication with any of the Tenderers before or during the evaluation process. The same applies to
the Tenderers. Any attempt by the Tenderers and/or member of the Tender Evaluation Committee to
privately communicate with each other, either directly or indirectly, may lead to disciplinary action
against the member and/or the rejection of the tender concerned.
5.5. Factors to be taken into consideration by the Tender Evaluation Committee are as follows:
5.5.1. Tender price
5.5.2. Compliance with the tender requirement.
5.5.3. Relevant experience. Previous experience of the tenderer will be assessed in relation to the
fields of expertise required to achieve the intended outcomes of the project. Recent
experience is more valuable than historic experience.
5.5.4. Past performance. The tenderer’s performance in completing past projects to the quality
standards required, time performance, within budget, claims history, project management,
and product value will be assessed.
5.5.5. Technical skills. The tenderer’s technical expertise, project team, project management tools
and equipment which to be used in the project will be assessed.
5.5.6. Methodology. The tenderer’s capability to bring the contract to a satisfactory conclusion by
describing the methodology of approach to accomplish the project’s required outcomes will
be assessed.
5.6. If one or more of the following conditions is found, the tenderer might be disqualified:
5.6.1. Late submission;
5.6.2. The tender envelop is not sealed;
5.6.3. The tender document is not proper bind in booklet;
5.6.4. The tender document has no official company stamp or the signature of the legal
representative (or its authorized agent);
5.6.5. The tenderer does not submit the earnest money (if applicable);
5.6.6. The tenderer does not follow the provided pricing schedule format to quote or the key
specification/ information is not clear;
5.6.7. Non-compliance with laws and regulations and the requirements stipulate in the tender
documents;
5.6.8. Provide false information in tender document;
5.6.9. Tendered price is exceeding tender budget;
5.6.10. Sample have logo/ mark which can identify the tenderer (if applicable).
6. AWARD OF CONTRACT
6.1. The Employer will evaluate all Tenders on the basis of the “most economically advantageous tender”,
which does not mean the lowest bid will win the Tender.
6.2. Within 10 working days after the opening of tender, the Employer will issue a notification of award to
the successful Tenderer. The Employer reserve the right to extend the award date without notification.
The successful tenderer shall sign an agreement with the Employer at the time specified in the
notification.
6.3. The successful tenderer is required to provide a Performance Bond in the form of an approved Banker's
Guarantee equal to 5% of the Contract Sum. This Performance Bond will be released one (1) calendar
month after receipt Certificate of Practical Completion (CPC).
Page 10 of 262
PART 3: FORM OF TENDER
To: XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION DEVELOPMENT SDN BHD
Sir,
CADANGAN PENGUBAHSUAIAN DAN TAMBAHAN KEPADA RUANG AKADEMIK BLOK A4

TINGKAT 5 DI ATAS LOT 115628, BANDAR SUNSURIA, AMPAR TENANG, MUKIM DENGKIL,
DAERAH SEPANG, SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN FOR XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION DEVELOPMENT
SDN BHD
1. We the undersigned, are willing to execute, perform, complete and maintain the above named Works in
accordance with Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Specifications, Bills of Quantities and Articles of
Agreement for the following: -
a) Alternative Tender "A" at Ringgit Malaysia: - ........................................................

……………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………… (i.e. RM …………………………………….)
Based on a Fixed Completion Period of Four (4) months from the date of commencement or within the extended
time as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract.
b) Alternative Tender “B” at Ringgit Malaysia: -..................................................................

…………………………………………………………………………………………....
...........................................................(i.e. RM )
Based on Contractor's Own Completion Period of ( ) months from the date of commencement or within
the extended time as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract.
2. We agree to take possession of the site on the ...........................and to commence Works on the
........................... and to complete the works within the completion periods of ………………… months from the
Date of Commencement of Works or within the extended time as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract.
3. We confirm that we have understood all the stipulation in the above referred documents and are willing
to execute the Works in accordance with stipulations and contents of the above documents.
4. Should any arithmetical errors be found in the Bills of Quantities, resulting in either a nett addition to or
a nett deduction from the said Tender Sum, we agree that the error(s) shall be rectified and corrected, before the
award of this Tender.
5. The tender sum are firm prices and shall not be subjected to any reasons whatsoever save only in respect
of pursuant to the Articles of Agreement and Conditions of Contract.
6. We agree to abide by these for a period of ninety (90) days from the final date fixed for receiving
Tenders and they shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the end of that period.
7. We agree to the Liquidated Damages for the late completion of this Contract in accordance with Clause
22 of the Conditions of Contract at the rate of RM 2,000.00 per day for the whole of the Works and for the
period during which the works remained incomplete.
8. If this tender is accepted, we are willing to execute the formal Contract Agreement; and to deposit the
Performance Bond and all the requisite Insurance Policies; and produce the receipts for premiums paid, for
inspection within fourteen (14) days from posting, or delivery, if by hand, of notification of acceptance.
9. We confirm after personal scrutiny that the Documents and Drawings used by the undersigned in
compiling this tender are bona fide copies of the Documents and Drawings hitherto prepared.
Page 11 of 262
10. Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed, this Tender, together with your written
acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding Contract between us.
11. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender that you may receive.
We are, Sir,
TENDERER: ..............................................................................................
(Name of Firm in Capital Letter)
Signature of
Tenderer: ..............................
Address: ..............................
………………………..
Date: …………………………….
Signature of
Witness: .....................................
Address: .....................................
…………………………….
Date: ……………………………….
Page 12 of 262
PART 4: BILLS OF QUANTITIES
1. BILL NO. 1 – PRELIMINARY ITEMS
BILL NO. 1 - PRELIMINARIES
Item Description RM Sen
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
01 The Preliminary Items as set out herein apply to the whole of the Works
contained in these Bills of Quantities and the Contractors must allow for
complying with the same and for any cost incurred in connection therewith.
02 The amounts inserted by the Contractor for such Preliminary items shall be
deemed to apply to the whole of the Works carried out under this Contract.
03 Where any clause and/or item in this Preliminaries is left unpriced, it shall be
deemed to have been included in the Bills of Quantities against each item of
work. No subsequent claim, arising out of expenses and/or losses incurred
against such unpriced clauses and/or items, will be entertained.
04 The Contractor shall be held to have checked the number of each page and
read through all the clauses and/or items of these Bills of Quantities as no
claim for expenses and/or losses consequent upon the Contractor’s failure to
observe this clause will be entertained.
DEFINITIONS
05 In this Contract and throughout the Contract Documents, the following words
shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them
06 Employer : XMU Jiageng Education Development Sdn Bhd and shall include his
or its heirs, personal representatives, successors and assigns.
07 Contractor : The person or persons, firm or company referred to as such in the

Form of Agreement and shall include his or its heirs, personal representatives,
successors and permitted assigns.
08 Architect : Messrs. Tan CE Architect, D-20-02, Menara Mitraland, No. 13A,

Jalan PJU 5/1, Kota Damansara, 47810 Petaling Jaya, Selangor.
09 Contract : The term `Contract’ shall mean the agreement executed between
the Employer and the Contractor together with the documents forming part
thereof.
10 Works : The term `Works’ shall mean the works to be executed in accordance
with the Contract.
To Collection :
D1/1/1
Page 13 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
01 Superintending Officer : The term `Superintending Officer’ (S.O.) shall mean

the Architect.
02 Month : The term `Month’ shall mean calendar month.
03 Approved, Selected or Directed : The terms `approved’, `selected’ or `directed’

shall mean to be approved, selected or directed in writing by the Architect.
THE SITE
04 The site of the proposed works is on BLOCK A4 TINGKAT 5 AT LOT 115628,
BANDAR SUNSURIA, AMPAR TENANG, MUKIM DENGKIL, DAERAH SEPANG,
SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN
05 The Contractor is to refer to the Site Plan for the exact location, dimensions
and area of the site.
SCOPE AND BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
06 The Works as contained in this Contract comprises of new extension and

renovation works.
07 The Contractor is to refer to plans and drawings for the details of the
construction, dimensions and location of the works on the site.
ORDER OF WORKS
08 Notwithstanding the scope and general description of the Works, the Contractor
will be required to carry out the works in such sections, order and/or manner as
directed and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect and including all
necessary protection
09 Arrange with the Architect and other Contractors for such earlier
works and carefully check and inspect the works to ascertain the accuracy of
the sizes and locations of the works to be taken over. Report in writing all
defects and/or discrepancy to the Architect and request for
constructions.
09 Take over in such sequence or section as directed by the Architect.

After taking over the completed Works, all subsequent damage or faults shall
be deemed to be caused by the Contractor or his Sub-Contractors and shall be
rectified all at his own expense.
To Collection :
D1/1/2
Page 14 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
ORDER OF WORKS (CONT'D)
01 Seal off and protect all existing works from damages caused by construction
of the works.
COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF VARIOUS AUTHORITIES AND

RESTRICTIONS ON MODES OF WORKING
02 The Contractor shall be held responsible for complying with all police and Local
Authority regulations and for keeping the roads he uses as access to the site
free from mud, builder’s rubbish, and debris etc., occasioned by the work
throughout the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all expenses to maintain the
road back to their original condition should these be chargeable by the Local
Authorities required by the Architect. The Contractor shall also
comply with all latest Building By-Laws Acts and Regulations and the
Department of Occupational, Safety and Health (DOSH) or JKKP set forth by
the Authorities.
03 Restrictions may be imposed by the various Authorities including Local

Gated Management (if any) which may affect working hours and movement of his
vehicles and plant. The Contractor is advised to find out for himself details of
such restriction, if any
CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY REGULATION 1996
04 The Contractor shall comply to Part VIII of the Lembaga Pembangunan

Industri Pembinaan Malaysia Act 1994 and the Construction Industry (Levy
Collection) Regulations 1996, and shall submit a notification of Form CIDB
L1/96 to the Lembaga not later than 14 days before the commencement of the
works, whichever date is earlier.
05 Stoppage of works due to non-compliance of the above shall entitle the

Contractor to NO extension of time nor financial claims.
PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES, ANTI-POLLUTION / DOE

MEASURES AND REQUIREMENTS
06 The Contractor shall carry out dilapidation survey before commencement of

works. A copy of the report shall be given to the Architect, Client and
neighbours for their safe keeping
07 Provide all things necessary for the protection of the Works and all unfixed
materials and goods delivered upon the site of the Works, whether delivered
by the Contractor or the Employer and the Contractor to assume full
responsibility for any cost and damage sustained to the foregoing from
whatever cause arising.
To Collection :
D1/1/3
Page 15 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES, ANTI-POLLUTION / DOE

MEASURES AND REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D)
01 The Contractor to carry out the Works in such a manner so as to avoid causing
damage to adjoining, adjacent and subjacent properties. The Contractor will be
liable for and must indemnify the Employer in respect of any claim on
proceedings arising out of his neglect in taking care to avoid damage to
adjoining properties when carrying out the Works. The Contractor to make
adequate provision by spraying, hosing, erecting screens or other suitable
methods as directed by the Architect against any nuisance or
damage by dust or other pollution for work under this contract and to persons or
properties in the vicinity and he will be held solely responsible for any compliant
damage or claim in this connection.
02 The Contractor will maintain and keep all drains both private and public free
from mud, silt and any other obstruction and make good where necessary.
03 The Architect’s instruction or approval of any safety measure shall not

relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to ensure safety of all occupants of
adjoining buildings, workmen, consultant or Employers and their representative
and the public from all risks or injury during the Contract period.
PRICING OF BILLS OF QUANTITIES
04 Where the Contractor leaves any item blank in the Preliminaries or inserts
only a dash against any item in these Bills of Quantities, the value thereof
shall be deemed to be included in the prices or rates of other items therein.
DISCREPANCY BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND CONDITIONS ON SITE
05 The Contractor shall check the whole of the dimensions on site and if any
discrepancy is found between the drawings and conditions on site, he shall
notify the Architect immediately and request instructions.
06 No claim by the Contractor for any extra cost incurred as a result of

discrepancy between the drawings and conditions on site will be entertained if
he fails to inform the Architect of such discrepancy before proceeding
with the work.
PREPARATION OF TENDERS
07 The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender and in no case
may Contractor claim for expenses incurred in the preparation of their tender.
To Collection :
D1/1/4
Page 16 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
PERFORMANCE BOND
01 The Contractor shall as a condition precedent to the commencement of any

work under this Contract, deposit with the Employer, an approved Banker's
Guarantee equal to five percent (5%) of the Contract Sum as a fund (hereinafter
referred to as the "Performance Bond"). The Performance Bond shall be valid up
to the date of Certificate of Practical Completion. Should the Contractor fail to
complete the works within the time allowed, the Guarantee shall be extended to
the new extended time or anticipated time. No progress payments shall be
certified or paid until this clause has been complied with. The Performance
Bond is for the due performance of the contract and if the Contractor fails to
execute the contracts or commits any breach of his obligations under the
Contract, it is agreed that the Architect may utilize and make
payments out of deduction from the said Performance Bond in accordance with
the terms of Bond.
DOCUMENTATION CHARGES
02 The Contractor is to allow the cost of Tender and Contract Documentation

Charges involved in this Tender exercise. The Contractor is required to carried
out stamping of Contract Documents (2 Copies) at his own expense upon
signing the Contract Documents by both Employer and Contractor.
EARNEST MONEY
03 It is a condition of this tender that the full amount of Earnest Money (referred
to in the Conditions of Tender) will be forfeited to the Employer, in the event,
the tenderer, within the period stated in the tender form for which the tender
will remain open, withdraws his tender or having been awarded the Contract
refuses to proceed with the Works or refuses to sign the Contract or refuses
to provide the Security Deposit required by the Contract. Upon the award of
the Contract, the Earnest Money will be fully refunded to the successful
tenderer in exchange for the Security Deposit.
OTHER CONTRACTORS ON THE SITE
04 The Contractor shall work in close coordination and liaison with the other
Contractors appointed by the Employer who may, at one time or the other
during the currency of this Contract, be operating around and in the vicinity of
the site. Take account of the work programme of these other Contractors in the
planning and programming of the Contract Works. The Contractor is required to
liase with Architect and other Contractors with regard to common
security, accessibility and other common benefits. The Contractor is also to
ensure that the commissioning and operation of his own works would cause the
least interference to other Contractors. No claims will entertained on the
grounds of hindrance caused to the Contractors.
To Collection :
D1/1/5
Page 17 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
FORM OF CONTRACT
01 The Form of Contract which the Contractor will be required to enter for the
Works will be the P.A.M. Form of Contract, Private Edition With Quantities
(Edition 2006).
02 The Conditions of the Contract are to be read in conjunction with these Bills of
Quantities. A copy of the Contract is available for inspection by Tenderers on
the Tender Table during any working day before the tender closing date.
03 The Contractor is to note that additional clauses, if any, stipulated in this

Contract shall supersede the General clauses provided in the P.A.M. Form of
Contract.
APPENDIX TO CONTRACT
04 The following particulars will be inserted in the appendix attached to the

Conditions of Contract :-
Clause 15
Defects Liability Period : 12 months
Clause 19.1 & 20.A

Insurance Cover Amount : RM 1,000,000.00
Insurance deductible Amount : RM 50,000.00
Clause 20.A
Percentage to cover Professional Fees : 7.5%
Amount for removal of Debris : 1%
Clause 21
Date of Commencement : As indicated in letter of acceptance
Fixed Completion Period : 4 months
Clause 22
Liquidated and Ascertained Damages : RM 2,000.00 per day
Clause 26
Period of Delay : 3 months
Clause 30.1& 30.13

Interim Claim Interval : At monthly intervals
To Collection :
D1/1/6
Page 18 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
APPENDIX TO CONTRACT (CONT'D)
01 Clause 30.1
Period for Honouring of Certificates : 45 days from presentation to
Employer
Clause 30.2
Value of Material and Goods included : Not applicable
in the Certificate
Clause 30.5
Percentage of Certified Value Retained : 10% of certified value. No payment
for materials on site
Clause 30.5
Limit of Retention : 5% of Contract Sum
Clause 30.10
Period of Final Account : 6 months
Clause 37.1
Performance Bond : 5% of Contract Sum
EMPLOYEE SOCIAL SECURITY ACT
02 The workers employed in the Works are liable for coverage under the
Employees Social Security Act 1969, the Contractor shall register his
employees and contribute under Social Security Scheme (SOCSO) in the
places where the scheme is implemented and comply with the provisions of the
said Act. The Contractor shall submit the Code Number and Insurance
Numbers of all workers on site to the Architect for checking.
03 The Contractor shall make payment of all contributions from time to time on the
first day on which the same ought to be paid and until the completion of his
Contract and upon demand the Contractor shall produce to the Design
Consultant contributions cards or stamp vouchers as evidence of payment of
such contributions.
CONTRACTOR'S ALL RISK INSURANCE POLICY
04 Insurance policy for "Contractor's All Risk" shall be taken up by the Contractor
in the joint name of Employer, Contractor and all Sub-Contractors involved in
the project.
05 For the above, the contractor shall allow for insurance for RM 1,000,000.00 for
any one accurrence the number at accurrence being unlimited within the
Contract Period.
To Collection :
D1/1/7
Page 19 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY
01 A Workmen's Compensation Policy shall be affected in respect of personal

injury by accident or disease to workmen arising out of and in the course of
their employment in this project. The policy will provide indemnity against.
Compensation for such injury either under Workmen's Compensation
Legislation or at Common Law and all costs and expenses incurred in
defending any claim for such compensation.
02 The labour content shall be assessed to be not less than 10% of the costs of
the Contractor's works.
03 This insurance policy shall be maintained by the contractor separately at their

own cost.
EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS AND SPECIALISTS
04 The Contractor shall responsible for the entry of foreign workers and specialists
into Malaysia. Their entry shall conform to the rules and requirements of the
immigration laws of the country. He shall also be responsible for obtaining their
necessary work permits from the relevant Authorities. The Employers shall
absolve itself from all responsibility pertaining to this matter.
RESTRICTION OF PERSONS TO SITE
05 The Contractor shall be responsible for restricting all persons under his control,
including those employed by Sub-Contractors and Suppliers only to the site of
the Works and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent and shall
indemnify the Employer
PREVENTION OF NUISANCE
06 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions with regard to the order and
method of execution of the works to avoid causing disturbance or nuisance to
the users and occupiers of surrounding areas and for complying with any
direction of the Architect in this respect.
07 The Contractor is to provide all necessary noise abatement control in order to

comply with Local Authorities requirement that the noise level measured at a
distance of 15.0m from the source shall not exceed 95 decibels.
08 Any instructions to stop work or summons/fines issued by Local Authorities as

a consequence of the Contractor’s non-compliance with this requirement shall
be at the cost of the Contractor who shall have no cause for any claim against
the Employer. No claim for extension of time will be entertained.
To Collection :
D1/1/8
Page 20 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
SITE MANAGEMENT TEAM
01 The Contractor is to allow for a competent Site Agent who shall be solely and
constantly responsible for the works and approved by the Architect.
The Contractor must not change the Site Agent without first obtaining the
consent of the Architect who shall not unreasonably withold such
consent.
02 The Contractor shall on the written request from the Architect

immediately dismiss from the works the Site Agent or such assistants who
may in the opinion of the Architect be incompetent or misconduct
himself.
WORKMEN ACCOMODATION
03 No workmen accomodation is allowed to be erected at site. The Contractor

shall therefore make alternative arrangement to accomodate his workers.
04 Toilets/Shower facilities for the workers are permitted at as designed by the

Employer only. The Contractor shall at all times ensure that these facilities are
cleanse on a daily basis.
EXISTING SERVICES
05 The Contractor shall notify the Architect immediately of any existing

service such as water, electricity, drainage, etc. which will be affected by the
works and shall immediately provide adequate supports and protection of the
same to the satisfaction of the Architect and at his own expense.
06 The Employer shall provide the temporary supply of electricity and water during the
Contract Period. The Contractor shall take all necessary care and attention in protecting
and maintaining all existing services etc., i.e. existing pipes, ducts, sewers, service
mains, overhead and underground cables etc. during the execution of the work.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage done during the
progress of the works and shall meet all costs of repairs and reinstatement due
to such damage.
07 The Contractor shall satisfy himself that all existing services i.e. electricity and
water etc. are rendered safe before proceeding with his Works.
08 The Contractor shall give every possible assistance at no extra cost to the
Contract, in the diversion, re-alignment of existing services which are intended
to be carried out other than by the Contractor.
To Collection :
D1/1/9
Page 21 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
SAFETY MEASURES
01 The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements laid down in the Factories
and Machinery (Building Operation and Work of Engineering Construction
Safety) regulaton including any amendments and replacement of the liquidation.
02 During the construction, the Contractor shall ensure that all construction
machineries are operated by skilled operators. The Contractor shall also allow
for the safety of workmen and the public from all risks of injury especially from
articles falling off during construction.
03 The Contractor is to ensure that his workmen (including those employed by his
Sub-Contractor) employed on the site wears safety helmets, proper shoes,
safety belts and that railed gang-ways, safety nets, etc., are provided and
comply in full to the requirements laid down in the Local By-Law and any future
regulations or By-Law with regards to safety measures applicable in Malaysia.
Special precautions shall be taken for the safety of the adjoining building (if
any).
04 Generally, the Contractor shall be responsible for the complete adequacy of all
protective systems to prevent injury to workmen and public.
PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
05 All finishings, floors, baths, sanitary fittings, glass, tiles, paving and the like
shall be effectively protected from damage by cement, plaster, paint and other
coatings and material to the Architect’s approval.
06 Should damage nevertheless occur, such appliances or surfaces shall be

replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, as directed by the Design
Consultant.
07 A clean first class finish true to level, form and alignment is expected and any
dirty, stained, indented or scratched fittings or finishes will be rejected and
replaced at the Contractor’s own cost.
GUARANTEES AND MAINTENANCE
08 The Contractor shall assign to the Employer the benefit any guarantees and/or
quotations for future maintenance offered by waterproofing or other
Sub-Contractors and Suppliers if and when such guarantees and/or quotations
extend beyond the Defects Liability Period of the Contract.
To Collection :
D1/1/10
Page 22 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
TEMPORARY SITE DRAINAGE AND SILT TRAP ETC.
01 The Contractor shall ensure that the existing surface water drains are not
choked up by debris or spoil and shall properly maintain the drains during the
Works.
REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
02 The Contractor is to keep the site, and building, adjacent roads and footpaths
etc. clean during the progress of the Works and to cart away all dirt, rubbish
and superfluous materials as the Works progress and at completion.
GENERAL SCAFFOLDING STAGING
03 Provide and maintain all necessary temporary scaffolding together with planks,
battens, cat-walks gangways, ladders, etc. and provide special staging where
required in positions of unusual height or construction for the proper execution
and completion of the works including those of Sub-Contractors, and pay all
costs and charges in connection therewith.
04 If the Contractor should strike any of his scaffolding before ascertaining whether
it is required by any Sub-Contractor or Local Authority, he must re-erect it, if so
required, at his own expense.
05 The Contractor shall ensure that all scaffolding and staging shall comply with
the requirement of M.S. 10.1 : 1975 Sirim Code of Practice for Building
Operations Code and other codes as may be required by the Proper
Authorities.
PONDING TEST
06 The Contractor is to allow for full Ponding Test and Leak Test 48 hours for all
toilets, wet areas, gutter and RC flat roof
To Collection :
D1/1/11
Page 23 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
HOARDING
The Contractor shall provide metal hoarding around the site and plywood protection
01 to the existing floor throughout the allowed construction access as outlined by the
Employer. Allow for all making good, repainting, adapting, shifting and maintaining the
hoarding throughout the Contract Period and dismantle and clear away on completion of
contract or as directed by Des adapting, shifting and maintaining the hoarding throughout
the Contract Period and dismantle and clear away on completion of contract or as directed by
Consultant. The Contractor may form gateways as necessary at his own expense for entries on his
area of work.
PLANT ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS
02 If the Contractor proposes to use hoist, or any type of plant which places a load
on the structure, or is attached to the structure, he must furnish full details of
such plant to the Architect for approval before work is commenced.
03 If necessary, and if Architecturally and structurally acceptable, the

structure shall be strengthened to carry such loads and the Contractor will be
responsible for any resulting extra expense. The Contractor will be responsible
for making good any damage to the structure to the satisfaction of the Design
Consultant.
To Collection :
D1/1/12
Page 24 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
COMPLETION
01 On completion of the Works, all plant, building appliance, apparatus or

equipment are to be removed as quickly as possible and conveyed away from
the site at the sole cost of the Contractor. All services and roads, temporary
buildings, sheds, barriers, scaffolding etc. required in the work of construction
are to be disconnected, dismantled, taken down and removed. All holes,
trenches and excavations in connection with the plant, etc. are to be filled in
proper manner, levelled off and finished to match the adjacent areas and the
site left in a clean and orderly condition.
02 In the event of the Contractor not clearing away the above mentioned material
and plant within a stipulated time, the Architect and the Employer will
be empowered to perform such work, either by employing a third party for such
purpose or dealing with such direct and the cost of such clearing away will be
deducted from the Contractor’s Final Account. The Architect and the
Employer will not be responsible or liable for any material or plant left upon the
site.
03 All floors and pavings shall be thoroughly cleaned and waxed and polished
where required; doors, ventilators, casements and similar work shall be properly
eased and adjusted, all ironmongery, window fittings and similar articles
properly oiled and adjusted; all sanitary fittings and equipment cleared,
adjusted and put in a proper working order; all broken panes of glass cut out
and replaced with new; all window glazing properly cleaned inside and outside
and the whole of the Works generally cleaned up and adjusted and left perfectly
clean and sound at completion to the satisfaction of the Architect.
04 Sewer pipelines and manholes shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed

throughout. No sewers may be put into use without a detailed inspection
carried out and the sewers cleaned and certified satisfactory by the Design
Consultant.
To Collection :
D1/1/13
Page 25 of 262
PRELIMINARY ITEMS
Collection :
D1/1/1 ……………………………
D1/1/2 ……………………………
D1/1/3 ……………………………
D1/1/4 ……………………………
D1/1/5 ……………………………
D1/1/6 ……………………………
D1/1/7 ……………………………
D1/1/8 ……………………………
D1/1/9 ……………………………
D1/1/10 ……………………………
D1/1/11 ……………………………
D1/1/12 ……………………………
D1/1/13 ……………………………
Total To Summary of Tender : D1/1/14
Page 26 of 262
2. BILL NO. 2 – BUILDING WORKS
BILL NO. 2 - BUILDING WORKS
Item Description Quantity Unit Rate RM Sen
ELEMENT : ROOF
ROOFER
To supply and install Lysaght Klip Lok metal deck roofing
lapped and fixed to purlin with and including all requisite
connectors and screws, etc all accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation and Architect's approval
A Lysaght Klip Lok 0.47mm TCT metal deck roofing 172 m2
----------------------
B Lysaght 0.47mm TCT clear colorbond flashing
600mm girth 75 m
Lysaght 0.47mm TCT clean colorbond gutter including

hot-dipped galvanized concealed brackets at and all
necessary fixing accessories all as per Architect's
approval
C to 250mm wide x 300mm deep gutter 17 m
Design, supply, deliver and erect approved Proprietary

light weight roof trusses system; complete with
connection plate all fabricated and shop primed off site;
and delivery to site including all transportation, handling,
hoisting and fixing into position; including all necessary
cutting, welding, drilling and bolting and finished with
approved protective coating :- (Tenderer shall allow for
submitting shop drawings duly sign by a Professional
Engineer for approval prior to fabrication and with
minimum of 10 years warranty).
D For metal roof 175 m2
To Collection :
D2/1/1
Page 27 of 262
ELEMENT : ROOF
POLYCARBONATE ROOF
A Supply and install the approved polycarbonate roof

covering; comprising of 5mm thick clear polycarbonate
roof panel; including steel structure & support ;
all fabricated together; complete with all necessary GI flashing /
30 m2
capping and fixing accessories; including all hoisting,
assembling; building-in; as per manufactuerer detail
PLUMBER
Approved UPVC rainwater downpipe to BS 4514; with

solvent joints and all necessary bends, pipe sleeve, fitting,
etc. :-
B 16 m
100mm Diameter rainwater downpipe; fixed to / encased
into concrete column/brickwall
C
100mm Diameter rainwater downpipe; suspended from concrete 2 m
soffit with approved strap hangers
SUNDRIES
D
100mm Diameter UPVC removable dome grating; on 100mm 4 No

E diameter UPVC pipe outlet.
Allow the connection of new rainwater downpipe to LS

existing rainwater downpipe
To Collection :
Collection :
D2/1/1 ……………………………
D2/1/2 ……………………………
Total To Bill Summary :

D2/1/2
Page 28 of 262
ELEMENT : EXTERNAL WALL

CONCRETOR
A Allow here for all necessary reinforced concrete Grade

25 horizontal & vertical concrete stiffener as shown in
Engineer's Detail; including all necessary formwork,
reinforcement and building into brickwall. Item
B RC kerb; overall size 110 x 200mm high; including all

necessary formwork and reinforcement 65 m
BRICKLAYER
Approved light weight concrete block in cement and sand
mortar (1:6) including thin bed adhesive complete with
L-bracket as described at every 600mm centres and other
necessary accessories:-
C 150mm thick wall 253 m2
ELEMENT : FRAME
STEEL AND IRONWORKER
Mild steel as described to BS 4360; all framed and
welded together; weld filed smooth; including all stop
ends, bends, circular bending and drilling, all fixing
accessories, bolts and plate with and including painting
with primer and finishing coat and fixing into position :-
D 150mm x 150mm x 6mm thick SHS column 2473 kg

D2/2/1
Page 29 of 262
ELEMENT : DOOR AND WINDOW
CONCRETOR
A Allow here for all necessary reinforced concrete Grade

25 lintol, hood, sill, ledges to all doors & windows;
including all necessary formwork, reinforcement and
building into brickwall. Item
FIRE RESISTANT DOOR WITH VISION PANEL

Supply and install GI frame one hour fire-rated door
complete with door jamb, glass panel, hinges, lever
handle mortise lock set, door closer, door stop, complete
with necessary accessories and ironmongeries
as per manufacturer and in full compliance with the Fire
Authority requirement :-
B Single leaf fire rated door; overall size 900 x 2100 high 2 No
C Double leaf fire rated door; overall size 1800 x 2100 high 2 No
ALUMINIUM WORKS
Supply and fix the following powder coated aluminium
frame window units; complete with all requisite
ironmongery as specified and fixing accessories;
including approved glass; including all hoisting,
assembling, building-in fixing straps into brickwork or
concrete, grouting and finished off externally with
sealant; all as per window schedules and details to :-
Fixed Glass Window

D Aluminium frame fixed glass window unit; overall size
3000 x 1200mm high; with 8.38mm thick tempered
anti - shatter laminated clear glass (W3) 2 No
Sliding Window
E Aluminium frame sliding window unit; overall size
2400 x 1200mm high; with 6mm thick clear tempered
glass (W1) 2 No
F Ditto; overall size 1600 x 1200mm high; with 6mm

thick clear tempered glass (W2) 1 No
Aluminium Louver
G Aluminium frame louver window unit; overall size
900 x 300mm high; with powder coated finish (W4) 2 No
D2/3/1
Page 30 of 262
ELEMENT : WALL FINISHES
DEMOLITION
A To remove existing wall plastering up to 300mm around
room edge, including cast away debris. (Lab 4 to Lab 5)
(Quantity Provisional) 73 m
PLASTERER
'Lafarge Quickskim 380' or approved equivalent cement
base skim coat plaster system consisting of one layer
of 'Lafarge Quickskim 388' or approved equivalent finishing
coat; including preparing, grinding and patching formwork
joints and undulating surfaces; trowel smooth; all in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in :-
B 5mm Plainface; to wall and column; internally (Provisional) 199 m2

'Lafarge Thin Plaster 386' or approved equivalent cement
base skim coat plaster system consisting of one base
and one finishing coat; including preparing,
grinding and patching formwork joints and undulating
surfaces; trowel smooth; all in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions in :-
C 12mm Plainface; to wall and column; externally (Provisional) 291 m2
TILER
D Supply, deliver and lay 150mm x 600mm porcelain tile
skirting to match existing. (Lab 6 to Lab 7) 73 m
PAINTER
Prepare and apply; one undercoat and two finishing
coats of approved emulsion paint internally to :-
E Plastered wall and column. 199 m2
Prepare and apply; one undercoat sealer and two
finishing coats of approved weatherbond arcylic paint
externally to :-
F Plastered wall and column. 291 m2
---------------------
G Allow here for make good any existing external
wall plastering & paint on existing wall, and
column disturbed and complete with 150mm x 600mm
porcelain tile skirting to match existing.
(Lab 4 to Lab 5) (Quantity Provisional) 73 m

D2/4/1
Page 31 of 262
ELEMENT : FLOOR & CEILING FINISHES
DEMOLITION
A To remove 1 piece of existing floor tile around room edge,
including cast away debris. (Lab 4 to Lab 5) (Quantity 73 m
Provisional)
B To remove 1 piece of existing floor tile around room edge,

including cast away debris. (Lab 6 to Lab 7) (Quantity 72 m
Provisional)
RAISED CONCRETE FLOOR

C
100mm high raised concrete floor c/w necessary formwork,
reinforment, etc 176 m2
PAVIOR
Cement and sand (1:3); laid on concrete; steel trowel smooth in :-
25mm (average) Thick paving 176 m2
EPOXY FLOORING
Prepare and apply approved Epoxy coating; including all the
preparation work to receive epoxy; apply in accordance with the
manufactuerer's instruction and recommendations to :-
Floor 176 m2
Allow here for make good existing floor finishes including

apply 2 coat of SikaTop Seal 109MY cementitious
waterproofing on concrete slab including non-shrink
cementitious angle fillet, with minimum 300mm wide and
250mm upturn; and complete with 600mm x 600mm porcelain
floor tile and skirting
F to match existing.
(Lab 4 to Lab 7) (Quantity Provisional)
G
Floor 48 m2
Upturn 250mm high 145 m
To Collection :
D2/5/1
Page 32 of 262
CARPENTER AND JOINER
2' x 4' x 9.5mm thick fibrous plaster ceiling fixed to and

including approved selected galvanised suspended metal
framing system to required radius if necessary and all in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruction,
specification and all as per detail drawing :-
A Ceiling; < 3.50m high; internally 175 m2
To Collection :
Collection
Page D2/5/1 Page
D2/5/2

D2/5/2
Page 33 of 262
CARPENTER AND JOINER
2' x 4' x 9.5mm thick fibrous plaster ceiling fixed to and
including approved selected galvanised suspended metal

framing system to required radius if necessary and all in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruction,
specification and all as per detail drawing :-
A m2
Ceiling; < 3.50m high; internally 175
To Collection :
Collection
Page D2/5/1 Page
D2/5/2

D2/5/2
Page 34 of 262
BILL SUMMARY Page

No
1 Roof. D2/1/2
2 External Wall and Frame. D2/2/1
3 Doors and Window. D2/3/1
4 Wall Finishes. D2/4/1
5 Floor and Ceiling Finishes. D2/5/2
Total To Summary of Tender :
D2/6/1
Page 35 of 262
3. BILL NO. 3 – M&E WORKS
PROJECT: XMU Block A4 Lab 6 & 7
SUMMARY OF TENDER PRICE
ITEM DESCRIPTION AMOUNT (RM)
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SERVICES

1.0 PRELIMINARIES
2.0 AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION SERVICES
3.0 COLD WATER PLUMBING SERVICES
4.0 SANITARY PLUMBING SERVICES
5.0 ELECTRICAL SERVICES
6.0 ELV SERVICES
TOTAL ESTIMATED OF M&E PRICES (RM)
SIGNATURE OF TENDERER :………………………………………………………
NAME IN FULL :………………………………………………………
POSITION :………………………………………………………
NAME & ADDRESS OF FIRM :………………………………………………………

COMPANY STAMP
DATE :………………………………………………………
SIGNATURE OF WITNESS :………………………………………………………
NAME IN FULL :………………………………………………………
POSITION :………………………………………………………
NAME & ADDRESS OF FIRM :………………………………………………………

COMPANY STAMP
DATE :………………………………………………………
Page 36 of 262
XMU Block A4 Lab 6 & 7
BREAKDOWN FOR SCHEDULE OF PRICES
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY RATE (RM) AMOUNT (RM)
1.0 PRELIMINARIES
1.1
Provision for preparation of all services shop drawings,
equipment catalogues, technical data sheets, samples L.S.
etc. for approval prior to commencement of work.
1.2
Provision for preparation of six (2) sets of hard cover
bound and one (1) softcopy Operation & Maintenance L.S.
Manual and As-Built Drawing for all services.
1.3
System installation & equipment warranty, service and
comprehensive maintenance of all equipments, auxiliaries
and accessories supplied under the Contract, submission L.S.
of monthly inspection reports and to provide 24 hours
breakdown services during the Defects Liability Period.
1.4 Adjustment, Alignment, Testing and Commissioning. L.S.
1.5 Comprehensive training. L.S.
Liason works with Authority and obtaining of Approvals

1.6 including all fees such as inspection, contribution and L.S.
procesing fees.
For compliance with conditions of contract including

1.7 insurances, guarantees & etc. LS
Any other work not mentioned above but is necessary for

1.8 the complete installation and proper functioning of the L.S.
complete system (To be specified by the tenderer)
i)
ii)
iii)
TOTAL FOR PRELIMINARIES
(TRANSFER TO SUMMARY OF TENDER PRICE - ITEM 1)
Page 37 of 262
AIR CONDITIONING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION UNIT

2.0 UNIT QTY AMOUNT
SERVICES RATE
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Air

Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Services in accordance
with the Specification and Tender Drawings comprising but not
limited to the following:-
LAB 6
2.1 Installation of 2 nos of S-73MU1E51 (supply by client) and 1 nos L.S.
S-106MU1E51 (supply by client)
LAB 7
2.2 Installation of 2 nos of S-73MU1E51 (supply by client) and 1 nos L.S.
S-106MU1E51 (supply by client)
LAB 6 & 7
Supply and install of U-20ME2H7 outdoor condenser unit c/w
2.3 nos 1
filters, coils, motor, controls & timer switch, cabling and all
associated accessories to complete the system.
Supply and install insulated refrigerant pipework (separate
insulation for liquid and gas pipe), cabling from indoor unit to
2.4
outdoor unit and other necessary accessories to complete the
installation as per the specification and drawing.
I Lab 6 nos 3
II Lab 7 nos 3
To supply and install condensate drain pipework, from indoor unit

to nearest drain/floor trap c/w fittings and other necessary
2.5
accessories to complete the installation as per the specification
and drawing.
I Lab 6 nos 3
II Lab 7 nos 3
All necessary coring, hacking, and patch-back/make good of

2.6 L.S.
wall/floors with cement shall be included.
System installation & equipment warranty, service and

comprehensive training, tagging, painting and maintenance of all
equipments, materials, auxiliaries and accessories supplied under
2.7 the Contract during the Defects Liability Period. L.S.
Adjustment, Alignment, Testing and commissioning of the Ceiling

Mounted split units including pressure test of refrigerant pipe, air
2.8 balancing and etc. L.S.
Other works not mentioned above but required for a complete

2.9
system (details to be stated by the tenderer).
i)
ii)
iii)
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR AIR CONDITIONING SERVICES
Page 38 of 262
3.0 COLD WATER PLUMBING SERVICES UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the

complete Cold Water Plumbing Services in accordance
with the Specification and Tender Drawings comprising
but not limited to the following:-
Supply and install cold water distribution pipe (PPR

PN16) from existing presurrized piping to all fixture's c/w
3.1 fittings, stop cocks (Chrome Type), valves and all LS
associated accessories to complete the system as
indicated in the drawings.
Testing and commissioning including pressure test and

3.2 flushing upon completion before handing over. L.S.
Allow for comprehensive service and maintenance works

3.3 during defect liability period commence from practical L.S.
completion date.
Other works not mentioned above but required for a

3.4
complete system (details to be stated by the tenderer).
i)
ii)
iii)
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR COLD WATER SERVICES
Page 39 of 262
4.0 SANITARY PLUMBING SERVICES UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the

Sanitary Plumbing Services in accordance with the
Specification and Tender Drawings comprising but not limited
to the following:-
Supply and install above ground soil / waste / vent / uPVC

piping / top access floor traps, floor outlet, gully traps from all
4.1 fixtures' to manholes including pipe fittings, hangers, and LS
necessary accessories to complete the system as per
drawings and specifications.
Testing and commissioning including flow test.

4.2 LS
Provision of labour and necessary equipments etc. to install

4.3 sanitary wares and fittings. LS
Allow for comprehensive service and maintenance works

4.4 during defect liability period commence from practical LS
completion date.
Other works not mentioned above but required for a

4.5
complete system (details to be stated by the tenderer).
i)
ii)
iii)
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR COLD WATER SERVICES
Page 40 of 262

UNIT RATE AMOUNT
ITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY
(RM) (RM)
5.0 ELECTRICAL & EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE SERVICES
A LOW VOLTAGE INSTALLATION SYSTEM

The price indicated below shall include hacking, cutting, and making good
existing walls, partitions, floor etc and other work to make the installation
fully complete and maintain room condition as specified in drawings and up
to Client's and Consulting Engineer's satisfaction.
1.0 SUB SWITCH BOARD (SSB)
Supply, delivery, install, testing and commissioning of Sub Switch Board
(SSBB) tapping from existing MCCB to be replaced from 100A to 200A TPN
c/w all protection relays, mounting accessories and other necessary no 1
accessories to requirements and standards as per drawing and
specifications.
2.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARD (DB)

Supply, delivery, install, testing and commissioning of Distribution Board
(DB) c/w MCCBs, RCCBs, MCBs, busbar, Surge Protection Device, all
protection relays, mounting accessories and other necessary accessories.
(All switchboards shall be rated at 25 kA, 10kA, 1 sec for DB)
2.1 TPN DB- LAB 6 no 1
2.3 TPN DB- LAB 7 no 1
Supply, delivery, install, testing and comissioning of Earthing system c/w

continuity conductors, earthing leads, earth electrodes and concrete type
2.3 Earth chamber c/w 25mm dia. PVC pipe from Distribution Boards (DBs) lot
connecting to the earthing chamber, copper rod and all accessories to
complete the installations.
3.0 SUB-MAIN CABLE AND WIRING

To supply and install sub-main cabling c/w electro galvanized cable trays /
trunking / conduit with proper support and bracket and all accessories, heat
shrinkage cable tagging, painting, arrows, grounding etc including hacking
works and make good finishing to specifications requirements and
drawings.
a 4 x 35mmsq/ 1C CU PP + 16mmsq/ 1C CU PP Earth Cable to DB-LAB 6 m

b 4 x 35mmsq/ 1C CU PP + 16mmsq/ 1C CU PP Earth Cable to DB-LAB 7 m
4.0 FINAL CIRCUIT WIRING

All wiring shall be in galvanised trunking or in PVC/G.I Conduit concealed in
cement slab / wall / ceiling void including hacking works to requirements
and standards as per drawing and specifications.
LAB 6
Wiring of Lighting point using 2 x 2.5mm2/1C CU PVC cable + earth in
4.1 concealed upvc conduit c/w 1 nos 10Amp 2-way switch and all accessories nos 15
to complete the installations.
Wiring of power point using 2 x 4mm2 PVC cu.+ E c/w 13Amp metalclad
4.2 nos 62
switch socket outlet and all accessories to complete the installations.
Wiring of power point using 2 x 4mm2 PVC cu.+ E c/w 13Amp metalclad
4.3 weatherproof switch socket outlet and all accessories to complete the nos 1
installations.
Wiring of power point using 2 x 10mm2 PVC cu.+ E c/w 30Amp IP65 TPN
4.4 nos 8
Isolator and all accessories to complete the installations.
Air-Cond point using 2 x 2.5mm2/1C CU PVC cable + earth in concealed

4.5 upvc conduit c/w 20A double pole switch and all necessary accessories to nos 3
Page 41 of 262
LAB 7
Wiring of Lighting point using 2 x 2.5mm2/1C CU PVC cable + earth
4.6 in concealed upvc conduit c/w 1 nos 10Amp 2-way switch and all nos 15
accessories to complete the installations.
Wiring of power point using 2 x 4mm2 PVC cu.+ E c/w 13Amp

4.7 metalclad switch socket outlet and all accessories to complete the nos 64
installations.

4.8 metalclad weatherproof switch socket outlet and all accessories to nos 3

4.9 nos 9
IP65 TPN Isolator and all accessories to complete the installations.
Air-Cond point using 2 x 2.5mm2/1C CU PVC cable + earth in

4.10 concealed upvc conduit c/w 20A double pole switch and all nos 3
necessary accessories to complete the installations.
Testing and Commissioning including cable megger test, insulation

5.0 test, functional test with socket tester, light bulb testing for lighting L.S
points etc.
6.0 Lighting Fittings

To install 600 x 1200 miror reflector light fittings with T8 LED tube
6.1
light c/w 2x16W lamp, colour 4000k, lumen 1600Lm
i) Lab 6 nos 15
ii) Lab 7 nos 15
To install Emergency Lighting c/w 1 x 13 led type with self contain

emergency battery supply,with min. 3hr operation, automatic
6.2
charger etc similar to pne, econlite or equivalent(jabatan bomba
malaysia approved type)
i) Lab 6 nos 1
ii) Lab 7 nos 1
To install `KELUAR' sign c/w 1 x 8w led type with self contain

emergency battery supply with min.3hr operation, automatic charger
6.3
etc similar to pne, econlite or equivalent(jabatan bomba malaysia
approved type)
i) Lab 6 nos 2
ii) Lab 7 nos 2
6.4 Testing and Commissioning L.S
Any other works or equipments not covered as above items but are
required or indicated in the Specification and Drawing to complete
7.0 the works as a whole functioning system (if not stated and allowed
for herein shall deem to be included in the various breakdown items
above)
(a) ……………...………………
(b) …………………...…………
(c) …………………...…………
CARRIED FORWARD TO "SUMMARY OF PRICE'S"
Page 42 of 262
UNIT
AMOUNT
ITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT QTY RATE
(RM)
(RM)
6.0 ELV SERVICES
To supply and install of the complete Extra Low Voltage System c/w
making good to the satisfaction of S.O as per specification and drawings:-
Supply and install HUAWEI (S5720-28P-LI-AC) 24 giga bits port with 10g
1.0 combo SPF layer 2 switches , 2 units single mode patch cord & 4 units nos 1
1G single mode SFP
2.0 LAB 6
Installation of Huawei AP5030DN (supply by client) Access point using

2.1 nos 1
Cat 6 cable
2.2 Supply and Install the Data point using Cat 6 cable nos 7
3.0 LAB 7
Installation of Huawei AP5030DN (supply by client) Access point using

3.1 nos 1
Cat 6 cable
3.2 Supply and Install the Data point using Cat 6 cable nos 5
4.0 Supply and install all Fire Barriers, Cable seal etc. L.S
Any other works or equipments not covered as above items but are
required or indicated in the Specification and Drawing to complete the
5.0
works as a whole functioning system (if not stated and allowed for herein
shall deem to be included in the various breakdown items above)
(a) ……………...………………
(b) …………………...…………
CARRIED FORWARD TO "SUMMARY OF PRICE'S"
Page 43 of 262
4. SUMMARY OF TENDER
SUMMARY OF TENDER ALTERNATIVE TENDER "A"
CADANGAN PENGUBAHSUAIAN DAN TAMBAHAN KEPADA RUANG AKADEMIK

BLOK A4 TINGKAT 5 DI ATAS LOT 115628, BANDAR SUNSURIA, AMPAR TENANG,
MUKIM DENGKIL, DAERAH SEPANG, SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN UNTUK
TETUAN XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION DEVELOPMENT SDN BHD
Item Description Page No RM Sen
1 Bill No. 1 - Preliminaries D1/1/14
2 Bill No. 2 - Building Works D2/6/1
3 Bill No. 3 - M&E Works
TOTAL CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER :
Completion Period : 4 Months.
TENDERER :
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
(Name of Firm In Capital Letters)
Signature of Signature of
Tenderer : …………………………………… Witness :……………………………...
Name in Full : …………………………………… Name in Full : …………………………….
In the
Capacity of : …………………………………... Occupation: ……………………………….
Address : ……………………………………. Address : ………………………………….
: ……………………………………… ………………………………….
: ……………………………………… …………………………………..
Date : …………………………………….. Date : ………………………………….
E/1
Page 44 of 262
SUMMARY OF TENDER ALTERNATIVE TENDER "B"
SUMMARY OF TENDER
DESCRIPTION
ALTERNATIVE TENDER “B”
1 Total of Bills No. 1 - 3 Inclusive As Alternative Tender "A" :
2 Deduct - Provisional Sums :
Balance Representing Value Of Builder's Works :
3 Add / Deduct: For Works To Be Completed Within Contractor's

Own Completion Period of _______________( ) months :
4 Add Back: Provisional Sums :
ALTERNATIVE TENDER "B"

TOTAL CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER :
(Completion Period : _________________ months)
TENDERER :
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
(Name of Firm In Capital Letters)
Signature of Signature of
Tenderer : …………………………………… Witness :……………………………...
Name in Full : …………………………………… Name in Full : …………………………….
In the
Capacity of : …………………………………... Occupation: ……………………………….
Address : ……………………………………. Address : ………………………………….
: ……………………………………… ………………………………….
: ……………………………………… …………………………………..
Date : …………………………………….. Date : ………………………………….
E/2
Page 45 of 262
PART 5: APPENDICES
1. APPENDIX 1: DRAWING
1. A4 5F Lab 6, 7 Layout
Page 46 of 262
Page 47 of 262
Page 48 of 262
Page 49 of 262
Page 50 of 262
Page 51 of 262
Page 52 of 262
Page 53 of 262
Page 54 of 262
Page 55 of 262
Page 56 of 262
2. A4 5F Lab 6, 7 Electrical
Page 57 of 262
Page 58 of 262
Page 59 of 262
Page 60 of 262
Page 61 of 262
Page 62 of 262
3. A4 5F Lab 6, 7 Machine
Page 63 of 262
Page 64 of 262
Page 65 of 262
2. APPENDIX 2: SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICE
DAYWORK
Daywork which cannot be measured or valued at the rates in the Schedule of Rates shall be
executed and valued as Daywork.
No work shall be carried out as Daywork unless so permitted by the Engineer prior to the
commencement of such work.
The Contractor shall append Daywork prices in the appropriate column below and such
appended prices shall be deemed to be the actual prime cost to the Contractor of his labour and
mechanical plant or equipment which the Contractor agrees shall be the basis of valuation of
Dayworks as provided under, Clause 11 of the conditions of Contract.
In accordance with Clause 11 paragraph (c) of the Conditions of Contract, fifteen (15) percent
shall be added to the Daywork prices which shall include for the use of all ordinary plant,
tools, scaffolding, supervision and profit. This percentage addition shall be deemed to include
for the following costs :-
1) Head office charges

2) Site supervision and site staff
3) Overtime rates
4) Time lost due to inclement weather
5) Bonuses and all other incentive payments
6) Fares and time allowed for travelling
7) Safety and welfare facilities
8) Insurances required under the Conditions of Contract
9) All non-mechanically operated plant, staging and trestles, protective clothing,

artificial lighting, storage facilities
10) Transport of labour, materials and plant to and from site
Daywork sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer for verification in accordance to the
procedure provided in the Conditions of Contract.
Page 66 of 262
A copy of all verified Daywork sheets shall be forwarded to the Quantity Surveyor for his
retention.
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT RATE (RM)
LABOUR
A Mason Per 8-hour

day
B Carpenter
C Steel Bender
D Lorry Driver
E Excavator Driver
F Vibrating Roller Driver
G Scraper Driver
H Male Labourer
J Female Labourer
Page 67 of 262
PLANT
A Piling frame with motor, cable and ground supports Per 8-hour
complete with 1016Kg (2,400 lb) hammer day
B Generator
i) 20 KVA Generator Set
ii) 50 KVA Generator Set
iii) 60 KVA Generator Set
iv) Bar Cutter Machine
v) Bar Bending Machine
vi) Road Roller Compactor (1 tonne)
vii) 25 Tonne Vibrate Roller
viii) Welding Set (diesel) 500 amp
C Lorry
i) Lorry with driver, 6 wheels (incl diesel)
ii) Lorry with driver, 6 wheels long body
iii) Lorry with driver, 10 wheels
iv) Lorry crane with driver, 8 Tonne 6 wheels
v) Lorry crane with driver, 15 Tonne 10 wheels
vi) Lorry crane without driver, 8 Tonne 6 wheels
vii) Backhoe
viii) Backhoe complete with breaker
ix) Excavator (incl diesel)
x)
D Crane
i) Mobile crane, 16 tonne (incl diesel)
ii) Mobile crane, 20 tonne (incl diesel)
iii) Mobile crane, 25 tonne (incl diesel)
iv) Mobile crane, 35 tonne (incl diesel)
v) Tower crane with operator
vi) Skylift 25 meter
vii) Skylift 54 meter
E Pump Concrete pump truck 36m boom
F Others
i) Concrete Mixer 300/200 litres
ii) Vibrator 38mm
iii) Air compressor c/w diesel engine; 390 CFM
iv) Air compressor c/w diesel engine; 265 CFM
v) Mortar pump c/w electric motor
Page 68 of 262
The Contractor shall insert below a list of all the plants and their daywork rates, which he
will require in carrying out his Contract. The rates shall be deemed to include for fuel,
maintenance, servicing and all other costs, expenses and charges including the cost of
drivers, operators and attendants.
Page 69 of 262
Schedule of Basic Material Rate/Prices
Tenderer shall insert the nett prices delivered to site excluding Profit and Establishment
Charges and after deducting all Trade Discount and Rebates of the following basic materials
which shall be used as a basis for derivation of new rates for Variations and for Interim
Valuations.
1. Ordinary Portland Cement per 50kg bag
2. Hardcore per m3
3. Sand per m3
4. Coarse aggregate per m3
5. Mild Steel bar reinforcement per tonne
6. High yield steel bar reinforcement per tonne

7. BRC A6 fabric reinforcement per m2

10. Common brick / Clay brick per 1,000 pcs

11. Cement and Sand Brick per 1,000 pcs
12. Blockwall per 1,000 pcs
13. Shutter boards / plywood per m2
14. per m2
15. per m2
Page 70 of 262
3. APPENDIX 3: SCHEDULE OF TENDERER’S PARTICULARS
A. Tenderer’s Organization
Name of Organization :…………………………………………………
Address :…………………………………………………
…………………………………………………
Telephone No. : ………………………………………………...
Year Established : …………………………………………………
Paid Up Capital : …………………………………………………

(if applicable)
Name of Banker/s : …………………………………………………
…………………………………………………
Max O.D. Limit : …………………………………………………
B. Director’s Particulars
Name of Percentage
Partners/ Experience/Qualifications Holdings B N.B.
Directors %
Note : B – Bumiputra
N.B. – Non-Bumiputra
Page 71 of 262
C. Registration
Class of Body/Department Year Registration

Registration
D. Management/Technical Staff (Responsible for this Project)
Name Designation Qualification Year And Nature

of Experience
E. Schedule of Plant and Equipment for use on this Project
Description of Item No. of Unit Owned/Hired
Page 72 of 262
F. Tenderers’ Experience
Name of Major Projects Name of Employer Contract Date of

Completed Past 5 Years (RM) Value Completion
G. Tenderers’ Current Workload
Contract Stage of Date of

Name of Current Name of Employer Value Completion Completion
Major Projects (RM) %
H. Any Other Information
Page 73 of 262
Note :- The Contractor is to append on a separate sheet of paper if the above space provided is
insufficient.
______________________________ ___________________________
(Contractor) (Witness)
Name : ………………………………………
Designation : ………………………………..
……………………………………………….
Address : ……………………………………. Date : …………………………..
Page 74 of 262
4. APPENDIX 4: TENDER CLARIFICATION QUESTIONAIRE
Date :
PROJECT TITLE : PROPOSED CONNECT LABS AT BLCOK A4 LEVEL 5F FOR XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION
DEVELOPMENT SDN BHD
Tenderer Name :
A. General Answers
1. Please confirm you have scrutinized the document and understand the
scope of works.
2. Please confirm you have fully complied with the entire preliminaries
requirement. Unpriced items are deemed to be included in your scope of
works.
3. Confirm that all Tender Specifications are fully complied with the tender and
is in full compliance to all Design Intent items and specifications.
4. Please confirm your completion period shall include the mobilization and
demobilization period
5. The fixed completion period is 4 Months. Can you comply with the
completion period?
6. Liquidated Damage based on contract condition is RM2,000.00 per day of
delay.
7. You have visited and examined the site and fully are fully aware of the
scope and extent of building works and infrastructure works involved.
8. Are they any specific materials in the tender document which are in
shortage or no longer available?
9. Are you aware there is no provision for cost fluctuation on your schedule of
rates during the contract period?
10. Is there any shortage of labour or plant that you wish to highlight?
11. Are there any discrepancies between the tender documents you wish to
highlight? Do you agree that except for variation works, no claims can be
made for discrepancies in the tender document?
12. Kindly confirm your agreement that the Architect’s decision / QS’s
recommendation shall be final for any rationalization of unit rates relating to
arithmetical error and discount submitted to you.
13. Please highlight and qualify your submission should your tender submission
is based on different specification/ material/ or any exclusion from the
tender document.
14. You are fully aware of method statement, architectural shop drawings and
M+E services coordinated drawings submission requirements prior to
fabrication and commencement of works on site
15. Contractor shall indemnify the Architect and other consultants and to
provide a performance guarantee and PE’s endorsement for the Works so
designed by the Contractor, if any for a minimum period of 10 years from
the date of practical Completion.
B. Construction
1. Are there any items that you consider as problems in construction and/or
implementing the job satisfactorily?
2. Have you checked the lead-time required for construction materials?
3. You shall comply with environmental, health & safety (EHS) requirements,
implementation of safety management rules and regulations during the
entire course of construction.
4. You shall ensure the Works are adhered to approved work programme.
5. You shall comply strictly to CIDB construction industry standard for Quality
Assessment System requirement for Building Construction Works.
6. You shall comply strictly to CIDB construction industry standard for Site
Occupational Safety and Health requirement for Building Construction
Works.
Page 75 of 262
TENDER CLARIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE
C. Preliminaries
1. You have visited the site and fully aware of site constraint and to submit your
site control and logistic plan with indication of material storage area, site
office, etc.
2. Erection of material hoist (if any), loading platform, catching platform and
scaffolding must comply with relevant ordinance and by-laws and all safety
regulations.
D. Sub-Structure & Structure
1. Structure framing and roof assembly -
The Contractor is required to prepare and submit shop drawings for metal
framing structure with PE endorsement before carrying out work.
E. Architectural
1. External & Internal Walls
a. Please confirm all window hood & sill, fins and copings at the external wall are
to be formed and constructed of reinforced concrete where occurs and to be
finished with plaster and paint.
b. Please confirm all external edge and recessed groove of external and internal
plastering works finished with UPVC corner beading /groove to form uniform,
straight and even edges.
c. Please confirm your tender submission includes exmet to junction between
brickwork and steel column/beam before plastering.
2. Alumimium & Glazing Windows
a. All aluminum frame extrusion and glass thickness are fully complied with
window schedules and requirements stated in general notes.
All sealant joints for glazing and the warranty period required shall follow the
specification and preliminaries stated in the tender documents. Contractor is
required to submit all necessary catalogues and test report for Architect’s
approval before commencement of work.
b. All aluminium windows shall be provided with sub-frames.
c. Aluminium extrusion, powder coated specification and thick is in compliance
with specification with outdoor finish of min. 60 microns,
d. You are required to carry out on-site water leaking test as requested by the
Architect.
3. Floor & Wall Finish
a. All floor finishes and wall finishes shall as per architectural finishes schedule
b. Provide adequate wall and floor ceramic tiles in storage for rectification works
according to sizes and batches within Defects Liability Period.
4. Waterproofing
a. Warranty - Provide prior to issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion,
a joint performance warranty by manufacturer and applicator for a period of ten
(10) years,commencing from the date of Practical Completion.
5. Roofing
a. Metal deck roof assembly comply with material specification as stated in the
material schedule with design warranty of Ten (10) years, commencing from
the date of Practical Completion.
b. Flashing
All flashing shall be installed by tucking into diamond-cut gap in wall and
sealing gaps with approved sealant.
c. All fascia capping and flashing joint shall be min. 150mm overlap and set with
continuous sealant.
d. Gutter, Rainwater Outlet & Downpipe
The Contractor ‘s scope of work shall include supply and fix of GI steel gutter
and dome grating at roof outlet, and UPVC rainwater downpipes including
joiners, bracket and all necessary accessories.
Page 76 of 262
F. Cold Water Plumbing

1. Tap and Stop Valve
All stopcocks and gate valves shall be of chrome-plated finish.
G. Cost Saving Proposal
1. Tenderer is to fill up the following section for cost saving
proposal,
if any :
a) __________________
b) __________________
c) __________________
H. Others Warranty
1. Contractor shall provide the following warranty for compliance with contract
condition (commencing from the date of Practical Completion) :-
a. 6 years warranty against deterioration or defects for aluminium and glazing
works
b. 6 years warranty against deterioration or defects for glazing works sealant
c. 10 years warranty against deterioration or defects for roof truss and roof
covering
I. As-Built Drawings & Operating Dan Maintenance Manual
1. Contractor shall prepare and submit the shop drawing and as-built drawings
not limited to the following :-
a. Proprietary roof truss and roof covering
b. Aluminium & glazing works
c. Architectural General Arrangement
d. All M+E services shop drawings plumbing , mechanical and electrical
installation
J. Programme
1. How soon you can mobilize to start work after contract award?
2. What are the critical paths and milestones?
3. Submission of work programme.
K. Site Organization
1. Identify the following Person-In-Charge (P.I.C. ) and resume for these
positions:
a. Project Manager
b. Site Agent
2. Submission of Project Organization Chart
3. Explain briefly your quality management and communication system on-
site and off-site
J. Others
1. Confirm location of the site office for material storage and rubbish
containment by submitting proposed site control layout plan.
2. Provide sub-contractor list
3. How soon after award can you submit the followings:-
a. Method Statements
b. QEHS Quality Management Plan / Project Quality Plan
c. Site Safety & Logistic Control Plan
b. QAQC for relevant trades
c. List of Suppliers
d. Building Material Submission Schedule
e. Shop Drawings Submission Schedule
Page 77 of 262
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORKS
PROJECT TITLE : PROPOSED CONNECT LABS AT BLCOK A4 LEVEL 5F FOR XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION
DEVELOPMENT SDN BHD
Tenderer Name :
No. Item Clarification/Confirmation
1. a) Shop drawings and sample board to be submitted completely for approval
within one week
b) Two (2) sets of as-built drawings (hardcopy and CD) and operation &
maintenance manual as per tender specification and requirement
c) A full-time qualified M&E coordinator on site and CV must be submitted for
approval.
d) A qualified electrician with Suruhanjaya Tenaga certificate to verify and sign
for all testing and commissioning works related to electrical and mechanical.
e) A qualified plumber with Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara certificate to
verify and sign for all testing and commissioning works related to plumbing
works.
2 To confirm that any blank or stated as a dash/slash against any item in the
Schedule of Prices, the values thereof shall be deemed to be included in the
tender.
3 To provide all necessary uPVC pipe sleeves for pipe/trunking running through the
wall, slab and beam including filling all pipe sleeve with polystyrene foam.
4 To include all necessary hacking, coring, cutting, patching etc. for all installation
works and then making good / reinstate.
5 To confirm all space provided for all equipment such as distribution boards and
ELV equipment is sufficient.
6 To confirm that cabling works to comply to the following factors in relation to the
current carrying capacity of cables:-
i. Surface wiring using clips – group factor;
ii. Wiring using conduits – space factor 40%;
iii. Wiring using ducts – space factor 45%;
iv. Concealed wiring – group factor
7 The switchboards (Form 2B) and DB/SSB shall be metal clad enclosure and
follow IEC standard IEC 60439-3. For MSB thickness is 2.3mm and SSB/DB
thickness is 2mm.
8 All prices including all necessary brackets to mount DB in the riser on any
alternative brick.
9 All cold water piping shall be of PP-R PN16 pipe unless otherwise stated in the
drawing.
10 All the floor traps grating must be of stainless steel without hinge type.
11 All air conditioning outdoor condenser unit must be of ‘Panasonic’ brand.
12 All refrigerant and drain pipe must be laid concealed in wall or slab. Those
refrigerant and drain pipe which are unable to be concealed in wall or slab must
be installed in a PVC trunking.
13 All closed cell insulation thickness for refrigerant pipe concealed in wall shall be
of minimum 10mm thick and 19mm thick for those laid in ceiling space or in
trunking.
14 To confirm that the supply and install of closed cell insulated PVC condensate
drain pipe connecting from indoor FCU to drains/floor trap (including the main
insulated dropper pipe) is included in the tender.
15 The prices shall include all openings, maintenance access, cable containments
(trunking, cable tray, conduit, cable ladder, duct, pipe, etc.), cable gland (Brand:
Conway) which is not shown on the drawing but described in the specification,
required by legislation and authorities, or obviously necessary for the sucessfull
completion, handover as well as satisfactory, proper and safe operation of the
respective installation.
Page 78 of 262
No. Item Clarification/Confirmation
16 All the material provided shall be approved by Sirim, JKR or Suruhanjaya
Tenaga.
17 All testing and commissioning of the electrical services including but not limited to
megger test, continuity test, functional test, HT pressure test, tripping test etc to
be included.
We agree and accept the above clarifications and all additional costs for complying therewith shall be included in
our revised quotation.
Signature of Tenderer …………………………….. Signature of Witness …………………………………….
Name of Authorized
Signatory …………………………….. Name of Witness …………………………………….
NRIC No …………………………….. NRIC No …………………………………….
Address / Company Address / Company

Stamp …………………………….. Stamp …………………………………….
…………………………….. …………………………………….
Page 79 of 262
5. APPENDIX 5: FORMAT OF PERFORMANCE BOND
SPECIMEN OF BANKER’S GUARANTEE FOR PERFORMANCE BOND
To: …………………………………………….. [name and address of Employer]
WHEREAS :-
(A) By an agreement in writing dated ……………… 20 ….. (hereinafter called the “Contract”) and
made between (1) ………………………………………… (hereinafter called the “Employer”)
and (2) ……………………………….. (hereinafter called the “Contractor”), the Contractor has
agreed to construct, complete and maintain
……………………………………………………………….. upon and subject to the terms and
conditions of the Contract.
(B) The terms of the Contract oblige the Contractor to provide the Employer with a performance
bond in the form of a bank guarantee upon the terms hereof.
In consideration of your accepting our obligations herein contained in discharge of the Contractor’s
obligation to provide such guarantee, we, …………………………. [Full name and address of bank]
(hereinafter called “the Guarantor”) hereby covenant with you and agree as follows:
1. If the Contractor shall in any respect fail to execute the Contract or commit any breach of his
obligations thereunder then the Guarantor shall pay to the Employer up to and not exceeding
the sum of Malaysian Ringgit ………………………………….. (RM ………………..) or such
part thereof, on the Employer’s demand notwithstanding any contestation or protest by the
Contractor or by the Guarantor or by any other third party and without any further proof or
conditions and without any right of set-off or counterclaim. Provided always that the total of all
partial demands so made shall not exceed the sum of RM …………………….. and that the
Guarantor’s liability to pay the Employer as aforesaid shall correspondingly be reduced
proportionate to any partial demand having been made as aforesaid.
2. Our obligations hereunder shall not be affected by any act, omission, matter or thing which but
for this provision might operate to release or otherwise exonerate us from our obligations
hereunder in whole or in part, including without limitation and whether or not known to us or
you:
(a) any time or waiver granted to the Contractor or any other person;
(b) the taking, variation, compromise, renewal or release of or refusal or neglect to perfect
or enforce any rights, remedies or securities against the Contractor or any other person;
(c) any legal limitation, disability or incapacity relating to the Contractor or any other
person;
(d) any variation of or amendment to the Contract or the works to be performed thereunder
or any other document or security so that references to the Contract in this Guarantee
shall include each such variation and amendment; and
(e) any unenforceability, invalidity or frustration of any obligations of the Contractor or
any other person under the Contract or any other document or security.
Page 80 of 262
3. This Guarantee shall remain valid and in full force and effect until
……………………………….. (the “expiry date”). Claims, if any, must be received by the
Guarantor within four (4) weeks of the expiry date.
4. We have been informed that the Employer requires the Contractor to extend this guarantee if
practical completion has not been certified under the Contract by the date 28 days prior to such
expiry date. We undertake to pay you such guaranteed amount upon receipt by us, within such
period of 28 days, of your written demand and written statement that practical completion has
not been certified and that this guarantee has not been extended.
5. Any payment made hereunder shall be made free and clear of, and without deduction for or on
account of, any present or future taxes, duties, charges, fees, deductions or withholdings of any
nature whatsoever and by whomsoever imposed.
6. The benefit of this Guarantee may be assigned by you.
7. This Guarantee shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Malaysia
and we hereby agree to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of Malaysia over
any claim arising out of this Guarantee.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF this Guarantee has been executed on the ……………. day of
……………………. 20 ……..
The Common Seal of )

……………………… [Guarantor Bank] )
was hereunto affixed in the presence of: )
OR
Signed by ……………………………… )
for and on behalf of )
……………………… [Guarantor Bank] )
in the presence of: )
Witness Signature: …………………………………………..

Name in Block Letters: …………………………………………..
Occupation: …………………………………………..
Address: …………………………………………..
…………………………………………..
…………………………………………..
…………………………………………..
I.C./Passport No. …………………………………………..
Page 81 of 262
6. APPENDIX 6: CHECK LIST OF REQUIRED DOCUMENT
1. Form 9 / Section 17 of The Companies Act 2016 (”CA 2016”)
2. Valid CIDB license
3. Form 13/Section 28 of CA 2016
6. Form 44/Section 46(3) of CA 2016
7. Memorandum of Association and Articles of Association/

Constitution
8. Business licenses/permits issued by the local authority
9. Company profile
10. Organization Chart & Number of manpower/staff
11. Key management staff experience
12. List of projects reference
13. List of referees
14. Certification and accreditation such as ISO
** Note:
1. Please tick √ documents submitted
2. The above items (1) to (7) must be certified by the company secretary.
Page 82 of 262
PART 6: SPECIFICATION & PREAMBLES
SECTION I – BUILDING WORKS
1. DEMOLITIONS AND WORKS ON SITE
1.1. GENERAL
1.1.1. All demolitions and works on site shall be executed in a systematic manner as directed by
the Architect.
1.1.2. The Contractor will be deemed to have visited the Site before tendering and to have
inspected the construction of the structure and/or structures to be demolished or altered, and
the degree to which the said structure and/or structures are to be demolished or altered, and
also the construction of the existing building to be extended or property adjacent to the site,
as he will be held solely responsible for any damage to the existing building to be extended
or adjacent property caused by the work in demolitions or alterations, and he is to provide
all shoring and supports which are necessary to prevent such damage. Should any such
damage occur it will be made good by the Contractor entirely at his own expense.
1.1.3. The Contractor shall ascertain from the Authorities the presence or otherwise, of and actual
positions of underground cables, or other service pipes, including telephone and sewer
lines.
1.1.4. Any subsequent damage to the said cables and pipes will be at the entire financial
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.1.5. Prices for all demolition work shall include for all work associated with the demolition
inclusive of all safety precautions, mitigation of nuisance, removal of debris, etc.
1.1.6. The descriptions and quantities entered in the Bills of Quantities are for identification
purposes only. The true extent must be ascertained by the Contractor during his site visit.
No consideration shall be given to claims for extra payment due to the site items different to
those entered in the Bills of Quantities.
1.1.7. The Contractor shall be held to have understood fully all matters concerning the Works to
be carried out under the Contract. Any queries should be settled with the Architect prior to
submission of the tender. No consideration shall be given to any queries raised by the
Contractor indicating lack of comprehension of work to be done or material to be supplied
after the acceptance of the tender.
1.1.8. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of the public and adjoining
properties. The Contractor must use adequate equipment, take all safety precautions and
make every effort to prevent nuisance in carrying out the demolitions and to indemnify the
Employer from any liabilities arising out of claims by a third party against any damage, loss
or injury, person due to the execution of the work and/or caused by his servants, agents or
Sub-Contractors. He shall take all safety nuisance and he is to allow in his price all
contingencies that may be necessitated by the execution of the works.
1.2. PREPARATORY WORK
1.2.1. The Contractor shall minimize, as far as possible, any nuisance caused by the creation of noise
or dust, or from any other cause during the progress of the Works and shall include for spraying
water on work to be demolished.
1.2.2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary dust sheets and temporary screens as are necessary to
prevent the circulation of dust etc.
1.2.3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, including altering when necessary or as directed by
the Architect, all necessary shoring, supports, needles and strutting, and remove when directed
by the Architect and make good after.
1.2.4. No approval by the Architect of any shoring, supports, etc. will relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities and/or liabilities under the Contract.
1.3. DEMOLITIONS
Page 83 of 262
1.3.1. The pulling down, dismantling and demolition etc. shall be executed with due caution, and in
such a manner and sequence as to cause no risk of damage to persons or property.
1.3.2. Existing parts of the building; whether structural or decorative not removed by reason of the
alterations, shall be adequately protected and particular care shall be taken to prevent any
damage occurring to that section of the work during the period of the Contract by whatever
means the Contractor considers necessary. Should any damage occur as a result of the neglect of
the Contractor to adequately protect any of the work, he will be responsible for replacing or
repairing damaged work at his own expenses, to the approval of the Architect.
1.3.3. The Contractor shall ensure that all electric and water mains within and adjacent to the Works
are disconnected before commencing any works, as he will be held responsible for any
circumstance which may occur through not conforming with this requirement.
1.4. MATERIALS AND GOODS RETAINED BY EMPLOYER
1.4.1. The Employer will remove such items of materials, goods and fittings as he may require, before
the site is vested in the Contractor.
1.4.2. Materials and goods arising from pulling down, dismantling and demolition etc., (unless
otherwise described) to become the property of the Contractor and a credit to the Employer shall
be given for such materials and goods, and the amount for such credit is to be inserted where
indicated. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the said materials and
goods, but not unreasonably, and will be required to make good any damage thereto, or to
reimburse the Employer financially in respect thereof.
1.4.3. Any such materials subsequently required by the Architect to be used in the new work or left on
the site, shall be cleaned, stored where directed, value and the amount allowed to the Contractor
shall be the amount as set out in the "Credit" column, where no value appears against any
particular item, it shall be understood that the old materials are of no value to the Contractor. All
old materials described as "set aside for re-use" shall be the property of the owner and they shall
be carefully handled and stored in the proper place appointed by the Architect. The Contractor
shall be required to repair or replace as directed by the Architect any of the old materials
intended for re-use which are missing or damaged in the demolition.
1.4.4. The Employer shall have the right to retain any materials and goods and fittings that has been
taken down and the credit allowed by the Contractor shall be omitted.
1.5. CARTING AWAY
1.5.1. All rubbish on site, debris and rubble arising from the demolitions shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own expense.
1.6. PREAMBLES
The rate for demolitions shall include for: -
1.6.1. the cost of carting away all dismantled materials and debris from site.
1.6.2. making good any damage to remaining buildings or structures.
1.6.3. payment of relevant fees, charges or other payment required by MPPJ, TEN, Telekom, JKR, etc.
1.6.4. all safety measures and other associated works.
1.6.5. all necessary labour, plant, temporary scaffolding and screens and for all watching, lighting and
protection which may be required.
1.6.6. executing the whole of the demolitions and alterations in phases as may be directed by the
Architect.
1.6.7. any other items that the Tenderer considers necessary for the successful completion of the
works.
2. EXCAVATOR
2.1. NATURE OF EXCAVATION

2.1.1. Trial holes have been operated on the site. The results of which could be obtained from the
Architect's office on appointment during normal office hours. The Employer or the Architect in
making this information available, does not in any way absolve the Contractor from his
responsibilities nor is it guarantee that similar conditions apply on other parts of the site.
Page 84 of 262
2.1.2. The Contractor shall visit the site, inspect the trial holes and decide for himself the nature of the
ground and sub-soil to be excavated.
2.1.3. The Contractor may, with the approval of the Architect, carry out any further investigations of
the site. The costs of any such additional investigation of the site shall be entirely at the
Contractor's own expense.
2.2. METHOD OF EXCAVATION
2.2.1. All methods of excavation which the Contractor proposes to employ shall be subject to the
Architect's approval.
2.3. DEPTHS AND DIMENSIONS
2.3.1. All excavations shall be made to the depths, levels and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as
may be directed by the Architect.
2.3.2. The measurement of all excavation and subsequent disposal shall be those before excavating.
The increase in bulk and any extra excavation required for planking and strutting and formwork
for concrete shall be allowed for by the Contractor.
2.4. ROCK EXCAVATION
2.4.1. Should rock be met with in the course of excavation, it shall be removed with wedges and levers
or pneumatic tools. Blasting will not be allowed without written permission from the Architect
who must be fully informed by the Contractor as to steps taken to safeguard the surrounding
property and the Contractor shall take all responsibility for any damage or annoyance caused by
reason of blasting.
2.4.2. Rock shall be defined as a material of a large coherent mass of such size and strength as to
require the loosening of fracture by blasting or the employment of heavy pneumatic tools, or
steel wedges and sledge hammers.
2.4.3. Removal of loose boulders of a volume not exceeding 1 cubic meter, encountered in the
excavations, will not be treated as rock excavation but will be held to be included in rates for
excavation.
2.5. SLIME EXCAVATION
2.5.1. All slime excavation shall be carried out in accordance with the Architect's instructions or as
directed on site. Disposal of slime shall be as directed by the Architect.
2.6. WHEELING, HANDLING AND RAISING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
2.6.1. The description "get out" shall include for all wheeling, basketting out, double handling or re-
excavation from temporary spoil heaps of surplus excavated materials as may be necessary prior
to removal from site.
2.7. DEALING WITH WATER DURING EXCAVATION
2.7.1. The Contractor shall ensure that
2.7.2. all excavations are carried out in the dry, including any excavations that may be taken below
subsoil standing water level.
2.7.3. all preparation of excavated surfaces and placing and compaction of filling in excavations, are
carried out in the dry.
2.7.4. all permanent works executed in excavations are carried out in the dry and are protected from
damage by water during construction.
2.7.5. The Contractor's proposals for dealing with and disposing of water in compliance with the
foregoing requirements, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Architect.
2.8. FORMATIONS
2.8.1. In order to ensure that formations for reinforced concrete members cast on the ground are not
damaged by weathering, the last 150mm of material in the bottom of the excavations shall not
be removed until immediately before the blinding concrete is placed.
2.8.2. Except only, when otherwise agreed by the Architect, the final formations shall not in any case
remain exposed to the weather for more than 12 hours before being covered.
2.9. CONSOLIDATION OF EXCAVATED SURFACES
Page 85 of 262
2.9.1. The bottoms of all excavations, after being trimmed and levelled, shall be well rammed and
consolidated wherever necessary to provide a suitable formation, and the Contractor, shall, if so
directed by the Architect, consolidate such surfaces by means of a hand propelled vibrating
roller or vibrating plate.
2.9.2. If in any part of the Works and as a result of the operations of the Contractor, any excavated or
made-up surface is damaged by site traffic, softened or otherwise made unsuitable, then the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, excavate and remove the damaged or unsuitable soil down
to an approved formation, compact that formation and backfill to the specified formation level
with properly compacted granular filling as directed by, and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2.10. BAD GROUND
2.10.1. Loose soil, bad ground or cavities encountered in any part of the excavations, shall be
immediately inspected by the Architect and save for any directions to the contrary that may be
given by him, shall be excavated to an approved formation and profile and shall be filled up to
the specified formation level with properly compacted granular filling as directed by, and to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
2.11. EXCESS EXCAVATION
2.11.1. All excavations shall be in accordance with the drawings.
2.11.2. Should the Contractor excavate to a greater depth than that shown on the drawings, then the
Contractor shall at his own expense, make good the excess excavation up to the specified
formation level with properly compacted granular filling, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2.11.3. Should other dimensions of any excavations exceed those shown on the drawings or should the
sides of any excavation cave in, then the Contractor shall, at his own expense, fill all excess
space with properly compacted granular filling, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2.12. RETURN, FILL IN AND RAM
2.12.1. All selected filling used in the Works shall be spread, levelled and thoroughly compacted in
layers. Each layer of selected filling shall not exceed 150mm in thickness. The compaction of
each layer shall be carried out by means of hand propelled vibrating procedure for each location
shall be subject to the prior agreement of the Architect. In addition, the Contractor shall ensure
that the compaction of the filling does not adversely affect adjoining construction.
2.12.2. No filling in shall be executed until the concrete foundations, etc., have been inspected and
approved by the Architect.
2.12.3. All top surfaces of filling upon completion shall be densely finished to the lines and levels
shown on the Drawings or to any alternative lines and levels as may be directed by the
Architect.
2.13. DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS
2.13.1. All excavated materials which are surplus to the requirements of the Works, or which do not
comply with the requirements for incorporation in the Works, shall be removed promptly from
the site and shall be disposed off as directed by the Architect. The Contractor is prohibited from
dumping unwanted building debris on any vacant plot of land, roadside thereby causing chokage
and leading to mosquito to breed. All surplus excavated materials must be removed from site
and dumped at the Contractor's own private dumping ground or at government's dumping
grounds approved for this purpose.
2.14. PLANKING AND STRUTTING
2.14.1. The term planking and strutting shall be deemed to cover whatever methods the Contractor
elects to adopt for upholding the sides of excavation. The Contractor shall be held solely
responsible for upholding the sides of all excavation, concrete or other material will be
considered in this respect.
2.14.2. The Contractor shall provide all planking, strutting and shoring to excavations.
2.15. HARDCORE
2.15.1. The material for hardcore shall be chemically inert and possess a physical strength adequate for
its purpose. It shall be well graded in size but the proportion of fines shall not be such as to fill
the whole of the voids nor the lumps exceed in size the consolidation depth of each layer.
Page 86 of 262
Suitable materials shall be well burnt brick, stone or quarry rubble, coarse well gravel, slag, etc.
Suitable materials for fines shall be sand, fine gravel, well burnt ashes pulverised fuel ash or
similar silts.
2.16. STRUCTURAL DAMP PROOFING MEMBRANES
2.16.1. Structural damp-proofing membranes shall be provided in the areas and at the levels shown on
the drawings. Such membranes shall each comprise one layer of polythene building sheeting not
less than 250 microns thick (1000 gauge) and obtained from an approved supplier. The
membranes shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and to the
satisfaction of the Architect and a double welted fold shall be employed at all membrane joints.
All membranes beneath pile caps shall also be cut and tightly fitted to the profiles of the piles
and shall be secured to those profiles with a robust adhesive tape of suitable width.
2.16.2. The membranes shall be protected as necessary to the satisfaction of the Architect and any
membrane subsequently found to be damaged shall be replaced entirely at the Contractor's
expense.
2.17. BASEMENT EXCAVATION
2.17.1. In basement excavation, the Contractor shall at all times ensure that :
2.17.2. all work is confined within the areas allocated and agreed for the work immediately being
carried out;
2.17.3. the cofferdam and all parts within it are at all times safe for the movement of men and
equipment;
2.17.4. proper drainage is maintanined and all parts, except drains and pumping pits are reasonably dry;
2.17.5. water pumped out into road-side drains are reasonably clear and of a standard acceptable to
Dewan Bandaraya; and
2.17.6. Traffic circulation within the site follows routes agreed in advance with the Architect and the
ingress and egress are as per the requirements of Dewan Bandaraya.
2.17.7. Before commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall submit his proposed sequence of
work to the Architect for his approval.
2.18. PREAMBLES
2.18.1. The rate for each item of "Excavator" shall be held to include for manual and/or mechanical
excavation, in whatever type of formation may be met, with the exception of rock, and will be
held to include for grubbing up roots, for lifting and getting out from any depth, including
staging and planking, strutting and shoring to all faces of excavation, trimming, levelling and
ramming the bases of excavation, filling in voids, forming terraces and embankments in
excavation and/or fill, and all necessary retaining boards, and depositing including keeping
all excavations free from storm and percolating water by pumping or otherwise.
2.18.2. The rate for each item of return, fill in and ram shall be held to include packing under ground
beams, or for adoption of alternative methods of construction, if necessary, where ground beams
project over excavations for column bases and/or pile caps, and for any other operation of a like
nature.
2.18.3. The rate for each item of earth filling, hardcore and similar materials shall be held to include for
preparing the surface to receive subsequent construction and for all necessary temporary
retaining boards.
2.18.4. The rate for each item of structural damp proofing membranes shall be held to include for all
welted joints, tapes, etc. in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, for all
cutting to profile and around piles, in whichever size are required.
3. CONCRETOR
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. Materials used in the works shall be of the qualities and kinds specified herein and equal to
approved samples. Delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable sample to be taken
and tested if required. No materials shall be used until and unless approved and materials not
approved shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.
Page 87 of 262
3.1.2. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere in such a manner as to
prevent damage, deterioration or contamination all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
Engineer reserves the rights to inspect any materials to be used on the works at any time and at
any place of storage.
3.1.3. Unless otherwise specified or otherwise agreed to by the Engineer, materials shall comply with
the appropriate Standards, with preference for materials of local manufacture. Where the
requirements of the relevant Standards are in conflict with this specification then this
specification shall take precedence.
3.2. REFERENCE TO BRITISH STANDARD
3.2.1. This specification for concrete used in the works is based upon the following British Standards
with the latest amendments: -
3.2.2. BS 12 : 1958 - Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening). BS 410 : 1969 - Test Sieves.
3.2.3. BS 812 : 1967 - Methods for Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates Sands and Fillers.
3.2.4. BS 882 : 1965 - Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete. BS 1881: 1970
-Methods of Testing Concrete.
3.2.5. BS 3148: 1959 -Tests for Water for Making Concrete.
3.2.6. This specification shall be interpreted, and all sampling and testing shall be carried out, in
accordance with the relevant clauses in these Standards.
3.3. CEMENT
3.3.1. All cement used in the works shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of approved manufacture and
complying with the requirements of BS 12 and shall be supplied to site in sealed and branded
bags of the manufacturer or in properly designed bulk containers.
3.3.2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the name and address of the supplier
and the brand of cement which he proposes to use in the works at least two weeks before the
delivery of cement to the site is allowed. Normally the manufacturer's test certificates will be
accepted as proof of the quality of the cement; but the Engineer may at his discretion carry out
further tests on the cement stored at the site. In the event of any sample being found to be not in
accordance with BS 12 the whole consignment from which the sample comes shall be rejected
and removed by the Contractor at his own expense from the site immediately notwithstanding
any previous acceptance on the strength of the manufacturer's certificate.
3.3.3. The Contractor shall not be allowed to change the approved source of supply or brand of cement
at any time or for whatever reason without the permission m writing of the Engineer.
3.3.4. Notwithstanding any previous acceptance, any bag of cement containing material which has
hardened or otherwise deteriorated shall be rejected and removed from the site by the Contractor
forthwith and at his own expense. Any cement on transit or temporarily placed near the mixer or
elsewhere, after removal from the store, shall be adequately protected from moisture and
damage by approved means.
3.4. STORAGE OF CEMENT
3.4.1. The Contractor shall provide at his own expense on the site a dry, well-ventilated and weather-
proof cement store to the approval of the Engineer for the proper storage of cement. The floor of
such store shall be raised at least 300 mm above ground level or above maximum flood level at
the site whichever is the higher.
3.4.2. Batches of cement shall be used for the works in the order in which they delivered to the site and
method of storage shall be arranged so that this may be done.
3.5. FINE AGGREGATE
3.5.1. Fine aggregate for concrete work shall be hard, clean, well-graded natural sand free from
harmful quantities of clay and silt, saline and vegetable impurities, and other deleterious matter.
It shall be within the following grading limits:-
BS Sieve 5 mm No.7 No.14 No.25 No.52 No.100

% Passing 9-100 70-95 45-85 25-60 5-30 0-10
Page 88 of 262
3.5.2. Field tests shall be carried out on samples to be taken from each and every batch of sand
supplied and delivered to the site. Sand shall not contain more that 6 % by volume of clay and/or
fine silt; neither shall it contain organic impurities in sufficient quantity to show a darker colour
than the standard depth of colour No.3 when tested according to the standard methods given in
BS 812:1960.
3.5.3. Sand which does not comply with these requirements shall be rejected and removed from the
site forthwith at the Contractor's own expense.
3.6. COARSE AGGREGATE
3.6.1. Coarse aggregate for concrete work shall be sound, hard, clean, roughly cubical shaped crushed
granite particles free from harmful quantities of clay, crusher dust, organic impurities or other
deleterious matter.
3.6.2. Coarse aggregate containing an excessive proportion of flat particles, splinters or flakes will not
be accepted. The judgment of the Engineer in this matter shall be final and binding on the
Contractor.
3.6.3. Limestone shall not be used as coarse aggregate without the permission in writing of the
Engineer. Under no circumstance shall limestone be used as aggregate in water retaining, water
excluding or water conveying structures.
3.6.4. The grading of coarse aggregate shall be within the following limits: -
BS Sieve 19mm 10mm 5mm

% Passing 100 25-55 Not more than 10
3.7. SAMPLING AND TESTING OF AGGREGATES

3.7.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the sources of supply and samples of
fine and coarse aggregates which he proposes to use in the works before the delivery of
aggregates to the site is permitted. Samples of the fine and coarse aggregates approved by the
Engineer shall be kept on the site; and the Contractor shall secure his entire supply of each
material from the same source and ensures that all aggregates delivered to the site throughout
the course of the works are of the same quality and grading as the approved samples.
3.7.2. Should it become necessary to change the sources or characteristics of any aggregate this shall
only be done after new samples have been tested and approved by the Engineer and subject to
such safeguards as the Engineer may impose for the maintenance of the quality of the aggregate
specified.
3.7.3. The method of sampling and amount of aggregate to be provided shall be in accordance with
B.S. 812:1967. The tests shall be those as laid down in BS 812:1967, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer. The tests shall be carried out by the Engineer and if a sample should fail in any
of the tests the Engineer may, at his discretion, either reject the batch from which the sample
was taken or order it to be washed and/or screened at the Contractor's expense. Any batch of the
aggregate rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the site forthwith at the Contractor's
expense.
3.8. STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
3.8.1. The Contractor shall at his own expense provide proper and adequate storage for the fine and
coarse aggregates on the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.8.2. The fine and coarse aggregates shall be handled and stored separately and in such a manner that
segregation of the various sized particles does not occur. There shall be physical partition
between the heaps of sand and the heaps of coarse aggregates to prevent intermixing of the
aggregates. The stockpiles shall be formed on a platform of weak concrete, timber, or similar
approved hardstanding, and aggregates shall be kept clean and free from earth and foreign
matter.
3.8.3. Aggregates which in the opinion of the Engineer are not clean or have become intermixed due to
improper storage shall be removed form the site at the Contractor's expense.
3.9. WATER
3.9.1. All water used for making and curing concrete and for testing the water tightness of structures
shall be fresh, clean and not contain organic matter, sulphates or other impurities in sufficient
Page 89 of 262
quantities likely to reduce the strength of the concrete or attack the concrete or the
reinforcement. The Engineer's decision on the suitability or unsuitability of a source of water for
this purpose shall be final.
3.9.2. Where possible, all water shall be obtained from the public supply mains. When such a supply is
not available the Contractor shall make arrangements for obtaining water from a source
approved by the Engineer.
3.9.3. In any case the Contractor shall provide sufficient storage tanks at the site to store enough water
for 1-1/2 days' use in the works.
3.10. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
3.10.1. Bar reinforcement shall be rolled mild steel bars and shall comply with BS 4449. Steel fabric
reinforcement shall comply with BS 1221.
3.10.2. The manufacturer's certificates of test will be accepted as proof of the quality of the steel
reinforcement but the Engineer may, at his discretion, require additional tests to be made on
samples of steel reinforcement stored at the site. In the event of any reinforcement being found
to be not in accordance with the relevant Standard under these additional tests or in the course of
being worked, the whole batch of reinforcement from which the faulty reinforcement comes
may be rejected by the Engineer notwithstanding any previous acceptance on the strength of the
manufacturer's certificate. Any inforcement rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the
site at the Contractor's expense. All inforcement shall be cleaned free loose millscales, loose
rust, oil, grease, earth and other harmful matter before being placed in the forms and shall be
free from these at the time the concrete is placed.
3.11. FIXING REINFORCEMENT
3.11.1. All reinforcement shall be bent cold using bar bending machines and appliances approved by the
Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the drawings the bending dimensions and tolerances and
the dimensions of end anchorage, hooks, binders, stirrups and the like shall be in accordance
with BS 4466:1969, "Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Bars for the Reinforcement of
Concrete".
3.11.2. The reinforcement shall be accurately assembled and firmly secured by wire ties made from
No.16 soft annealed wire so that the whole assembly is rigid and will not displaced while
concrete is being compacted around it. The ends of the wire ties shall be turned inward away
from the face of the forms and shall not be left projecting beyond the reinforcing bars.
3.11.3. Temporary bracing shall be provided to prevent movement of all steel projecting from the
concrete during the course of construction.
3.11.4. The cover for the reinforcement shall be maintained by precast spacing blocks securely wired to
the bars or by other means approved by the Engineer. Spacing blocks for the various cover
dimensions shall be cast from cement mortar made from 1 part of cement and 2 parts of sand.
The blocks shall be well compacted and shall receive full curing treatment before being used.
3.12. WELDING OF REINFORCEMENT
3.12.1. Welding of reinforcement shall not be permitted except in circumstances, which in the sole
opinion of the Engineer are absolutely unavoidable. Welding shall be by electric are and shall be
performed by skilled operator. No welding shall be carried out except under the supervision of
the Engineer's representative.
3.12.2. Welding and testing of welds shall be carried out in accordance with BS 538 'Metal Are
Welding in Mild Steel as Applied to General Building Construction'.
3.12.3. Butt welds shall be of the double "V" type and the included angle between both slopes shall be
between 70 degrees and 100 degrees for vertical and flat welding and the gap between the two
bars shall not exceed 3 mm.
3.12.4. The cut edges of the bars shall be clean and uniform and the bar shall be cleaned for a distance
of at least 25 mm on each side of the joint.
3.12.5. Staging shall be provided if necessary to enable the operator to carry out the welding operations
efficiently and the bars shall be held in the correct position and alignment.
3.12.6. The weld shall be deposited evenly and all slag removed. The finished surface shall be of even
contour without cavities and/or under-cutting. The diameter of the welded joint shall be at least
3 mm more than the bar diameter, the additional thickness being finished off to form a smooth
joint. Faulty welds shall be rejected.
Page 90 of 262
3.12.7. The Engineer may require tensile tests and/or bend tests to be carried out on sample welded
joints cut from bars already welded. The Contractor shall bear any expense involved in this
connection.
3.12.8. The Bend Test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 538, which requires that the welded
joint be machined to the same diameter as the bar and the joint then bent round a former of a
diameter three times the bar diameter through an angle of 180 degrees. The bar should stand this
test without fracture other than very fine cracks on the outer surface.
3.13. FORMWORK
3.13.1. The formwork shall be constructed with any of the following materials:-
i. Sound softwood tongued and grooved boards not less than 20 mm finished thickness,
wrought on one side and two edges, accurately formed and securely fixed to softwood
frames. The surface of the form work shall be worked to a smooth finish after fabrication.
ii. Sound softwood timber boards not less than 20 mm thick lined with galvanished metal
sheet not less than 18 S.W.G. The boards supporting the metal lining shall be of uniform
thickness and the formwork panels shall be made so that they butt closely together, and
grout cannot leak from the joints between adjacent panes.
iii. Waterproof plywood of approved manufacture not less than 10 mm thick, securely fixed to
timber frames.
iv. An approved metal formwork system.
3.13.2. All formwork shall be erected true to line and level and shall be adequately secured and braced
to prevent deflection or movement during the placing, tamping or vibrating of the concrete, and
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of liquid from the concrete. Provision shall be made to
allow the formwork to be removed without shock or damage to the concrete it contains or to
adjacent work.
3.13.3. Column formwork shall be arranged so that the concrete being placed does not have a free fall
of more than 1500 mm and suitable openings shall be provided in the column forms to allow
concrete to be deposited in stages not more than 1500 mm high.
3.13.4. The use of wires passing through the concrete for the purpose of securing the fonnwork in
position shall not be permitted. Bolts passing through the concrete may be used, but their
number must be kept to the minimum required to secure the formwork rigidly. The bolts shall be
not less than 12 mm in diameter and of a type with detachable screw-off heads so that the barrels
of the bolts remain cast in the concrete while the detachable heads can be removed with ease.
The barrel of every bolt used in water retaining, water conveying or water excluding structures
shall have a waterstops in the form of a 100 mm x 100 mm x 3 mm steel washed welded on at
the mid-length of the bolt. The welds shall be continued round the barrel and on both sides of
the washer.
3.13.5. Before any concrete is placed all rubbish shall be removed from the interior of the forms.
3.13.6. Suitable openings shall be provided for this purpose and the openings shall be effectively
plugged before concrete is placed. The forms and all concrete joint surfaces within the forms
shall be thoroughly flushed with water. The forms may with the approval of the Engineer be
treated with an approved composition. Care should be taken to ensure that such composition is
kept out of contact with the reinforcement and concrete joint surfaces, and that there is no excess
of such composition remaining on the forms prior to concreting.
3.13.7. Within four weeks of the acceptance of his Tender the Contractor shall submit for the approval
of the Engineer drawings and descriptions showing the methods he proposes to use for the
erection and support of the form work.
3.14. CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
3.14.1. Concrete for the several parts of the works shall be proportioned as indicated in Table 1.1.
3.14.2. Cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight; and water by volume.
The fine and coarse aggregate shall be measured separately. A weigh batcher shall be used for
the purpose of weighing cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate. The accuracy of the
weights indicated by the weigh batcher shall be regularly checked and shall be maintained
within +/- 2 percent of the actual total weight of all aggregates and cement in onebatch.
3.14.3. The weights of the fine and coarse aggregates specified in Table 1.1 refer to the materials in the
state when the particles are saturated but surface dry. Tests shall be carried out twice daily or
more frequently if considered necessary by the Engineer to determine the moisture contents of
Page 91 of 262
the fine aggregate. Allowance shall be made for the water contained in the aggregate when
calculating the water to be added to the mix.
3.14.4. While the proportions of the mixes are to be generally as specified in Table 1.1, the Engineer
shall have the right to order variations in these proportions without extra payment to the
Contractor should tests show such variations to be necessary to produce a dense water tight
concrete of the specified strength and of a consistency that will permit of its being worked into
position and compacted satisfactorily into different parts of the works. The proportions of the
mixes specified in Table 1.1 are expected to produce works cube strengths in excess of those
specified in Table 1.1 and a workability sufficient to ensure that the concrete can be worked and
fully compacted using the methods of vibration hereinafter specified in this specification. If,
however, it is shown during the course of the work that the concrete mix is stiffer than can be
placed satisfactorily, an adjustment of up to 5 percent may be made in the water/cement ratio,
but any further adjustment of the mix shall be made by increasing the proportions of both the
water and cement without increasing the water/cement ratio. If the works cube strengths fall
below those specified, the cement proportions shall be increased without any extra payment to
the Contractor.
TABLE 1.1
Minimum Maximum Characte Nominal Mix

Maximum
Cement Size of ristic Cement/Fine
Water/
Concrete Content in Coarse Strength Aggregate/
Location in Works Cement
Grade Concrete Aggregate at 28 days Coarse
Ratio
(Kg/cu.m.) (mm) (N/mm2) Aggregate(mm)
Prestressed concrete
40 520 0.45 20 40 See Note (2)
beams, columns, etc.
Water retaining, water

excluding or water
30 400 0.55 20 30 See Note (2)
conveying walls, floors
and structures, roof, etc.
Earth retaining structures;

water retaining, water
25 360 0.55 20 25 1:1.5:3
excluding or water
conveying structures, etc.
Normal structural
20 concrete; precast concrete, 320 0.60 20 20 I :2:4
etc.
Mass concrete backfill or

15 250 0.65 20 15 1:3:6
infill; concrete screeding.
Note:
(1) The minimum quantity of cement permitted shall be as set out in Table above even though the strength of
mixes containing these quantities may exceed the minimum required for the particular class.
(2) The Contractor shall design the concrete mixes and submit his proposals for the approval of the Engineer,
fourteen days prior to use.
3.15. PRELIMINARY TEST MIXES
3.15.1. As soon as possible after possession of site, and before any concrete is placed, the Contractor
shall prepare under the direction of the Engineer a series of trial mixes totalling not more than 4
cubic metres of concrete. Test cubes will be made from samples of these trial mixes, cured and
tested in accordance with the standard methods laid down in clause 601 b of the BS Code of
Practice CP 114 (1957) to determine the cube strengths at 7 days and 28 days after casting. The
cube strengths obtained shall be at least 50% greater than those specified in Table 10.1 for
works cubes.
3.15.2. The mix proportions specified in Table l.1 will be adjusted as necessary by the Engineer on the
basis of these tests without extra payment to the Contractor.
Page 92 of 262
3.16. SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MATERIALS
3.16.1. All sampling and testing will be carried out in accordance with the standard methods laid down
in clause 601 b of the BS Code of Practice CP 114 (1957).
3.16.2. The Contractor shall attend upon and provide all assistance to the Engineer when such sampling
and tests are carried out, and shall supply all concrete samples and other materials and
equipment required by the Engineer to carry out the tests.
3.17. FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING AND TESTING
3.17.1. Compacting Factor
The compacting factor of the mix will be tested
(a) Daily while concrete is being placed,
(b) Whenever samples for test cubes are taken, and
(c) Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer the grading or condition of any of the aggregates
has changed since the last test was made.
3.17.2. Test Cubes
A set of six 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm concrete test cubes, 3 for testing at 7 days and 3 for
testing at 28 days after casting, will be made
(a) Every day while concrete is being placed, and
(b) Whenever the mix or any of its constituents are changed either in quantity or quality.
3.17.3. Aggregate Grading and Purity
The grading of the aggregates and their freedom from organic matter will be tested
(a) When the first deliveries of these materials arrive on the site, and
(b) Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, the grading or condition of these materials differs
from that originally accepted for use in the work.
3.18. REJECTION OF CONCRETE
3.18.1. If any of the test cubes tested at 7 days show a compressive strength less than that specified, the
Engineer shall, at his discretion, order all concreting work to stop until adequate measures have
been taken to produce concrete which complies with this specification.
3.18.2. If the cube strengths at 28 days are less than those specified, the work from which the concrete
for the test cubes was taken will be rejected by the Engineer, and will be broken out and rebuilt
or otherwise made good as directed by him at the Contractor's own expense.
3.19. SUPERVISION DURING CONCRETING
3.19.1. The Contractor shall keep constantly at the site while concrete is being mixed and placed a
competent Malay/English speaking assistant for the purpose of supervision the batching of the
concrete ingredients and the mixing, placing and compacting of the concrete. This assistant shall
be employed solely for this purpose and the right is reserved to the Engineer. or his
representative at the site to order work on mixing or placing of concrete to cease if this assistant
is not present.
3.20. MIXING CONCRETE
3.20.1. AH concrete shall be mixed in an approved batch mixer of at least 14/10 capacity, fitted with a
power driven loading skip. The mixer shall be equipped with an automatic water measuring tank
fitted with a device for locking the discharge setting so that the volume of water used in each
batch of concrete is accurately measured and cannot be varied by the mixer operator after the
device is set and checked by the Engineer's representative on the site. The mixer drum and the
loading skip shall be kept clean at all times.
3.20.2. Each batch of concrete shall contain one or more whole bags (standard size) of cement. The
materials for each mix shall be placed in the loading skip in the following order: coarse
aggregate, cement, and fine aggregate. The water shall be added to the dry materials in the mixer
drum. The quantity of water specified in Table 10.1 may be varied up to 5% in order to maintain
a constant workability; but this tolerance shall not be exceeded without prior approval of the
Engineer. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed until there is uniform distribution of the
materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. In no case shall the time of mixing
be less than two minutes or more than five minutes after the water has been added tot he batch.
Page 93 of 262
Any concrete surplus to requirements shall be thrown away. In no circumstances may surplus
concrete be re-mixed for use later.
3.21. PLACING OF CONCRETE GENERALLY
3.21.1. No concrete shall be placed until the formwork and reinforcement have been approved by the
Engineer.
3.21.2. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the position in which it is to be placed
without delay, and by means which will prevent loss of grout and/or segregation of the mix.
Concrete may be conveyed by chute only with the permission of the Engineer. Any concrete
which has attained its initial set before being placed shall be discarded. Placing concrete shall be
suspended during rain.
3.21.3. Concreting shall be carried out continuously between and up to the predetermined day's work or
construction joints in one sequence of operation.
3.21.4. All concrete shall be placed in the position in which it is to be compacted and the materials shall
not be allowed to flow while it is being placed and compacted. Vibrators shall be used solely for
compacting the concrete and not for distributing it into place. The concrete shall be prevented
from flowing laterally by the use of vertical stopping off boards, or other vertical faces, and the
surface of the concrete shall be maintained reasonably level during placing. Concrete shall be
placed in the formwork in layers not exceeding 450 mm thick. In the event of unavoidable
stoppage in positions not predetermined the concrete shall be terminated on horizontal planes
and against vertical surfaces and an additional day's work joint formed. A record shall be kept
on the works site of the time and date of placing the concrete in each position of the structure.
3.22. COMPACTING CONCRETE
3.22.1. Concrete after placing shall be thoroughly compacted by both hand tamping and mechanical
vibration. Concrete maintained between two walls of formwork shall be compacted by power
driven vibrators of the immersion type and concrete in slabs with no formwork on the upper
surface shall be compacted by power driven vibrators of the pan type or by vibrating screeds.
The vibrators shall be of ample power operating at not less than 6,000 cycles per minute and of a
kind approved by the Engineer. They shall be operated by workmen skilled in their use who
shall be additional to the labourers employed on placing and tamping the concrete.
3.22.2. No concreting of water retaining, water conveying or water excluding structures shall begin until
the required number of vibrators and also a spare vibrator are all available and have all been
tested and found to be in good working condition at the works site.
3.22.3. Immersion vibrator shall be inserted and withdrawn slowly at a uniform rate of approximately
100mm per second. Compaction shall be deemed to be completed when cement mortar appears
in a circle round the vibrator.
3.22.4. Pan vibrators shall be placed on the surface of the concrete that shall have previously been
tamped and levelled leaving an allowance in height for compaction until cement mortar appears
under the pan. The vibrators shall then be lifted and placed on the adjoining area and the
operation shall be repeated until the whole surface has been compacted. Alternatively, a
vibrating screed spanning the full width of the panel shall be used.
3.22.5. In all cases the placing of concrete shall be sufficiently ahead of the vibrators so that the mass of
concrete beyond the vibrators is sufficient to stand without flowing while vibration is in
progress. On the other hand, the concrete shall be fully compacted before initial set is attained.
3.23. CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE SCREED
3.23.1. As soon as the excavation has been approved by the Engineer the concrete screed wherever
shown on the drawings shall be laid in bays not exceeding 3-meter square with open joints 25
mm wide in between the bays. The joints shall be arranged to break joint with the joints in the
concrete floor above. The screed shall be well rammed and worked to a dense smooth finish and
cured by being kept damp under wet gunny bags for not less than 7 days. After the screed has
been cured, the 25mm wide joints shall be cleaned and filled with 1:3 cement sand mortar and
the whole surface allowed to dry out.
3.23.2. Should the surfaces of formation be cut up through excessive traffic or softened by the action of
water due to delay on the part of the Contractor inlaying the concrete screed he shall remove
such earth as may have been affected and replace it with Grade 15 concrete all at his own
expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the screed is laid.
Page 94 of 262
3.24. CONSTRUCTION OF FLOORS OR WATER RETAINING, WATER CONVEYING OR
WATER EXCLUDING STRUCTURES AND FLAT ROOFS
3.24.1. The floors or roofs are divided into segments bounded by joints shown on the drawings. The
concrete in each segment shall be placed and compacted in regular strips across the full width of
the segment. Each strip shall be placed against the previous strip before the concrete in the latter
has attained initial set. Each segment shall be concreted in one continuous operation, and the
Contractor shall so arrange his concreting programme that not less than 7 days shall elapse
between the placing of concrete in any two adjacent segments.
3.24.2. The concrete shall be compacted first with immersion type vibrators and then/or with pan type
vibrator. Concrete shall be placed and uniformly distributed to much a depth that after complete
compaction the concrete surface is at the required finished level. Any areas that are below
finished level or where segregation has taken place shall be dug out and immediately made good
with fresh concrete.
3.24.3. After the concrete has been thoroughly compacted, the surface shall be thoroughly worked to a
dense true finish with a wooden float. Under no circumstances shall neat cement be sprinkled on
the concrete.
3.24.4. Where reinforcement is continuous across the joints, notched vertical stopping off boards shall
be used for the reinforcement to pass through. The joint shall each have U-groove formed at the
top to receive sealing compound.
3.25. CONSTRUCTION OF WALLS OR WATER RETAINING, WATER CONVEYING OR WATER
EXCLUDING STRUCTURES
3.25.1. The walls are divided into segments by vertical joints, which are continuous with the floor joints
and extend the full height of the walls in unbroken alignment. Each segment between the height
of 50 mm above the top of the haunch and the underside of the wall/ring beam shall be cast in a
series of lifts not exceeding 1350 mm high each.
3.25.2. Each panel defined by the vertical joints and the height of a lift shall be concreted in one
continuous operation. The concrete shall be placed and compacted in layers not exceeding 450
mm in depth. The placing of concrete shall be kept 1500 mm ahead of the vibrators so that the
mass of concrete beyond the vibrators is sufficient to stand without flowing while vibration is in
progress. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the concrete in the tower layer has
attained its initial set.
3.25.3. Alternate panels in a lift shall be concreted, and an interval of 7 days shall have elapsed before
the intervening panels in the same lift are concreted. One lift of the wall all round shall be
completed before the next higher lift is concreted.
3.25.4. Each joint shall have a U-groove formed on the water retaining face as well as on the water
excluding face to receive sealing compound.
3.26. CONSTRUCTION OF WALL FOOTINGS AND HAUNCHES FOR WATER RETAINING,
WATER CONVEYING OR WATER EXCLUDING STRUCTURES
3.26.1. Each segment of the wall footing and haunch defined by the floor and wall joints and a
horizontal plane 50mm above the top of the haunch shall be concreted in one continuous
operation. The concrete shall be placed and compacted in the manner herein before specified in
the specification. Great care shall be exercised to ensure that the concrete in and around the
haunch is thoroughly compacted.
3.26.2. Alternate segments of the footing and haunch shall be concreted and an interval of 7 days shall
elapse before the intervening segments are concreted.
3.27. CONSTRUCTION OF DOME ROOFS
3.27.1. Dome roofs shall be cast on the formwork in on layer. They shall be cast in segments defined by
the joints shown on the drawings. Alternate segments shall be cast, and an interval of 7 day shall
have elapsed before the intervening segments are concreted. The individual segments shall be
cast in one continuous operation, the concrete being placed and compacted in regular strip
across the full width of the segments. Each strip shall be placed against the previous strip before
the concrete in the latter has attained its initial set. Where reinforcement is continuous across the
joints, the vertical stopping off boards shall be notched to allow the reinforcement to pass
through. The joints shall each have U-groove formed on the top to receive sealing compound.
Page 95 of 262
3.28. JOINTS
3.28.1. The Contractor shall make the joints in the floors, footings, walls and roofs strictly in
accordance with the drawings. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the waterstops
wherever shown on the drawings are adequately secured so that they will not be displaced while
concrete is being placed. Under no circumstances shall waterstops be nailed through. Any
waterstop which has been perforated shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
3.28.2. Before fresh concrete in one segment is placed against hardened concrete of the adjacent
segments, all loose and imperfect materials, cement scum or laitance shall be removed and the
whole-hardened concrete joint surface thorough hacked until a completely hacked roughened
fresh surface is obtained. The fresh joint surface shall than be brushed clean, and immediately
before fresh concrete is placed on or against it, it shall be thorough wetted and covered with a
layer of 1:1-1/2 cement and mortar not less than 38 mm thick. The mortar shall have the
consistency of condensed milk.
3.28.3. In the case of expansion joints, however, the hardened concrete joint surface shall not be hacked
but shall be painted with two coats of approved bitumastic paint.
3.28.4. All efforts must be made to ensure that concrete at joints is as dense as possible. Scarifying the
joint surfaces while the concrete is still green is strictly prohibited.
3.29. DAY'S WORK JOINTS
3.29.1. Day's work joints in floors, roofs, and slabs shall be formed against vertical boards and the
concrete shall be well compacted against the boards.
3.29.2. No fresh concrete shall be placed against any concrete which has attained its initial set. Concrete
is deemed to have attained its initial set 30 minutes after water has been added to the mix.
Provided that the set concrete has been properly placed and compacted and is acceptable to the
Engineer, it shall not be disturbed and shall be allowed to attain its final set and to harden
sufficiently to enable a day's work joint surface on it to be prepared by thorough hacking without
damage. Concrete may be deemed to have hardened sufficiently for this purpose 72 hours after
placing.
3.29.3. Any concrete which has been disturbed after it has attained its initial set shall be rejected and
subsequently removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
3.29.4. When concreting must be suspended at any point because of inclement weather, or for any other
unforeseen cause, a day's work joint shall be made.
3.29.5. The concrete at a day's work joint shall be allowed to harden for 72 hours. Before fresh concrete
is placed against the day's work joint, all loose and imperfect material, cement scums or laitance
shall be removed from the joint surface, which shall be thorough hacked until a completely
hacked roughened fresh surface is obtained. The fresh surface shall then b brushed clean, and
immediately before fresh concrete is placed against it, it shall be thorough wetted and covered
with a layer of 1:1-1/2 cement and sand mortar not less than 38 mm thick. The mortar shall have
the consistency of condensed milk.
3.30. SEALING COMPOUND
3.30.1. Only non-hardening sealing compounds approved by the Engineer shall be used for sealing the
grooves provided at joints.
3.30.2. All sealing compounds shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
The grooves for receiving the sealing compounds shall be thoroughly brushed to remove grit,
soil and other loose particles. The grooves and the surrounding concrete shall be thoroughly
dried by such means as the Engineer shall direct, and the sealing compounds or primers shall be
applied before dampness returns to the surface of the concrete.
3.31. WATERSTOPS
3.31.1. Only waterstops approved by the Engineer shall be used.
3.31.2. The Contractor shall carefully read the waterstop manufacturer's instructions before
commencing any work involving the incorporation of waterstops and shall carry out all work in
this connection as recommended by the manufacturer and to the approval of the Engineer.
3.31.3. Waterstops shall be fully continuous when laid and site joints shall be limited to simple butt
joints which are to be made with the manufacturer's fushing jig. A careful check shall be made
on all joints after completion to ensure that no imperfections exist.
Page 96 of 262
3.31.4. Waterstops shall be securely held in position by the formwork or by means to be approved by
the Engineer and the concrete shall be carefully worked around the waterstops to ensure that it is
completely embedded and that air pockets will not exist.
3.32. PIPES AND OTHER FITTINGS CAST INTO CONCRETE
3.32.1. Where shown on the drawings the Contractor shall build pipes, specials, fittings, plates, anchor
hooks, brackets, bolts and nuts, etc. into the concrete as the work progress. The external coating
of the pipes and specials shall be removed to the extent directed by the Engineer so that a proper
bond may be obtained with the concrete. These pipes, specials, fittings, etc. shall be accurately
set and rigidly supported and their lines and levels shall be passed by the Engineer before
concreting is commenced. No reinforcement shall be cut to allow such pipes, specials, fittings,
etc., to be cast into the work without the approval of the Engineer. Concrete shall be thoroughly
worked around the pipes, specials, fittings, etc., to ensure a complete bond so that no leakage
will result from the presence of the pipes, specials, fittings, etc.
3.32.2. If the pipes, specials, fittings, etc., to be built into the work are not available when concrete is to
be placed, openings shall be left in the concrete and the pipes, specials, fittings, etc., shall be
concreted in as a separate operation. In such cases details of openings and casting in of the pipes
and specials shall be in accordance with Engineer's instructions.
3.32.3. The openings left shall be of ample size to allow the concrete to be thoroughly compacted round
the pipes, specials, fittings, etc., and shall be provided with waterstops if the Engineer so directs.
Before concrete is placed in such openings, all loose or imperfect materials, cement scum or
laitance shall be removed and the joint surface shall be thoroughly hacked until a completely
roughened fresh surface is obtained. The fresh joint surface shall then be brushed clean and
immediately before concrete is placed, these surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and covered
with a layer of 38 mm thickness of 1:1-1/2 cement sand mortar of the consistency of condensed
milk.
3.33. CURING CONCRETE
3.33.1. As soon as the freshly placed concrete has hardened sufficiently to withstand such treatment
without damage, the exposed surface of roofs, floors, walls and columns shall be completely
covered with gunny bags, which shall be kept thoroughly wet continuously by generous
application of water every two hours for a period of 8 days. The water shall be allowed to run
down between the forms and the formed concrete surfaces. Flat slabs shall have water
impounded on them for a period of at least 10 days after placing.
3.33.2. When all the concrete in the floor and the haunch of any water retaining, a water conveying or
water excluding structure have been placed and the concrete attained the final set, the whole of
the floor shall be flooded with water to depth of not less than 75 mm. This depth of water shall
be maintained throughout the rest of the construction period.
3.33.3. The Contractor shall at his expense make provisions for distributing an adequate quantity of
water to all parts of the work for this purpose.
3.34. STRIKING FORMWORK
3.34.1. No formwork shall be struck without the prior approval of the Engineer. Formwork shall be
removed in accordance with a programme agreed to by the Engineer, without such shock or
vibration as would damage the concrete and without interruption to the curing of the concrete as
herein before specified in this specification. Normally formwork shall be struck after the
following periods have elapsed.
From sides of beams, walls and columns (unloaded) 3 days

From bottom of slabs (props left under) 7 days
From soffits of beams (props left under) 10 days
Removal of props under slab (unloaded) 14 days
Removal of props under beams (unloaded) 21 days
Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be left untouched pending inspection by the
Engineer.
3.35. SURFACE TREATMENT TO CONCRETE
Page 97 of 262
3.35.1. After the concrete surface has been inspected by the Engineer, the surface shall be treated as
described below :
3.35.2. All areas where the concrete has not been properly consolidated to a dense uniform surface shall
be cut out, and make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All bolt holes left by the formwork
bolts shall be plugged as described herein.
3.35.3. The side of the holes shall be reamered with a hacksaw blade until the cement scum is removed.
The holes shall then be flushed with a strong jet of water to remove all loose materials. While
the holes are still wet, the sides of the holes shall be dusted with neat cement using a suitable
brush for this purpose. Immediately following this, the holes shall be plugged with a dry pack
consisting of one part of cement and two parts of fine sand. The mixture of cement and sand
shall be made only sufficiently damp with water to allow it to be rammed solid without exuding
any liquid, and after thorough mixing shall be placed in the holes in thin layers and solidly
compacted over the entire surface with a hardwood stick and a hammer, and finally struck off to
a true surface.
3.35.4. Exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces to be in contact with water shall be treated as follows: -
(a) All projecting imperfections shall be carefully chipped off and rubbed down with
carborundum blocks to a true surface, and the grit or dirt resulting therefrom thoroughly
washed off with clean water.
(b) Wherever necessary, the surface shall be made thoroughly wet, and a cement grout
composed of 1 part of cement and 2 parts of fine sand by volume shall be worked in to the
pores and holes over the surface with a fine carborundum float so that a uniform smooth
and dense surface throughout is finally presented.
3.35.5. All defects on concrete surfaces which will be permanently concealed m the finished structure
shall be repaired and made good as directed.
3.36. WATER TIGHTNESS TEST
3.36.1. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, conduct the test for water tightness of all water
retaining, water conveying and water excluding structures and shall provide all the water
required for this purpose.
3.36.2. The first test on a structure shall not be carried out until four weeks have elapsed after the
placing of the last batch of concrete in the structure is completed.
3.36.3. The structure shall be filled with water to the top water level shown on the drawings and
maintained at that level for three days. Should any obvious signs of leakage be observed during
this period, or any subsequent test period, the positions of all such signs of leakage shall be
marked and the test shall be stopped; and the Contractor shall at his own expense carry out such
remedial measures as the Engineer shall direct including the complete emptying of the structure
if necessary.
3.36.4. Should the leakage be general the remedial measures may include the complete treatment of the
inside surfaces of the structure by rendering or by the application of some other approved
waterproof coating. When all obvious signs of leakage have been stopped and made good in
accordance with the Engineer's instructions, the structure shall be refilled to top water level, and
so maintained for three days. After the end of third day, provided no further signs of leakage are
observed the exact water level shall be marked, and after a further seventy-two hour period, the
water level shall again be marked and the difference recorded. During this seventy-two hour
period an evaporation test shall be carried out in the manner described hereunder. The structure
shall be deemed watertight and shall be so accepted in this respect only by the Engineer if the
recorded difference minus the loss of water by evaporation gives a figure which does not exceed
1/2000 of the depth of the water originally in the structure. Should, however, the above recorded
difference minus the loss of water by evaporation give a figure which exceeds l/2000 of the
depth of the water originally in the structure, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, carry out
the complete treatment of the inside of the structure by rendering or such other remedial
measures as the Engineer may direct. On completion of such treatment, the Contractor shall at
his own expense retest the structure and repeat these remedial measures, if found necessary,
until water tightness is obtained.
3.36.5. During the test the loss of water by evaporation shall be determined by measurement of the loss
of water from a shallow watertight tray 600mm x 600mm in area containing not less than 75mm
of water and floating on the surface of the water in the structure.
Page 98 of 262
3.36.6. Should any leakage and/or percolation develop during the Defects Liability Period specified in
the Contract, remedial measures similar to those specified above, followed by tests for water
tightness, shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense.
3.37. PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
3.37.1. Precast concrete shall be Minimum Grade 20 as specified in Table 1.1
3.37.2. Precast concrete pipes shall be manufactured by the centrifugal spinning process, and all other
precast concrete units shall be manufactured in mechanically vibrated moulds.
3.37.3. If any of the precast concrete units is manufactured away from the site of the work, the
Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the concrete proportions, reinforcement, etc. are in
accordance with the drawings and this specification, and if required, he shall produce samples
for testing.
3.37.4. All present units shall be handled and stacked so as to avoid damage and ensure that no undue
stress is imposed on them. The Contractor shall remove from the site and replace at his own
costs any present units which is damaged due to his own negligence or which are rejected by the
Engineer.
3.37.5. Precast R.C. vertical louvres shall be cast true to form and be uniform throughout in accordance
with detailed drawings.
3.38. SURFACE WATER DRAINS AND APRONS
3.38.1. Precast concrete surface water drains shall be cast in 600mm lengths with dimensions as shown
on the drawings. The drains shall be properly bedded and jointed with l :3 cement sand mortar
and laid to falls as directed by the Engineer.
3.39. PRECAST CONCRETE DRAIN COVERS
3.39.1. Precast reinforced concrete slabs over drains shall be reinforced as shown on the drawings.
Slabs shall have recesses in their end faces to facilitate removal.
3.40. R.C. LINTOLS AND CILLS
3.40.1. Precast reinforced concrete lintels shall be built to the full thickness of the walls in which they
occur and with 225 mm bearing on either side of the opening which they span unless smaller
bearings are indicated on the drawings.
3.40.2. Precast reinforced concrete cills shall be cast to the dimensions as shown on the drawings.
3.41. CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT
3.41.1. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the concrete cover to reinforcement exclusive of
plaster or other decorative finish shall be as follows: -
End of bars 25mm or 2 x diameter of bar whichever is greater
Longitudinal bars in beams 25mm or the diameter or bar whichever is greater
Longitudinal bars in columns with minimum 38mm or the diameter of bar whichever 1s
Dimension greater than 188mm greater
Longitudinal bars, whose diameters do not exceed 25mm
12mm in columns with minimum dimension of 188mm
or under
Longitudinal bars, whose diameters exceed 12mm, in 38mm
columns with minimum dimensions of 188mm under
Tensile, compressive and other reinforcement in 12mm or the diameter of bar whichever 1s
slabs greater
Bars on faces against earth, faces in contact 38mm
with liquid, faces enclosing the space above liquid
Any other reinforcement 12mm or the diameter of bar whichever is the
greater
Subject to the tolerances stipulated hereunder. Tolerances allowable to concrete cover shall be:
+ 3mm for overall thickness of member 300mm or less,
+ 6mm for overall thickness of member more than 300mm.
3.42. PREAMBLES
The requirements of the other sections of this Preambles are to apply equally to this section.
Page 99 of 262
3.42.1. Generally
a) Small concrete components have been arbitrarily determined as to be cast in-situ or precast
units. The Contractor may adopt either method of construction but work shall be paid in
accordance with the descriptions in the Bills/Schedule of Works and Prices.
b) All concrete admixtures shall be administered in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and is subject to Architect or Engineer's approval.
c) All steel bar reinforcement is in length not exceeding 12 metres unless otherwise stated. No
allowance has been made in the weight of steel reinforcement for rolling margin, typing
wires, spacers, chairs and weight of weld, etc.
d) "Sawn formwork" shall mean formwork to produce concrete surfaces suitable for plastering
or tiling.
e) "Wrot formwork" shall mean formwork to produce fair face concrete surfaces suitable for
direct application of decorations.
3.42.2. Rates for concrete shall include for providing trial mixes, tests on materials and finished
product, including non-destructive tests on and off-site; hoisting or pumping, pouring, packing,
rodding and vibrating and compacting concrete by suitable means around reinforcement,
completely filling the formworks to the shape required; curing and protection; patching, curing,
protection and forming all necessary construction joints, cutting grooves, chases, mortices, holes
and the like, including making good and any other sundry items of a like nature and building in
all wire ties, bolts, lugs, nailing blocks, anchors and the like, removing and making good
defective concrete.
3.42.3. Concrete beds and slabs shall include for laying on any type of sub-base, laying to falls or
cambers and preparing and leaving surfaces to receive screeds or pavings including laying in
bays and all necessary formwork to joints between bays.
3.42.4. Surface water channels, concrete curbs and the like shall include for all angles, intersection
ends, outlets and any other sundry items of a like nature.
3.42.5. Rates for mild steel or high tensile steel bar reinforcement shall include for allowance for rolling
margin, tying wire and weight of welds; cutting to lengths, waste, hooked ends, cranks and
bending to various bends and radii as required; securing with and including no. 16 gauge
annealed iron tying wires at all intersections; distance blocks and spacer bars, including chairs;
cleaning by wire brushing or sand blasting all rods free of rust, dust, mill scale, dirt, oil and any
other deleterious matters; fixing in position and supporting whilst concreting; providing all
necessary laps and anchorages.
3.42.6. Steel fabric reinforcement shall include for all preparatory work for mild steel rod as described
above and shall also include for laps, all bending, cutting, notching around obstruction, waste,
securing with and including no. 16 gauge annealed iron tying wires and cleaning by wire
brushing or sand blasting.
3.42.7. Rates for formwork shall include erection, batten framing, propping, strutting, bracing typing
and wedging, nailing and bolting, raking and circular cutting, splayed edges, notchings, cambers
to beam and slabs, allowance for overlaps, passing at angles, battens and filleting to form
chamfered edges, stopping all holes, cracks and crevices, easing, striking and removing; and in
the case of formwork to vertical surfaces like walls, columns and the like, strutting over 3.5m
high, bolting, wedging, easing, striking and removal and oiling or lime-washing surfaces in
contact with concrete before concreting.
3.42.8. Wrot formwork shall include for lining the formwork with any suitable materials as directed by
the Architect for removing fins from the surface of the concrete after striking formwork, for
making good any honeycombing or irregularities and for leaving the concrete with a true and
even surface.
3.42.9. Temporary boxing in formwork shall include for all additional strutting, reinforcing rods, and
cutting and fixing rod on mesh reinforcement.
3.42.10. Precast concrete units shall include for all necessary moulds, holes, rebates, notchings, sinkings,
mortices and the liked and for hoisting, bedding, jointing and pointing in cement mortar (1:3).
3.42.11. In addition to the above, the rates for coffered and troughed floor and roof slabs shall include the
provision of appropriate moulds and decking system.
3.42.12. Rates for precast concrete work shall include:
a) all reinforcement and moulds
b) lifting hooks, cast-in brackets, dowels and other fixing devices
c) finishing fair on all exposed faces, and other surface treatment to receive other finishes
Page 100 of 262
d) holes, sleeves, rebates, notchings, sinkings, mortices and the like e temporary supports
e) hoisting and placing in position; setting, bedding, jointing and pointing in cement mortar;
cutting off lifting hooks.
4. BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
4.1. BRICKWORK GENERALLY

4.1.1. Bricks shall be hard, sound, square and clean.
4.1.2. Clay bricks shall be well and evenly burnt with well-defined arrises and size shall conform to
B.S 3921.
4.1.3. Cement/Concrete bricks shall comply with B.S 6073
4.1.4. Calcium Silicate bricks (sand or flint lime) shall comply with B.S 187
4.1.5. Bricks shall be of the best quality from a local manufacturer or other approved quality, and to be
free from cracks or other defects. Average compressive strength of bricks, except engineering
bricks, shall not less than 7N/mm2.
4.1.6. Facing bricks shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
4.2. SAMPLES
4.2.1. Samples of bricks shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before being used or before
placing order. Samples that have been approved shall be the standard to be maintained in the
works. Poor quality bricks not conforming to the approved sample shall be rejected and cart
away by the contractor at his own expense.
4.3. CEMENT
4.3.1. Cement and water are specified in Concrete Work Section.
4.4. SAND
4.4.1. Sand for mortar shall be naturally occurring, clean, sharp, free from clay and, any other
impurities and shall be washed and screened, and comply to all the requirements of B.S. 1200.
4.5. LIME
4.5.1. Hydrated lime shall comply with B.S 890: Part 2 Semi-Hydraulic or Non-hydraulic, Type (1),
(2) or (3). Quick lime is to be properly slaked and run to putty, and matured before use for at
least two weeks for non-hydraulic and semi-hydraulic limes, and for at least 36 hours in the case
of hydraulic limes.
4.5.2. Hydrated lime is to be run to putty, or mixed with sand and water, and allowed to stand for at
least 16 hours before use, or where an approved type free from unslaked particles, may be used
dry.
4.5.3. Preparation of lime shall comply with the appropriate requirements of C.P 121
4.6. PLASTICISERS
4.6.1. Plasticisers shall be used only with the approval of the Architect.
4.6.2. Plasticisers shall comply with B.S 4887 and shall be used inthe proportions and manner
recommended by the manufacturer. The proportion of mortar mix shall therefore be adjusted in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
4.7. PIGMENTS
4.7.1. Pigments for colored mortar shall comply with B.S 1014
4.8. BRICK REINFORCEMENTS
4.8.1. Reinforcement to brick walls, unless otherwise stated shall be 62.5mm wide x 22 gauge
approved expanded metal "Exmet" built into every fourth course of half brick walls
4.9. MORTAR MIX
4.9.1. Unless otherwise specified, mixes for mortar shall be:
- Lime Mortar: One part of lime to two to three parts of sand by volume
- Cement Mortar: One part of cement to three parts of sand by volume
Page 101 of 262

- Cement - Lime Mortar: One part of cement to two parts of lime to nine parts of sand by
volume approval.
4.9.2. Adjustments to the above mixes to obtain adequate workability shall only be made with
Architect's
4.10. MIXING OF MORTAR
4.10.1. The materials for all mortar shall be measured in proper gauge boxes and mixed on a boarded
platform for small quantities. For large quantities mixing shall be by means of a mechanical
batch mixer of an approved type.
4.11. PREPARATION
4.11.1. Brick and or block shall be thoroughly "buttered" with mortar before being laid and grouted at
each joint to ensure even application. The tops of walls where work has stopped shall be well
wetted before recommencing laying.
4.12. BONDING
4.12.1. All brickworks except for half brick walls, unless otherwise described or shown, shall be in
English Bond. Half brick wall shall be in Stretcher Bond.
4.12.2. All intersection and angles of all walls shall be properly bonded together with all walls and pier
of lengths and with not multiples of bricks sizes shall be cut and bonded in a best approved
manner. No broken bricks shall be used to form a bond.
4.12.3. Bond brickwork to concrete at intersection with ties comprising 6mm diameter mild steel rod
450mm long hooked at both ends.
4.13. LAYING OF BRICKS
4.13.1. All brickworks are to be set out and built to the lengths, thickness and heights required for
indicated on the drawings and well bedded and flushed up solid at each course.
4.13.2. All brickwork shall be carried up regularly. No brick shall be carried up more than 900mm
above or lower than another. Any brickwork left at different levels shall be raked back.
4.13.3. The vertical joints of every alternate course shall be kept perpendicular over one another
4.13.4. No bats shall be used in the brickwork except for the purpose of the bonding and all perpends,
quoins, etc. shall be kept strictly true and square.
4.13.5. All brickwork shall be properly bedded in mortar and built level. No four courses of brickwork
when laid in the work shall rise more than 305mm and the thickness of each more joint shall not
less than 6mm.
4.14. HOLLOW WALLS
4.14.1. The inner and outer skins of hollow wall shall be built at the same time.
4.14.2. Cavities and wall ties shall be kept clear of all mortar droppings and shall be cleaned daily.
4.14.3. Skins shall be tied together with ties at the rate of five (5) per square metre of walling. Extra ties
shall be provided at reveals and ends of walls.
4.14.4. Ties for use in cavity walls shall be galvanized wire ties to B.S 1243
4.15. FACED WORK
4.15.1. Care shall be exercised in unloading and handling facing bricks. The use of damaged bricks will
not be permitted in face works and bats shall only be used where required to obtain bond.
4.15.2. Bricks for fair-faced work shall be individually selected from consignments delivered to the site,
with particular regard to uniformity of size and colour, with perfect arrises, true faces and
absence of minor defects.
4.15.3. Samples of facing and/or fair-faced brickwork shall be provided for each type of brick and
pointing. Panels shall be approved by the Architect before general facing work commences.
Panel shall be 900mm x 900mm. Retain on the site for comparison and remove on completion.
4.15.4. Facing and fair faced brickwork shall be constructed with a uniform face as shown in the
drawings, carefully set in mortar with raked out joints and pointed with a neat flush joint, or as
otherwise shown, as work proceeds. Coloured mortar jointing shall be used if so specified.
4.15.5. Fair faced brickwork or facings shall be protected with a protective covering, or polythene sheet
or other materials from mortar droppings, rubbish, staining or other surface adhesions until such
time as work is handed over as complete. No rubbing down of brickwork shall be permitted.
Page 102 of 262
4.15.6. No face work shall be painted or given any form of surface treatment until approved by the
Architect.
4.16. CEMENT BRICKS
4.16.1. Size and Compliance
Cement shall be to B.S 6073 and shall be of a nominal size as given below
Length Width Depth
9" ± 1/8" 4 1/2" ± 1/16" 3" ± 1/16"
(225mm ± 3mm) (112mm ± 1.5mm) (75mm ± 1,5mm)
4.16.2. Samples
Samples of bricks shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before being used or before
4.16.3. Compressive Strength
The minimum compressive strength after 24 days shall be I 000lbs per sq inch. (7N/mm2) or 16
tons per brick. Bricks shall be taken for test by the Architect. All rejected bricks shall be
removed from site at the expense of the contractor.
Constructed brickwork shall be protected from direct sunlight during the day on which it is laid,
and also during the following day and the contractor shall provide sufficient means to ensure
that this is done.
4.16.4. Laying of Bricks
Cement bricks shall be laid in the manner specified for clay bricks where applicable.
4.17. BLOCKWORK
4.17.1. Generally
The relevant clauses for clay brickwork shall apply equally to this section
Concrete blocks shall comply with B.S 6073 with a minimum compressive strength of 7N/mm2.
Concrete hollow blocks shall comply to B.S. 6073: Part 1 and shall have minimum crushing
strength of not less than 7N/mm2 of overall cross-sectional area and they shall be adequately
rigid in support eccentric loads.
Blocks shall be of the sizes, types and thickness shown on the drawings
Specials shall be purpose made or, with the Architect's approval cut from standard blocks.
4.17.2. Manufacture of Blocks
Concrete blocks shall be manufactured from Ordinary Portland cement to B.S 12 and aggregate
comply with B.S. 882, and pressure pressed in metal moulds. Blocks shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer.
4.17.3. Samples
Samples of blocks shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before being used or before
4.17.4. Cutting of Blocks
Blocks shall be cut where necessary with power wheel only. No other methods will be
permitted.
4.17.5. Laying of Blockwork
Generally
All blockwork shall be installed by experienced block layers.
Preparation of Units
Dampening of concrete units before or during construction shall not be permitted.
Laying of Units
Construct walls, piers etc with proper spacing, mortaring, grouting, ties and reinforcement as
specified.
Keep courses level and in line, and accurately plumb all wall faces, angles and features.
Mortar Bedding
Lay hollow units with full face shall head joints with either face shell mortar bedding or full
mortar bedding. Lay solid units with full head and bed joints. Do not furrow head joints.
Intersections Walls and Corners
Page 103 of 262
The intersections between non-bearing walls or between bearing and non-bearing walls for
lateral support by metal ties, prefabricated joint reinforcement or other detailed or specified
method. Intersecting bearing walls shall be masonry bonded by overlapping courses.
Control Joints
Where indicated on the drawings and elsewhere as necessary provide control joints to
accommodate building movements due to volume changes.
Reinforcement
The course reinforcement for blockwork shall be similar to brick reinforcement except at every
third course.
Other Requirements
- Blocks shall be finished smooth for paint or if directed have joints raked out to receive
platering. All fair faced blockwork shall have neat flush joints or otherwise directed.
- The contractor shall deemed to have noted the drawings showing details and elevations of
blockwalls to be constructed. He shall comply to all such details and provisions. Also, prior
to commencing block laying, the contractor shall construct and complete a sample wall as
directed and at a location to be decided on site by the Architect. This sample constructed, if
approved, shall be used as a sample for comparison with subsequent work. Do not start
block laying until approval is obtained.
- Fair faced blockwork shall be protected with a protective covering, or polythene sheet or
other materials from mortar droppings, rubbish, staining or other surface adhesions until
such time as work is handed over as complete. No rubbing down of blockwork shall be
permitted.
- No face work shall be painted or given any form of surface treatment until approved by the
Architect.
4.18. CLEANING DOWN
4.18.1. On completion, make good any damaged bricks or joint on exposed faces of brickwork and
make good after all trades.
4.18.2. Clean down fair faced and facing brickwork with a solution of diluted hydrochloric acid and
clean water and afterwards rinse with clean water to remove surplus mortar, stains and dirt.
4.19. DAMP PROOF COURSE
4.19.1. Damp-proof course shall be one layer of 2-ply purpose made bituminous sheeting, with lead
core, complying with the requirements of B.S. 743, laid with 150mm overlap at joints and
angles on a 19mm bed of 1:3 cement mortar. Exposed edges of damp-proof courses shall be
neatly pointed.
4.20. DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE
4.20.1. Damp-proof membrane, unless otherwise specified, shall be sisalthene or other approved heavy
grade polythene sheet 500 gauge, with all joints twice folded and taped together. Ensure that the
polythene sheets are not torn or punctured during construction stage.
4.21. SUNDRY ITEMS
4.21.1. Leave or form holes, mortises, chases etc., cut and fit brickwork around steelwork and concrete,
build in window/door frames, ends of cills, joists, etc., bed plates, frames etc. and carry out other
labours shown on the drawings or as necessary for the execution of the works.
4.21.2. Bolts, brackets, lugs, etc are to be grouted or pinned in solidly with cement mortar, and holes
and chases for pipes, conduits, etc. are to be packed solidly with cement mortar or fine concrete.
4.21.3. Use templates to form openings where doors and windows are not built-in. Where door and
window frames are to be built in as the works proceed, bed in mortar similar to that for adjacent
works.
4.21.4. Form chases in walls for concealing pipes, conduits etc. Such chases shall be of the smallest
depth necessary for the purpose and excessive cutting shall be avoided.
4.21.5. Chases shall be formed by hand or approved machine cutting without cracking or splitting the
brick wall or causing any damage. The contractor shall rectify any damage caused at his own
expense and in the manner directed by the Architect.
4.22. PREAMBLES
Page 104 of 262

4.22.1. Rates for brickwork and blockwork shall include all staging and working platforms; all rough
and fair cuttings; over sailing and receding courses; rough relieving and discharging arches;
wedging and pinning; raking out joints for flashings, roof coverings etc and pointing with
mortar; bedding plates; bedding and pointing frames; parging and coring flues; labour eaves
filling; plumbing angles; forming square and rebated reveals, cut squints or bird mouths,
notches; forming, leaving or cuting chases, holes and mortises; cutting and pinning and/or
building in; all making good; all special made blocks and sundry items of a like nature.
4.22.2. Rates for brickwork and blockwork shall also include for building up to the required thicknesses
with plaster where bricks or blocks of the specified thicknesses are not available and those of
lesser thicknesses are allowed by the Architect to be used.
4.22.3. Rates for half brick walls shall include or building in brick reinforcement at every fourth course.
4.22.4. Rates for block walls shall include for building in brick reinforcement at every second course.
4.22.5. Brick reinforcement shall include for all laps, cutting and waste.
4.22.6. Damp proof course shall include for all laps, angles, cutting, labour and materials required in
laying and pointing exposed edges.
4.22.7. The rates for stone walling are to include for all rough and fair cutting; wedging and pinning;
forming grooves or raking out for flashings, roof coverings etc. and pointing with mortar;
bedding plates; beding and pointing frames; parging and coring flues; labour eaves filling;
salient angles, squints, quoins, birdsmouths, splays and rounded angles; forming reveals;
forming, leaving or cutting chases, holes and mortices; cutting and pinning; all making good and
sundry items of a like nature.
5. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
5.1. TIMBER
5.1.1. Timber shall be fully seasoned and cut to full dimension without undue allowance for sawing
margins. It shall be delivered to the site as early as possible and stacked under cover but open to
the atmosphere to ensure the maximum possible degree of seasoning.
5.2. GRADES
5.2.1. Except where otherwise stated, timber shall be the following grades:-
5.2.2. Floor boards, door and window frames and wrot carpentry – Grade A
5.2.3. Structural and concealed carpentry work – Grade B
5.2.4. Joinery generally – Grade C
5.3. TIMBER CLASSIFICATION
5.3.1. Timber, except where otherwise described, shall be in accordance with the following schedule:-
5.3.2. Grade A - Merbau, Chengal, Balau, Resak
5.3.3. Grade B - Kapor, Kempas, Kerning, Kulim, Damar Minyak
5.3.4. Grade C - Dark Red Meranti, Nyatoh, Merawan Merawan Mersawa, Melunak, Medang,
Mengkulang
5.4. DEFECTS
5.4.1. Timber is to be sawn die square with the slope of the grain not exceeding one in eight, and is to
be straight, free from sap wood, shakes, twists, splits, cracks, large, loose or dead knots, large
resin pockets, waney edges, live or extensive insect attack or other defects. Certain defects may
be permitted by the Architect where the strength, durability or appearance of the work will not
be affected.
5.4.2. Cut out any loose knots and knot holes and plug with similar timber, where permitted.
5.5. SEASONING
5.5.1. Timber is to be adequately seasoned before use to prevent undue shrinkage, distortion or
splitting. Any defect which subsequently develops before the end of the Defects Liability Period
and is, in the opinion of the Architect, likely to affect unduly the strength, durability or
appearance of the Works is to be replaced at the Contractor's own expense.
Page 105 of 262

5.5.2. If fully seasoned timber is not available the Contractor is to use, with the approval of the
Architect, only those types of timber which are less liable to develop seasoning defects but fully
seasoned timber is to be used whenever available.
5.5.3. Timber for joinery is to be well seasoned before use for a period of at least 3 months, either
before or after delivery to site, and the Contractor is to allow for programming his work
accordingly. Any seasoning defect occurring before the end of the Defects Liability Period and
which, in the opinion of the Architect, affects the Works adversely is to be replaced at the
5.5.4. Timber required for the Works is to be purchased as soon as possible after the Contract is signed
and is to be delivered to the site or to the Contractor's woodworking shops and properly stored
under cover and staked to the satisfaction of the Architect.
5.5.5. The Contractor shall allow for the cost any kiln drying which may be necessary to adjust the
moisture content of the timber to within the required limits.
5.6. WROT TIMBER
5.6.1. Wrot timber shall be sawn, planed, drilled or machined to correct size and shape. Sizes for wrot
timber given in the drawings and/or sated in the Specification are finished sizes and not nominal
sizes. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for scantling in his price.
5.7. PRESSURE IMPREGNATION OF TIMBER
5.7.1. Timber described as 'Pressure-Treated' shall be impregnated under vacuum and pressure with an
approved proprietary wood preservative (Tanalised 'C', Celcure 'A' and the like). The net dry salt
retention for interior structural timber and joinery shall be not less than 5.6 kg/m3 and for
exterior timber such as weather boarding, door and window frames and sills, the salt retention
shall be not less than 8.0kg/m3 (0/50 lb per cubic foot).
5.7.2. The Contractor shall produce certificates from the suppliers for the Architect's inspection
showing proof of the above requirement.
5.7.3. Site cut ends, and borings shall be liberally treated with 'Celcure B' or other equal and approved
proprietary preservative.
5.8. FINISHES
5.8.1. Wrot faces are to be sanded to a perfectly smooth surface with slightly rounded exposed arises.
Timber for joinery with natural finish, varnished or polished finish is to be selected to match
grain and colour and be void of defects.
5.9. NAILS, BOLTS, ETC.
5.9.1. Nails shall comply with BS 1202. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1202. Black bolts, screws
and nuts shall comply with BS 4190.
5.9.2. Nails, screws, bolts and other fastenings are to be of a suitable type and size and in sufficient
number to ensure rigid fixing. To avoid splitting, holes for nails are to be pre-bored of a
diameter not exceeding four-fifths that of the nail. Holes for bolts are to be bored from both
surfaces of the timber, and are to be as diameter equal to I 1/16 times that of the bolt. Washers
are to be used under all nuts and bolt heads. Nuts are to be brought up tight but shall not crush
the timber.
5.9.3. Timber connectors shall be as specified and the teeth or rings are to be fully embedded in the
timber.
5.9.4. Where fixing with cups and screws is specified the cups are to be brass turned or heavy pressed
pattern.
5.9.5. Screw heads shall be countersunk and filled or pelleted as specified. Pellets shall be cut from
matching timber and fixed with grain running in same direction as that of the timber.
5.10. GLUE
5.10.1. Glue is to be approved resin-based or synthetic resin-based adhesive of appropriate type, and is
to be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
5.11. CARPENTRY FRAMING
5.11.1. Joints in carpentry timber are to be accurately formed and of appropriate type to transmit the
loading and resist the stresses to which they are subject. Abutting surfaces in timber exposed to
Page 106 of 262
the weather are to be thickly coated with priming paint immediately before assembly, unless
required to be glued.
5.11.2. Joints in plates, heads and cills of partitions and similar members are to be halved 150mm long
or, at angles, for the width of the member. Joints in purl ins, ridges and similar members where
permitted are to be scarfed for a length equal to twice the depth of the member, and tightly
wedged. Rafters or joints trimmed around openings are to be correctly framed with tusk-tendon
joints and dovetailed housings. Studs in partitions are to be stub-tendoned at head and cill.
5.11.3. For roof trusses all joints in the framework shall be of the most appropriate type accurately
formed and adequately secured with bolts. All members are to be of the dimensions shown on
the drawings. The arrangement of the separate members and the constructions of all joints shall
be in accordance with the drawings and the Specification.
5.12. TIMBERS TO BE CONTINUOUS
5.12.1. Every post, beam, joist, rafter, purlin, stud, strut, tie and similar member is to extend in one
piece between its support or fixings unless otherwise approved by the Architect in writing, in
which case it is to be jointed as stated in the preceeding clause.
5.12.2. Plates, heads and cills of partitions, and similar members are to be in one piece between points
of change of direction provided that halved joints may be used to avoid the use timber exceeding
6 meters long.
5.13. NOTCHING, HOLES, ETC.
5.13.1. Where joists, rafters, etc. are notched over supports the depth of the notch is not to exceed two-
fifths of the depth of the member.
5.13.2. Holes in joists etc., for pipes are to be as near to the neutral axis as possible and are not to
exceed one- quarter of the depth of the member.
5.14. PLUGGING
5.14.1. Plugging for fixing timber to brickwork or concrete is to be with wood plugs cut with a slightly
twisted taper to fit tightly into the joint or mortice into which they are driven, or dovetailed
where cast in-situ or built in. Wood plugs are to be treated with wood preservative.
Alternatively, for screwed fixings "Rawl plugs" or similar fibrous plugs may be used.
5.15. POWER FIXING TIMBER TO CONCRETE
5.15.1. Fixing of timber to concrete with power driven fasteners shall be carried out by means of an
approved automatic cartridge operated hand tool used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
5.15.2. The Contractor shall obtain, if required, all necessary licenses required for the used of power
driven fasteners and shall pay all fees in connection.
5.16. PLYWOOD
5.16.1. Plywood shall comply with BS 1455 and be of approved manufacture and termite proof.
Plywood used for doors, fitments, ceiling or paneling and external uses shall be of type WBP :
Weather and Boil Proof quality and shall be veneer or paint grade quality as indicated. Plywood
for other uses shall be type BR: Boil Resistant quality. Edges of plywood shall be finished with
mouldings or beadings. No sawn plywood edges shall be exposed. It shall be treated with wood
preservative as previously specified, if so described.
5.17. DOORS AND WINDOWS
5.17.1. Timber doors and windows shall, unless purpose made proprietary articles of approved brand,
be constructed with stiles and rails morticed, tendoned, glued and pinned together as shown in
the drawings. All doors and windows when hung are to be perfectly vertical and accurately fill
their openings. The maximum permissible gap below or above doors shall be 3mm. All plywood
sheathed doors shall have a timber edging throughout unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
5.17.2. Flush doors shall be of the types and sizes indicated on the drawings. Doors shall be delivered in
polythene wrappers and shall be protected from subsequent damage.
5.18. FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 107 of 262

5.18.1. Fire doors and frames shall be constructed to a specification which can be shown to meet the
requirements for the relevant F.R.P. when tested in accordance with BS 478 Part 3.
5.18.2. Fire resistance doors and frames of rating specified must be obtained from a manufacturer
approved by the Inspectorate of Fire Services, Malaysia and installed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. The fire resistance rating of the doors delivered to site shall be
clearly marked on their surfaces. The Contractor shall produce certificates from the Inspectorate
of Fire Services and manufacturer's test certificates to substantiate the fire resistance rating of
doors delivered. If the approval of the Inspectorate of Fire Services to any door is not
substantiated to the satisfaction of the Architect, it shall be removed from the site at the
5.18.3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his rates for everything necessary, whether
specified herein or otherwise, to provide fire resistance doors and frames complying with the
requirements of the Inspectorate of Fire Services for fire doors of ½-hour, 1-hour and 2-hour
rating respectively.
5.19. JOINERY
5.19.1. Measurement for Joinery
- The Contractor is to take all measurements for joinery works at the building. AND NOT
from the drawings.
5.19.2. Built-in Joinery
- Where joinery works are specified to the 'built-in' or erected in position before the
surrounding or enclosing works of the main building carcass have been carried out, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the joinery works are set plumb and true, and
are not damaged or displaced by subsequent operations. Where necessary, the joinery works
shall be temporarily encased and braced.
- The Contractor shall also provide and secure suitable anchors or other fixings so that these
may be 'built-in' to the carcass while it is being constructed. The anchorage connections shall
be constructed so that they will permit settlement in the building carcass without stressing or
otherwise loading the joinery works.
- The Contractor shall also provide and fix temporary strips or other suitable packing to all
edges or surfaces of the joinery works that are to be enclosed by the materials of the building
carcass. These strips or packings are to serve as a guide in the construction of the main
building carcass, and shall be removed whenever the 'building-in' operations have been
completed. In this way, a tolerance measuring about 12mm shall be obtained in the vertical
junctions, and a clearance of about 25mm shall be obtained at the end.
- Vertical junctions shall be solidly bedded with mortar, wedged or otherwise secured, as may
be specified or, as is most appropriate in the circumstances, but the clearance in the head
shall not on any account to be filled in, wedged or packed, because it must be retained for
subsequent settlement of the building carcass.
5.19.3. Foxed-in-Joinery
- Where joinery works are specified to be 'fixed-in' or inserted in the positions they are to
occupy after the surrounding or enclosing carcass has been constructed, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the necessary fixings are incorporated in the
carcass; alternatively, the Contractor shall construct such ground works as are required to
provide a suitable base and fixing for the joinery works.
- The Contractor is to secure 'fixed-in' joinery works so that they are plumb and true to the
shapes and dimensions shown on the working drawings and details. Vertical junctions shall
be solidly bedded with mortar, wedged or otherwise secured, as may be specified or as is
most appropriate in the circumstances, but a clearance is to be maintained in all overhead
junctions so that settlement in the building carcass may take place without stressing or
otherwise loading the joinery works.
- Joinery works shall not be fixed in position until after all floor, wall and ceiling surfaces have
been formed or constructed, unless otherwise specified.
5.19.4. Joinery Assembled In-Situ
- Where joinery works are specified to be 'assembled in-situ', and all stresses of support and
fixing are to be engaged in the building carcass, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure that the necessary fixings are incorporated in the carcass; alternative, the
Page 108 of 262

Contractor shall construct such ground works as are required to provide a suitable base and
fixing for the joinery works.
- In-situ joinery works shall not be executed until after all floor, wall and ceiling surfaces have
been formed or constructed, unless otherwise specified.
5.20. FIXING FRAMES
5.20.1. Door and window frames are to be fixed to brick reveals with metal holdfasts and to thresholds
with dowels. Frames against concrete are to be screwed at 450mm centers to plugs cast or driven
into the concrete, with screw heads sunk and pelleted if exposed.
5.20.2. Timber and steel frames shall be installed true and plumb and shall be grouted solid with cement
mortar (1:3) to ensure compliance with fire rating regulations.
5.21. FIXING AND FASTENERS
5.21.1. Timber shall be fixed at such centers as will provide secure fixing.
5.21.2. Timber which is required to be secret-fixed shall be countersunk-screwed and pelleted.
5.21.3. Screws used shall be brass with countersunk heads and shall be of the size necessary for proper
fixing.
5.22. LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEETING
5.22.1. Laminated plastic sheeting shall comply with BS 3794 and shall be synthetic resin bonded
decorative laminated plastic veneer similar to 'Formica" decorative laminate (Standard Grade) of
pattern and colour to be selected by the Architect. Adhesive shall be impact adhesive of best
quality, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
5.23. TIMBER WALL AND CEILING LININGS
5.23.1. Timber shall be selected Grade C timber unless otherwise indicated, accurately machined and
well-seasoned. Match-boarded linings shall be tongued, grooved and V-jointed, with a minimum
12mm projecting tongue. Boards shall be well cramped up and concealed fixed with rust-proof
nails. Set out boards so that equal cuts occur at each side of room and stagger heading joints
between adjacent boards. Fixing linings to provide level surface free from undulations.
5.24. FLOOR BOARDING
5.24.1. Floor boards unless otherwise shall be wrot pressure treated Grade B timber laid with minimum
cutting in tongued and grooved joints. The tongue shall be of minimum 12mm projection. The
boards shall be kiln dried. The floor boards shall be well cramped and fixed to conceal.
5.25. SKIRTINGS
5.25.1. Timber skirting shall be accurately cut and mitred, fixed in maximum length with splayed
heading joints. Scribe and fit to floor if necessary.
5.26. TIMBER TO BE VARNISHED ETC.
5.26.1. Timber to be varnished or clear finished, shall be of first quality grade, selected for grain and
colour. Such timber shall be well seasoned, free from all visible defects, and shall be planned
straight and true.
5.27. CEMENT BUILDING BOARD
The cement building board shall be 'Cemboard' or other equal and approved. The board shall be
approved type, pattern and colour and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
5.27.1. Cemboard Suspended Ceiling
- Where shown on the drawings provide and construct Cemboard suspended ceiling unless
otherwise stated consisting of 6mm thick 'Cemboard' panels size 600mm x 600mm, or.
- The panels are to be fitted into aluminium 'tee grid system' supported by galvanized wire
hangers of minimum 14swg located at maximum centers of 600mm. The suspension wires
to be fixed to the structural soffit by means of mild steel angle brackets fixed with masonry
anchors. The gird system is to be adjusted for level as installation of the panels proceeds.
- The Cemboard panels are to be treated with one coat alkali resisting primer sealer to each
face before installation and finished in situ with two coats acrylic emulsion paint, or as
Page 109 of 262

otherwise directed by the Architect. All ceiling panels to be clipped to the grid system as
installation proceeds.
5.27.2. Cemboard Nail-on Ceiling
- Where shown on the drawings provide and construct 'Cemboard' ceiling consisting of 6mm
thick 'Cemboard' panels size 1200mm x 600mm with 45 degree profile to all edges or as
detailed, unless otherwise stated. The ceiling panels to be fixed to treated hardwood battens
and noggings spaced not more than 600mm apart. Fixings to be rust proof screws or nails
at centers not exceeding 300mm around the perimeter of the panel and not exceeding
300mm in the centre of the panel.
- Ceiling panels are to be primed on both faces and all edges with acrylic alkali resisting
primer sealer prior to fixing.
- After fixing and before application of finishing coat stopping and filling of screw holes to
be carried out using acrylic filling compound.
- Cemboard panels are to be finished with two coats of acrylic emulsion paint, unless
otherwise stated.
5.27.3. Cemboard Partitions
The Specification for Cemboard Nail-on Ceiling as above shall equally apply.
5.28. PREAMBLE
5.28.1. The rate for each item of "Carpenter" shall be held to include for all cutting, notching, boring,
sinking, palleting, fitting, trimming, mitreing, halving, morticing, tenoning, dovetailing, scarfing
and wedging and all ends, splayed edges, short lengths and temporary supports, rebating for
plaster and other sundry items of a like nature, nails, spikes, pins and brads.
5.28.2. The rate for each item of "Joiner" shall be held to include for all cutting, notching, holes,
housing ends, metreing, ends and shaped ends, angles, junctions, heading joints, short lengths
and any other sundry items of a like nature, labour to stops or cross grains, nails, spikes, pins
and breds and screws.
5.28.3. The rates for all suspended ceiling boards shall be held to include for all cutting, holes, complete
suspension system including edge framings, hangers and all related accessories, trimming
around isolated columns and forming openings for light fittings grilles, sprinkler heads, etc. less
than 0.50 m2. The supply and fix of suspended ceiling boards shall be measured nett and all
openings 0.50 m2 and above shall be deducted.
5.28.4. The rate for forming opening in the suspended ceiling boards shall be held to include for
providing special members comprising extra framings, bracings and hangers to support the
suspended ceiling.
6. ROOFER AND RAINWATER GOODS
6.1. GENERAL
6.1.1. The reference to Portland cement, sand, water and cement mortar under "Bricklayer" shall apply
to "Roofer and Rainwater Goods".
6.1.2. All roof surfaces to receive flat roof finished shall be sound, stable, clean, i.e. free from loose
debris, dirt, dust, grease and all traces of algae and fungi growth shall be removed by using a
stiff bristled brushes before the execution of the flat roof finish.
6.2. PITCH ROOF
6.2.1. All pitch roofs shall be laid in accordance with drawings to the required pitch.
6.3. CONCRETE FLAT ROOF FINISH
6.3.1. The flat roof finish shall be cement and sand (1:3) paving mixed with waterproofing admixtures,
unless otherwise stated.
6.3.2. Waterproofing admixtures shall be of approved manufacture, used in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
6.3.3. All surfaces shall be finished perfectly level and all surface irregularities shall be made good, or
areas so affected shall be entirely removed and made good entirely at the Contractor's own
expense.
Page 110 of 262

6.3.4. Dry cement shall not be added to the surface after laying, and excessive floating, working and
rubbing of the surface shall not be permitted.
6.3.5. Roofs shall remain without traffic for two days after laying, and shall be immediately protected
by laying clean gunny bags over.
6.4. ROOFING COVERING - R.C. FLAT ROOF
6.4.1. Cement and sand rendering to roof, etc. described as "waterproofed shall be waterproofed with a
waterproofing agent approved by the S.O. and mixed strictly in accordance with the
6.4.2. All surfaces to be rendered are to be brushed clean and well wetted before the rendering is
applied. The rendering shall be kept damp and adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and
cracking.
6.4.3. The mortar for the rendering is to be mechanically or hand mixed as directed by the S.0. and the
Contractor is to make allowance for the use of additional cement necessitated by the method of
mixing instructed. Only whole bags of cement are to be used in any one batch of mix.
6.5. ROOFING COVERING - METAL ROOF DECKING
6.5.1. The metal roof decking is to be executed by Specialists approved by the S.O. Before any
installation is carried out the Contractor is to submit for the S.O.'s approval the name of the
Specialist Sub-Contractor firm the Contractor proposes to employ.
6.5.2. The galvanized steel roof decking shall conform to B.S. 3083 and free from twist, buckle or
flashing. The galvanizing shall be clean and the surface of the sheets shall be free from obvious
surface contamination and defects. The tenderer shall provide complete details of the type,
section, sizes, gauge thickness, etc. of the roof decking he would supply and the method of
fixing and anchoring to be employed. The fixing straps shall effectively secure the roof decking
without puncturing the deck in any way. The installation must be fully water-tight.
6.5.3. The galvanized steel roof decking to be laid so that the ribs will run parallel to the roof framing
members and at 90° to the purlins. Continuous shouldered edges to interlock over sides of
adjacent decks and the sheets fixed by fasteners in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. As far as possible, the deck shall be single- length panels running from ridge to
gutter or gutter to gutter. Where runs exceed maximum length, panels are to be lapped as
recommended by the manufacturer.
6.5.4. In addition, all accessories and the method of fixing shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and to the satisfaction of the S.O.
6.5.5. Ridge capping, hip and valley tiles shall be provided to match the general tiling and these shall
be bedded in matching 1:3 colored cement mortar.
6.6. GLASSWOOL INSULATION
6.6.1. The glasswool insulation, under sheeting to roofs, shall have a density of 16 Kg/m3 and be laid
over timber framing, including 150 mm laps in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions, unless otherwise stated.
6.7. ALUMINIUM FOIL INSULATION
6.7.1. Aluminium foil insulation shall be "Sisalation 903" or other equal and approved single sided
reinforced aluminium foil insulation sheeting laid over rafters with 150 mm laps, in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions, unless otherwise stated.
6.8. GALVANIZED CHICKEN WIRE NETTING
6.8.1. The galvanized chicken wire netting, under sheeting to roofs shall be of 22 gauge and 12 mm
diameter mesh including 150 mm laps, unless otherwise stated.
6.9. GALVANIZED IRON RAINWATER DOWNPIPES
6.9.1. Galvanized iron rainwater downpipes and fittings shall be 24 gauge or other equal and approved
soldered at joints and fixed at least 38 mm clear of walls with approved holderbats, at not more
than 1.80 m centres, unless otherwise stated.
6.10. DOMICAL BALLOON GRATINGS
Page 111 of 262

6.10.1. Domical balloon gratings to each outlet shall be galvanized iron wire domical grating, unless
otherwise stated.
6.11. UPVC RAINWATER DOWNPIPES
6.11.1. The UPVC rainwater downpipes and fittings shall be "Paling" unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
(UPVC) pipe, unless otherwise stated, and fittings complying with B.S. 4576 Part 1, laid and
socket jointed with rubber sealing rings to B.S. 2494 Part 2, all in accordance with the
6.11.2. All rainwater downpipes and fittings shall be in good working condition and tested floor by
floor for soundness, water tightness, etc, all to the satisfaction of the Architect.
6.11.3. The Contractor shall rectify, make good or replace all unsound or defective pipes and fittings
and re-test all to the satisfaction of the Architect at his own expense.
6.12. CHROMIUM PLATED MILD STEEL GRATINGS
6.12.1. Chromium plated mild steel gratings to each outlet shall be to the Architect's approval, unless
otherwise stated.
6.13. GALVANIZED IRON FLASHINGS AND GUTTERS
6.13.1. Galvanized iron flashings and gutters shall be 24 gauge, unless otherwise stated, and shall be lap
jointed in the direction of flow and caulked with either red lead and putty or a bituminous cold
caulking compound.
6.14. CLEANING AND TESTING
6.14.1. On completion, clean down all roofs, remove all debris, loose nails, mortar droppings, paint
drips, clean out outlets and test all roofing and downpipes and leave the whole roofing and
rainwater disposal system clean and watertight to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.
6.15. PREAMBLES
6.15.1. The rate for each item of "Roofer and Rainwater Goods" shall be held to include for all rounded
edges, arrises, working round and forming collars to pipes, etc., narrow widths, small quantities,
all straight, raking or circular cutting and subsequent waste, temporary rules, making good and
any other sundry items of a like nature, and grading to roof outlets and the like.
7. PREFABRICATED TIMBER ROOF TRUSSES
7.1. PREFABRICATED TIMBER ROOF TRUSSES

7.1.1. Timber Work
7.1.2. Timber shall be sawn pressure treated Grade "B" timber for roofing works. The timber roof
trusses shall be properly levelled and aligned to receive roof covering. All centilevers roof
trusses shall be fully supported and/or propped until all roofing works have been completed. All
cantilevered joints and/or purlins shall be strengthened by adequate cross-bracing, struts or other
suitable means unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall satisfy himself
and the P.R. that the conditions necessary for the proper support and restraint of the roof are
obtained in the walls and other related structures. Overhanging edges shall be adequately
cantilevered and anchored back to the main roof.
7.2. PREFABRICATED GANGNAIL TIMBER ROOF TRUSSES
7.2.1. Generally
a) The Contractor shall design, fabricate, deliver to site and erection of prefabricated gangnail
timber roof trusses and provide at his own cost and expense all necessary materials, tools,
hoists, staging, temporary bracings etc., for the safe and proper erection of the
prefabricated timber roof trusses inclusive of all canopies or porch and window hoods all
complete with rafters, purlins, top and bottom chords, ties, struts, bearers, wall plates, ridge
board, valley board, cleats, packing pieces, gangnail connectors, straps, holding down bolts
and all other associated and requisite items required for the works for the safe and proper
erection of the works all to the satisfaction and approval of the P.R.
b) The roof trusses shall be fabricated in accordance with the specifications as provided, the
profile, pitch and details as shown on drawings.
Page 112 of 262
7.2.2. Materials
a) All timber used for the works shall be pressure treated sawn Grade “B” timber.
b) Timber truss connectors used for the works shall be "Gangnail" or other equal and
approved connectors from an approved supplier and used in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
c) All timber roof trusses shall be firmly secured at joints with approved gangnail connection
plates by means of mechanical compressor at factory and transport and deliver to site for
installation.
7.2.3. Submittals
The Contractor shall be required to submit together with the tender all at his own cost and
expenses not less than six (6) sets of the following for the P.R.'s approval: -
a) Complete detailed working drawings showing the Contractor's firm proposal for the
prefabricated timber roof trusses (inclusive of canopies or porch and window hoods). The
drawings for the prefabricated timber roof trusses as submitted by the Contractor shall
show the prefabricated timber roof trusses layout (inclusive of canopies or porch and
window hoods) with the positions, types, sizes, spacing etc., of the trusses indicated and
legibly marked. The drawings as submitted by the Contractor shall be designed by a
registered professional Engineer and these drawings shall be endorsed by a registered
professional Engineer and the drawings shall indicate the name and the registration number
of the Engineer.
b) All necessary design calculations including roof loading plan, jointing details of the timber
members including the detail calculation of the forces at the joints prepared by a registered
professional Engineer.
c) Sufficient design and other necessary data to show that prefabricated timber roof trusses
are adequately designed for.
d) Relevant specifications covering every construction stage and quality of materials to be
used in the proposed prefabricated timber roof trusses and the standards to be achieved.
e) Detail guarantee of load carrying capacity of the prefabricated timber roof trusses.
7.2.4. Modifications, Improvements, Amendments Or Changes To Detailed Working Drawings
Submitted
The Contractor shall take note that the Architect and/or the Consultant Engineer shall reserve
the right to make any modifications, improvements, amendments or changes to the detailed
working drawings submitted by the Contractor.
a) Any modifications, improvements, amendments or changes to the positions, types, sizes,
spacing etc., of the prefabricated roof trusses (inclusive of canopies or porch and window
hoods) including changes to the types and sizes of connectors and addition of connectors
required by the Architect and/or the Consultant Engineer over those submitted by the
Contractor in his proposal to effect complete and satisfactory execution of the timber roof
trusses SHALL NOT be treated as variations and as such, any additional costs incurred by
the Contractor as a result of such modifications, improvements, amendments or changes
shall be solely borne by the Contractor.
b) The Contractor shall not fabricate and install the roof trusses without the written approval
of the shop drawings by the P.R. and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for all
consequences for failure to comply with this requirement.
c) Notwithstanding the approval of the Contractor's design proposal of the roof trusses by the
P.R., the responsibility of the design, fabrication and installation of the prefabricated roof
trusses shall still be solely rest upon the Contractor.
7.2.5. Guarantee
a) The Contractor shall provide a written joint guarantee with this manufacturer to the P.R. for
a period of ten (10) years from the date of practical completion of the works to cover
against faulty materials, finishes, workmanship and installation and other defects or design
faults whereby a failure of the prefabricated timber roof trusses system in whole or in part
is rectified at NO cost to the P.R.
7.2.6. Payment
a) Payment for prefabricated timber roof trusses shall deemed to include for design, provision
of shop drawings, all necessary materials, fabrication, delivery to site, hoisting and fixing
in position, all fixing accessories, all ancillary items and temporary works for the complete
installation of the roof trusses.
Page 113 of 262
8. IRONMONGER
8.1. IRONMONGERY
8.1.1. All ironmongery shall not be referring to Schedule of Ironmongery provided by Architect / ID.
8.1.2. Supply, store, protect as necessary, sort out, assemble and fix all ironmongery supplied, all in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide each key with a numbered aluminium
identification tag for handing to the Employer.
8.1.3. The ironmongery shall be carefully fitted with matching screws. All exposed parts of locks shall
match the finish of the furniture. All joinery, wood work and other work which is damaged,
spoiled in appearance or weakened, shall be removed and renewed at the Contractor's expense.
Fittings, except butt hinges, shall be removed during painting work and afterwards carefully re-
fixed.
8.1.4. Wrap and protect from use and oil all ironmongery on completion.
8.1.5. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all fittings that are damaged, badly installed, or
broken through the Contractor's failure to protect them adequately or by misuse by workmen,
etc. before they are handed over to the Employer.
8.1.6. Provide for mater-keying all locks within the building in accordance with good security practice.
It is a requirement of the Employer that a good security system for the building is essential to
gain and maintain the confidence of tenants/occupants.
8.2. PREAMBLES
8.2.1. The rate for each item of "Ironmongery" whether of "supply and fix" or "fix only" shall be held
to include for taking delivery, unloading, carrying in, sorting, storing, stripping or removing
protective wrapping or coverings, checking, assembling, returning packages, handling, hoisting,
placing or lowering and fixing in position including fitting, cutting, sinking, boring and
adjusting, refixing, and for cutting away and making good, levelling, packing, grouting, puttying
and touching up, all in accordance with the generally accepted requirements of the specific item,
including protecting and safeguarding the work until the issue of the Certificate of Practical
Completion.
9. STEEL AND IRONWORKER
9.1. GENERAL
9.1.1. All materials shall be subject to the approval of the Architect, but the fact that the Contractor has
used "approved" materials will not absolve him of his responsibility in respect of this section of
the Works.
9.1.2. All steel and ironwork shall be of approved origin and shall comply with the relevant
requirements of the British Standards.
9.1.3. The Contractor shall furnish, for structural steelwork supplied by him, manufacturer's mill test
certificates and these shall be submitted for approval, by the Architect before any material shall
be brought onto the Site.
9.1.4. The costs of preparing materials for testing, and for all Site and laboratory tests under this
heading will be borne by the Contractor, who will also provide all necessary apparatus and
facilities, transportation, and pay all charges for such tests.
9.1.5. The Contractor will, as directed, take and deliver samples of structural steel for testing at an
approved laboratory. Should the results of a test be unsatisfactory, the whole consignment of
steel which the sample represents will be rejected.
9.1.6. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary equipment for tests, in a satisfactory
condition on Site, for as long as the Architect may require.
9.1.7. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with copies of all test results. Structural steel and
testing shall comply with BS : 4360 and 4848.
9.1.8. Steel tubes shall comply with BS : 1775
9.1.9. Rectangular hollow sections shall comply with BS : 4, Part 2.
9.1.10. The dimensions, weights and tolerances, etc. of all bolts, rivets, nuts, studs, etc. shall conform to
the following standards: -
Page 114 of 262

- Black bolts, nuts, studs, lock nuts and washers shall comply with the requirements of BS :
916 for dimensions, and with BS : 84 for screw threads, or with BS : 1769 for unified black
bolts, etc.
- Normal and levelled washers shall complly with BS : 3410.
- Turned bolts shall have the shank turned to the specified diameter allowing only a minus
tolerance up to 0.005 mm.
- Rivets shall comply with the requirements of BS : 275 for dimensions.
9.1.11. All steelwork shall be neatly stored on raised platforms under protective coverings and any steel
on which there are indications of rust or corrosion shall be wire brushed to the satisfaction of the
Architect and reprimed with one coat of red oxide, before being incorporated into the Work.
9.1.12. Steelwork shall be fabricated by a specialist contractor, whose name shall be supplied to the
Architect, for approval before commencement of the Works.
9.1.13. Fabrication and assembly may be carried on the Site, or at the Contractor's workshop.
9.1.14. The weight of all steel sections is exclusive of rolling margins, which shall not exceed 2½ %
under theoretical weight.
9.2. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
9.2.1. The method of measurement employed for structural steelwork is in accordance with the
"Alternative Method of Measurement" of the Standard Method of Building Works for use in
Malaysia.
9.3. DRAWINGS
9.3.1. The Drawings prepared are layout drawings and typical details for the purposes of tendering and
the Contractor shall prepare his own shop drawings, showing sizes, dimensions of all bolts and
rivets, complete with details of welds, type of electrodes, welding procedures, whether welding
is to be shop or Site executed, and the other details as are required for the purposes of
fabrication and erection.
9.3.2. Before fabrication commences, the Contractor shall submit two copies of his shop drawings to
the Architect for approval. When approved, one set will be returned to the Contractor signed as
approved, upon receipt of which the Contractor shall commence fabrication.
9.3.3. It shall be expressly understood that such approval of shop drawings by the Architect does not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors and/or omissions contained in the drawings.
9.3.4. The Contractor shall include for the costs of preparing shop drawings for approval and
fabrication purposes.
9.4. WORKMANSHIP
9.4.1. The fabrication and erection of steelwork shall comply with BS : 449 Part 5.
9.4.2. Any part of the work which does not comply with the Drawings and/or this Section will be
rejected, and shall be removed from the Site, if delivered, within 24 hours from receipt of such
notice of rejection.
9.4.3. Where fabrication is executed at the Contractor's workshop, the Contractor shall give four (4)
days’ notice of steelwork ready for inspection at the said workshop. After inspection all
members and fittings shall be painted with identification marks corresponding to those on the
marking plans, for the purpose of identification during erection.
9.4.4. To check the accuracy of fabrication, when practicable, on complete frame or component shall
be erected temporarily on Site or in the said workshop, for the inspection of the Architect.
9.4.5. Ends of beams, channels and other parts abuting against or upon other parts, shall be cut to exact
lengths, true and square, so as to provide a good bed or joint as the case may be. Proper cover
plates shall be provided where necessary and covers to angles shall be of diminished leg
dimensions while maintaining at least the same sectional area. Edges of web plates shall be flush
with the faces of the flange angles, and stiffeners shall fit closely against the flanges. Bolt heads
and ends of eye rods shall not be welded on but formed out of the solid metal.
9.4.6. The following tolerances shall be allowed:
i. End of members connecting steel to steel +- 2 mm at each end.
ii. Horizontal overall measurement of trusses, beams and frames +- 6 mm for ties and struts.
iii. Deviation from straight line, +- 6 mm for beams and +- 3 mm for ties and struts.
iv. Deviation from vertical for columns+- 3 mm.
v. Upward camber of beams from 1/300 to 1/500 of the span.
Page 115 of 262
9.5. BOLT AND RIVET HOLES
9.5.1. All holes shall be accurately marked off from templates or corresponding plate, and drilled,
except in plates 10 mm thick or under, which may be punched. All holes shall be truly
cylindrical and perpendicular to the connecting surfaces and shall be free from burrs or rough
edges and countersunk where required. No drifting shall be allowed, the diameter of all holes
shall not exceed the diameter of the bolt or rivet by more than 2 mm, except where machined
bolts or pins are specified, which may be push-fit.
9.6. BOLTS
9.6.1. Black bolts shall be used throughout the Works, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
9.6.2. Bolts and nuts shall be of the best quality with Whitworth threads. Whenever a bolt is subjected
to a tensile stress, as in the case of tie bolts, the threaded ends shall be of a larger section so that
the full sectional area of the bolt is maintained at the bottom of the threads. Bolts shall be with
hexagonal heads nuts with round shanks, unless otherwise specified.
9.6.3. Unless otherwise specified, all bolts shall have washers 5 mm thick. Tapered washers shall be
provided to bolts which pass through the flanges of rolled joists, etc. The external diameter of
washers shall be 2½ times the diameter of the bolt.
9.6.4. Bolts shall be of such a length as to project not less than 3 mm nor more than 12 mm beyond the
nut when tightened up.
9.7. BOLTED CONNECTIONS
9.7.1. All contact surfaces shall be cleaned of all foreign matter immediately prior to being brought
together and special care being taken to remove all oil, grease, etc. from surfaces to be joined by
grip bolts.
9.8. MARKING STEELWORK
9.8.1. All steel and ironwork shall be marked m accordance with a marking diagram supplied by the
Contractor.
9.9. CUTTING STEELWORK
9.9.1. Cutting of steel and iron by oxyacetylene means will not be permitted without the prior approval
of the Architect. Where such cutting is so allowed, the member cut shall be of sufficient
dimensions to allow the cut edges to be filed down to remove all steel damaged by the effect of
heat.
9.10. WELDED CONNECTIONS
9.10.1. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with methods approved by the Architect.
9.10.2. Before any welding work commences, the Contractor shall establish, to the satisfaction of the
Architect, that the proposed welders are experienced for the work they are to carry out.
9.10.3. Welding plant shall be of modem design and of adequate capacity to produce the required
current at each welding point, without appreciatble fluctuation.
9.10.4. No welding, where possible shall be fillet-welding.
9.10.5. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slab, rust, grease, paint and other
deleterious materials. Surfaces shall also be free from fins, tears, and other defects. Preparation
of bevelled edges for welding shall be executed by planning or machine flame cutting. Grinding
or flame cutting such surfaces by hand shall be done only when approved by the Architect
9.10.6. Welding sequences and procedures shall be such as to cause minimum distortion of the welded
parts.
9.10.7. The Contractor shall make such welds as may be required to demonstrate the soundness of his
proposed methods and the competence of his workmen. Trial welds shall be made with the parts
fitted together with the clearances, coupled with the maximum limits of fit, lowest preheat and
worst combinations of electrode conditions allowed under this Section or by the Contractor's
proposed procedure.
9.10.8. All members to be welded shall be accurately prepared so that components will fit closely
together. After assembly and before general welding commences, the parts shall be tack welded
with small fillet welds about 50 mm long made with 5 mm electrodes and a high current. The
tack welds shall be of the same quality and size as the first run of the main weld. When the latter
Page 116 of 262

is deposited complete fusion with the ends of the tack welds to form a final profile free from
irregularities is required.
9.10.9. All defective or unsound welds shall be cut out and replaced or suitably corrected, as instructed
by the Architect.
9.11. PAINTING STEELWORK
9.11.1. All steel and ironwork including all contact surfaces, except when used in reinforced concrete
work, shall be coated with one coat of red oxide paint in the workshop before erection.
9.11.2. Any rust or scale shall be removed with wire brushes and affected surfaces painted with one
further coat of red oxide.
9.11.3. After painting, all members shall be clearly marked for identification on the Site, for erection
purposes.
9.12. TRANSPORTING
9.12.1. All steel and ironwork shall be loaded, transported and unloaded without being excessively
stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged. Bolts, rivets, washers, and small and loose pieces
shall be securely bagged and marked for easy identification.
9.13. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
9.13.1. The Contractor shall furnish at his own expense all necessary tools, hoists, staging and materials
of any description, necessary for the safe and proper erection of structural steelwork. The
erection procedure and all equipment used, shall comply with any relevant local bye-law
applicable to the Site.
9.13.2. When lifting or fitting structural steelwork into position, care shall be taken that the parts are not
strained, twisted, bent or damaged, etc., in any manner whatsoever. Should any part be strained,
twisted, bent or damaged, etc. it shall be reinstated in a manner as directed by the Architect by
gently heating and bending, but not by hammering. Any part which in the opinion of the
Architect is badly damaged, shall be replaced.
9.13.3. All framing shall be fixed in true alignment, level and plumb
9.13.4. All columns and bases shall be set accurately to the required lines and levels and all holding
down bolts shall be strictly in accordance with the Drawings.
9.13.5. No member of the structure shall be finally bolted, rivetted, or welded until the whole or a major
section is approved by the Architect for line, level and vertically.
9.13.6. Bolted connections of all assembled sections shall be properly tightened before erection and all
connections shall be completed and tightened before releasing guys and stays. Similarly, all
braces and struts between trusses, etc. shall be fixed and tightened while the main members are
still supported.
9.13.7. Any damage to any member or part thereof, by any cause whatever, shall be immediately
reported to the Architect and his approval of the method of correction obtained.
9.14. PREAMBLES
9.14.1. The rate for each item of "Steel and Ironworker" etc. will be held to include for taking delivery,
unloading, carrying in; sorting, storing, stripping, or removing protective wrapping or coverings,
checking, assembling, returning packages, handling, hoisting and placing or lowering, or fitting
and fixing materials and goods in position, adjusting, refixing, and for cutting away and making
good, levelling, packing, grouting, providing templates and plugged grounds, and touching up,
all in accordance with the generally accepted requirements of the specific item, including
protecting and safeguarding until the issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.
9.14.2. The rate for each item of "Steel and Ironworker" will be held to include for all straight, skew and
circular cutting, etc. and all holes for pipes, etc.
9.14.3. The rate for each item of "Metalworker" shall be held to include for requirements of all testing.
10. METAL WORKER
10.1. GENERAL
Page 117 of 262

10.1.1. All materials shall be of the best quality obtainable and shall be clean, straight and free from
twist before assembly. If straightening and flattening is necessary, it shall be done in a manner
that will not injure the material.
10.2. MILD STEEL ROLLED SECTIONS
10.2.1. Mild steel rolled sections shall conform to BS 4360 : 1979 and shall be of standard sizes.
10.3. MILD STEEL PLATES, RODS AND BARS
10.3.1. All plates, rods and bars for general purpose shall conform to BS : 1449 Part 1, perfectly
straight, free from winding and except where otherwise shown shall be in one length. Members
shall be bent to the exact forms required and the ends filed to form true joints. Small steel
angles, tees and channels shall be of cold rolled section complying with BS : 2994.
10.4. GALVANISED STEEL TUBING
10.4.1. Galvanized steel tubing shall comply with the requirements of BS 1387 medium grade.
10.5. STAINLESS STEEL
10.5.1. Stainless steel shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1449 Part 4.
10.6. FABRICATED MILD STEEL
10.6.1. Generally mild steel shall be fabricated by welding or brazing. All welding or brazing shall be
ground smooth after manufacture, and shall be free from all defects.
10.6.2. Welds shall be 7 mm fillet or full butt welds as required.
10.6.3. Mild steel shall be fabricated by skilled workpeople and shall be accurately manufactured and
assembled to angles, curves and sizes, free from warps, hammer marks, burrs, distortion and
other imperfections.
10.6.4. No fabrication shall commence until shop drawings have been prepared and approved by the
Architect. Mild steel shall be fabricated in convenient sections for transport and fixing.
10.6.5. Fabricated mild steel, plugged and screwed to concrete or masonry shall be fixed with
galvanized or cadmium plated screws and approved patent plugs.
10.7. CAST IRON
10.7.1. Cast iron generally shall be of good grey metal, and conform to BS: 1452, Grade 14.
10.7.2. Cast iron shall be sound, free from all flaws such as pitting due to impurities or sand from the
pattern, cold shuts, blow-holes etc. It shall be clean and smooth. Loading test for deflection and
fracture shall comply with the relevant British Standards. The edges of casting shall be rounded,
and internal angles finished with an angle fillet or feathered where practicable.
10.8. TESTS
10.8.1. All wrought iron, steel and cast iron articles shall be submitted to a reasonable test for strength,
if so required by the Architect, at the Contractor's expense.
10.9. SMITH'S WORK
10.9.1. Smith's work shall be forged clean from the anvil with flatters, swages or rounding tools and
neatly chamfered at the edges or diminished as required. All welds, tenons and sets are to be
soundly made and all superfluous metal removed.
10.10. WELDING
10.10.1. All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS : 5135 "General
Requirements for the Metal-arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels".
10.11. CHROMIUM PLATING
10.11.1. Chromium plating for all chromium plated articles shall be on a base material of copper or brass.
10.11.2. Chromium plating shall be of the quality described in BS : 1224 for service condition no. 3 -
normal outdoor conditions and shall be free from visible defects, such as blisters, pits, unplated
areas, cloudy patches, cracks or stains.
10.12. GALVANIZING
Page 118 of 262

10.12.1. Galvanized articles shall be thoroughly and evenly coated with zinc by the hot dipped process
and shall be free from stains, bare spots and other defects.
10.12.2. Galvanizing shall be carried out after fabrication, and articles shall be thoroughly cleaned in
caustic and acid solutions before the galvanizing process is carried out.
10.12.3. The minimum weight of zinc deposited by galvanizing shall be 300g/m2 of surface. The
galvanizing shall comply with the requirements of BS : 729.
10.12.4. The galvanized articles shall be packed with care for transportation.
10.12.5. Any cutting, drilling, abrasions or welding carried out after galvanizing must be ground down to
bare white metal and treated with two coats Expandite Galvafroid SB or other equal and
approved cold galvanizing paint. Wherever possible galvanizing shall be carried out after all
welding, cutting and drilling is complete and the surface suitably protected.
10.13. BOLTS AND NUTS
10.13.1. Bolts and nuts shall comply with BS: 916 (1953) and BS: 1494 Part 1 (1964) where applicable.
10.13.2. All screwed work shall be projected at least two threads through nuts, and all bolts shall have
hexagon heads and nuts with standard washers which shall be splayed if necessary to give a
level and even bearing for the nuts.
10.14. EXPANDED METAL LATH
10.14.1. Expanded metal lath shall be "Expamet" produced by the Expanded Metal Co. Ltd. Or other
equal and approved and shall be of the following types:-
i. Expament BB 263
Expament BB 263 in 300mm strips for strengthening cement plaster shall be fixed at not
more than 300 mm centres to the concrete or brick at one edge and at the centre. The strips
shall be cut so that maximum stiffeners are obtained across the strip.
ii. Exmet
Exmet strip for reinforcement of brick walls shall be in width 12 mm less than the width of
the wall, laid at every fourth course.
10.14.2. All metal lathing shall be fixed as taut as possible with largest dimension of the mesh running
between supports and with stiffening ribs uppermost in the same direction. Cut ends shall be
turned away from the plastered surface.
10.14.3. End laps shall be not less than 25 mm when the lap occurs at the bearer and otherwise not less
than 50 mm. Side laps shall be not less than 25 mm. All laps shall be securely wired together
with 18 gauge soft galvanized binding wire at intervals of not more than25 mm.
10.15. PREAMBLES
10.15.1. The rate for each item of "Metalworker" shall be held to include for refixing and cutting away
and making good, levelling, packing, grouting, providing templates and plugged grounds and
touching up, all in accordance with the generally accepted requirements of the specific item.
10.15.2. The rate for each item of "Metalworker" shall be held to include for all straight, skew and
circular cutting, etc. and all holes for pipes, etc.
10.15.3. The rate for each item of "Metalworker" shall be held to include for requirements of all testing.
11. PLASTERER
11.1. PLASTERWORK
11.1.1. Metal Lathing
Metal lathing shall be of approved galvanised expanded metal of the weight described and
complying in all respects with B.S. 1369. weight shall not be less than 1.6 kg/m2 for sanded
plaster and l .9kg/m2 for external rendering.
11.1.2. Cement
Ordinary Portland cement and white cement shall comply with B.S 12 : Part 2. Coloured cement
shall comply with BS. 12: Part 2, except with regards to the addition of colourant to B.S. 1014
which shall not exceed 5% of the cement by weight.
11.1.3. Lime Putty
Lime putty shall be prepared from hydrated lime complying with B.B 890 : Part 2. Hydrated
lime shall be added to water stirred to a creamy consisitency and left to mature at least 16 hours
Page 119 of 262

before use. Alternatively, ready slaked lime may be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
The lime putty shall be protected to prevent drying out.
11.1.4. Sand
Sand for cement and lime mixes shall comply with B.S 1197 Table 1. Sand for use with white
Portland cement shall be silver sand and for use in coloured cement mixes shall be of suitable
colour.
11.1.5. Plasticiser
Plasticiser shall comply with B.S 4887 and used strictly m accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
11.1.6. Water
Water shall be potable or obtained from the mains and shall be free from impurities
11.1.7. Waterproofer
Waterproofer shall be integral waterproofer from an approved manufacturer Angle and Casing
Beads, etc.
11.1.8. Steel angle beads, casing beads, architrave beads shall be approved tight coat galvanised metal
used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
11.1.9. Angles, Mouldings, Quirks, etc on Plaster.
External angles on internal or external plaster are to be slightly rounded, and internal agles are
to be slightly coved.
All mouldings and other features are to be even and true with all mitred angles, stops, ends etc
neatly formed
All plaster abutting projection (fair faced) columns, timber posts or similar members to be
finished with a neat splay or quirk
11.1.10. Storage of Materials
Plaster, lime and cement shall be kept dry. Plaster, lime and cement shall be stored separately
and used in rotation of deliveries, and no plaster shall be used after three months from its date of
manufacture unless tested and approved. All sand shall be stored separately according to type,
on clean, hard, dry standings and shall be protected from contaminants.
11.1.11. Preparation of Surface
Surface to receive plastering shall be dry brushed to remove all loose particles,dust,
efflorescence, etc. and any projecting fins of concrete or mortar shall be hacked off. All traces
of mould oil shall be removed from surfaces by scrubbing with water containing detergent and
mixing with fresh water.
Surfaces shall be wetted and rewetted as required to equalise section before the first coat of
plaster is applied. In particular, dense hard surfaces shall be wetted and rewetted as required
before bonding plaster is applied.
11.1.12. Spatterdash
Spatterdash shall consist of a mixture of one volume of Portland cement and two volume of
clean, sharp, coarse sand prepared as thick slurry and shall be hand "thrown" to a thickness of
3mm to 6mm. It shall be left as thrown but wetted with a fine spray when necessary to ensure
proper setting.
11.1.13. Fixing Metal Lathing
Metal lathing shall be fixed with 38mm galvanised steel staples with joints lapped 38mm and
tied with galvanised steel wire. The long way of the mesh shall be at right angles to the
supports. The slope of the strands shall be in one direction which for vertifcal work shall be
inwards and downwards.
Edges of timber plates, frames etc in wall or surfaces of pipes chased in brickwall which are to
be plastered or screeded are to be covered with a strip of expanded metal lathing projecting at
least 50mm either side of the timber and fixed with galvanised slopes.
Similarly for joints between brickwork and concrete surfaces which are to be plastered, are to be
covered with a strip of "exmet" of 100mm wide and fixed with galvanised slopes. The
contractor's price shall be deemed to include for all these requirements.
11.1.14. Mixing of Mortar
Plastering materials shall be mixed as described for mortar in Brickwork Section.
11.1.15. Internal Plaster
Internal plaster unless otherwise stated, shall be finished smooth with steel trowel as follows: -
a) Concrete
Soffit of slab only – 12mm thick in single coat of cement and sand (1:3)
Page 120 of 262
All other surfaces - 12mm thick in two coat work consisting of: -
i. A 9mm thick base coat of cement and sand (1:3) and
ii. A 3mm thick finishing coat of cement, lime and sand (1:1;4)
b) Blockwork (All walls) - 12mm thick in two coat work consisting of: -
c) Brickwork (All walls) - 19mm thick in two coat work consisting of: -
For two coat work, base coat shall be roughened for bonding purpose. A period of two weeks
shall lapse between the two coats and the base coat shall be thoroughly wetted before
application of the finishing coat. The finishing coat shall be perfectly even and true, and of
consistent finish.
11.1.16. External Plaster
Plain face plaster unless otherwise stated, shall be 19mm thick in two coat works, each of
cement and sand (1:3) finished with a wood float as follows: -
i. A 13mm thick base coat
ii. A 6mm thick finishing coat
The base coat shall be roughened before it sets. A period of two coats shall lapse in between the
two coats and the base coat shall be thoroughly wetted before the application of the finishing
coat.
11.1.17. Making Good
Where defects in plaster or rendering have to be made good the complete area of the wall or
panel in which the defect occurs shall be cut out and replaced. Should this be impracticable the
defective area shall be cut out to a rectangle shape as directed, the undercut to form a key and
patched flush with surrounding plaster rubbed down smooth with fine sand paper.
11.1.18. Tyrolean Rendering
Tyrolean rendering unless otherwise stated shall consist of 9.5mm of cement and sand (1:3)
with plasticiser plaster backing ruled to a plain and level surface and finished with "Tyrolean"
rendering.
The Tyrolean shall consist of one part cement to two parts sand by volume applied to the
backing coat by means of a "Tyrolean" machine in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The finish is to be built up in three layers to a total thickness not less than 6.3mm.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the application of subsequent coats.
11.1.19. Shanghai Plaster
Shanghai plaster unless otherwise stated shall comprise a rendering coat of 9.5mm thick of
cement and sand (l:3) and a floating coat of 9.5mm thick which is to consist of one part cement
as described and three parts of limestone, granite or other chippings to be approved by the
Architect. The surface washed and brushed down to expose the chippings.
The chippings shall comprise selected one part white (48%), one part pink (48%) and one part
black (4%) or any other percentage combination as selected and approved by the Architect.
The rates shall include for forming all joints, recesses, grooves, etc with wrot formwork and
pointing and touching up on removal of formwork.
The rates for Shanghai Plaster shall also include for finishing with two coats of approved anti-
fungus finish.
11.1.20. Skim Coat Plaster
Skim coat plaster unless otherwise stated shall be "Brefill" or other equal and approved ready-
mixed cement based plaster applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
The rates shall include for grinding smooth and preparing the concrete sufaces ready to receive
the plaster.
11.1.21. Spraytile Finish
Spraytile finish unless otherwise stated shall be "Bonntile -Dnt" or other equal and approved
coating in approved colour and texture applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
The cement and sand backing screed shall be finished with wood trowelling and rubbed to an
even surface with wet sponge and shall be allowed to dry for not less than 14 days before the
application commences.
rubbed to an even surface with wet sponge and shall be allowed to dry for not less
Page 121 of 262
The different types shall be as follows: -
a) Acrylic Type
1 coat acrylic sealer
l coat texture compound
2 coats acrylic resin finish
b) Polyurethane Type
1 coat acrylic sealer
1 coat texture compound
2 coats polyurethane finish
Performance warranty shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer in favour of the
Employer.
11.2. PREAMBLES
11.2.1. The rate for each item of "Plasterer" shall be held to include for dubbing out, cutting plaster to
suspended ceiling line or finishing plaster above suspended ceiling line, narrow widths and
small quantities, temporary rules, joints between different types of plastering etc., internal
angles, arrises, quirks, groin points and other intersections of curved surfaces, rounded coves
and external angles not exceeding 25mm radius, and mitres, stops, etc. on cornices, mouldings,
enrichments, coves, skirtings, gutters and strings, all making good and any other sundry items of
a like nature.
12. MABLE AND GRANITE
12.1. GENERALLY
12.1.1. The marble unless otherwise stated shall be 15mm - 100mm thick, size and shape of stones all in
accordance to Architectural Drawings.
12.1.2. The Granite unless otherwise stated shall be 20mm - 50mm thick of approved type and size; all
in accordance to Architectural Drawings.
12.2. FINISHES
12.2.1. The exposed surfaces unless otherwise stated of marble shall be sawn finish, granite shall be
chisel finished and fine grain all in accordance with the sample approved by the Architect.
12.3. SHOP DRAWINGS
12.3.1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit fully dimensioned shop drawings from details supplied
by the Architect and from site measurement. Key numbers of each stone/marble shall be shown
together with details of all metal anchorages or necessary brackets. No marble or granite shall be
worked until these drawings are approved by the Architect.
12.4. TOLERANCES
12.4.1. The length and height dimensions of individual slabs shall be worked to within plus or 10mm
from those specified. Thickness shall be within 3mm from that specified, except where the
thickness of the slab/marble from a visible end. In such case, the thickness must be accurate to
close limit.
12.5. CRAMP HOLES AND MORTICES
12.5.1. Cramp holes and mortices shall be carefully drilled or cut to avoid stunning or fracture of the
material adjacent to the hole or mortice.
12.6. BRACKET AND METAL ANCHORAGES
12.6.1. Bracket and metal anchorages shall be made from a suitable non-ferrous metal such as copper,
phosphor-bronze, gunmetal or other approved metal. They shall be of such approved shape and
dimension that they are adequate to carry the loads to be imposed upon them.
12.6.2. In no case shall metal fixings that can give rise to bimetallic corrosion be permitted.
12.7. BACKING SCREED
Page 122 of 262

12.7.1. Backing screeds unless otherwise stated shall be of one (1) part of cement to three (3) parts of
sand having a 20mm nominal thickness unless otherwise stated, to produce a true, level and
plumb surface or slope to the falls required.
12.7.2. Walls or concrete floors shall be thoroughly roughened by picking or other means and cleaned
of all dust, loose laitance, immediately before laying screeds. The surface shall be well wetted, a
slurry of neat cement and water brushed on and the new screed applied while the slurry is still
wet.
12.7.3. Walls shall be hacked and joints of brickwork raked out to a minimum depth of 10mm to form a
proper key for backing screed.
12.8. FIXING
12.8.1. The method of fixing shall be in accordance with the shop drawings and be approved by the
Architect.
12.8.2. The whole of the Works shall be carried out by experienced tradesmen in the best workmanlike
manner for a first class installation.
12.8.3. Before commencing his work, the Contractor shall examine the building and satisfy himself that
the building is fit and proper to receive the marble and granite works.
12.8.4. Work shall not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12.9. CUTTING
12.9.1. All cutting shall be done with a masomy saw as recommended by the marble and granite
supplier or as approved by the Architect.
12.10. SETTING OUT
12.10.1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper and accurate setting out of the Works.
12.10.2. All dimensions shall be verified on site and any discrepancy shall be brought to the Architect's
immediate attention.
12.11. PROTECTION AND CLEANING DOWN
12.11.1. Protect unfixed materials and executed works against weather or damage and staining by other
trades. Particular care must be taken against staining from timbers, oil, wet straw, washing from
steel work or scaffolding and other injurious substances.
12.11.2. The Contractor shall provide temporary covers for all marble or granite before, during and after
completion of the work.
12.11.3. On completion of adjacent building operations, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean down the
completed marble or granite work and attend to any defects in pointing and polishing before
handing over.
12.12. PRICING
12.12.1. The description of each item of marble and granite shall be held to include for all metal
anchorages and necessary brackets, narrow widths, small quantities all straight, raking, mitre or
circular cutting and the subsequent waste, cut edge treatments, laying, pointing and polishing,
provision of sample panels, holes and mortices, temporary rules and battens, cutting and fitting
around air bricks, pipes, columns, balusters and the like.
12.12.2. The rates for backing screed shall be held to include for raking out joints of brickwork and
masonry, hacking concrete to provide a key, removing dust, loose laitance, etc. by any means,
wetting surfaces and cement slurry brushing before application, dubbing out uneven substrate
surfaces, narrow widths and small quantities, temporary rules, all making good and any sundry
items of a like nature.
13. TILER
13.1. TILING
13.1.1. Generally
Homogeneous, ceramic and mosiac tiles shall be obtained from an approved supplier
The contractor shall submit the manufacturer's instruction and recommendations for laying of
tiles, use of mortars, grout, adhesives, etc for the Architect's information
Page 123 of 262

Wall tiling shall be carried out in accordance with B.S 5385, Part 1 & 2.
Floor tiling shall be carried out in accordance with CP 202.
13.1.2. Samples
The contractor shall submit one full size sample of each type of tile and accessory (if any) for
the Architect's approval. All tiles used in the project shall be at least of equal standard to the
approved sample.
For each type of tiling the contractor shall install a control sample, in a location and of a size to
be agreed, in an area of the finished work, in advance of the remainder. When approved this
sample shall set a standard for the remainder of the work and any work not conforming with the
control samples will be rejected.
13.1.3. Allowable Tolerances
i. Wall Tiling - Maximum permissible gap under a 2m edge shall be 3mm or as
recommended by the supplier or approved by the Architect.
ii. Floor Tiling - Maximum permissible gap under a 2m edge shall be 3mm or as
recommended by the supplier or approved by the Architect.
13.1.4. Delivery, Storage and Handling
Handle and store tiles to prevent damage and soiling. Keep in manufacturer's cartons until
required for fixing. The contractor shall ensure that the tiles in each carton for each particular
area are from the same manufacturing date and batch number to ensure consistency of shading.
13.1.5. Environmental Requirements
Illuminate internal surfaces during work and inspection to closely resemble illumination
provided by permanent installation.
13.1.6. Setting Materials
i. Mortar/Slurry: Bedding material shall be 'Mapei' or other approved equivalent mixed to the
proportion all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
ii. Adhesive: Adhesive shall be 'Mapei' or other approved equivalent to B.S 5385: Part 1 or a
type as recommended for the specific purpose by the manufacturer.
13.1.7. Jointing Materials
i. Grout: Grouting or pointing material unless otherwise stated shall be 'Mapei' or other
approved equivalent mixed to the proportion all in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
ii. Sealant: Joint sealants unless otherwise stated shall be either "Thioflex 600", "Pliastic", or
other equal and approved as shown on the drawings or approved by the Architect.
Colour shall match adjacent surfaces and for traffic areas shall have Shore A hardness
greater than 35.
13.1.8. Acceptance of Base
Before fixing the tiles, ensure that background or base is adequately true and level to achieve
the specified tolerances and is adequately prepared and cleaned to give a good bond.
13.1.9. Drying Out
Before fixing tiling ensure that background and base is adequately true and level to achieve the
specified tolerances and is adequately prepared and cleaned to give a good bond.
Before laying tiles ensure that the concrete base has been allowed to dry by exposure to air for
not less than
i. Slab: 4 weeks
ii. Screeds (if any): A further 2 weeks
13.1.10. Setting Out
All setting out points shall follow Architect's drawings
Set out tiling so that cut tiles are kept to the minimum and, where they do occur, are as large as
possible. Locate cuts so that they are inconspicuous as possible.
Wall tiles shall be set out so that joints are horizontal and vertical, horizontal joints m adjacent
walls shall align.
Patterned floor tiles shall be set out square with the axis of the room, with joints lining up.
Perimeter tiles shall not be less than half tile size and of equal size at opposite walls.
13.1.11. Preparation of Surfaces
Where tiles are to be fixed with mortar, thoroughly wet background or base before tiling.
Surfaces where tiles are to be fixed by direct mortar bedding shall be prepared as follows:
i. Concrete: Hack surface to 3mm depth
ii. Brickwork/Blockwork: Rake out joints to 13mm depth
Page 124 of 262
13.1.12. Preparation of Tiles
Tiles to be fixed by mortar shall, unless other recommended by the manufacturer, be immersed
in clean, potable water for 24 hours or until saturated, then stacked lightly together to drain. Lay
as soon as surface water has drained.
13.1.13. Installation Generally
Follow strictly the manufacturer's instructions for all products and materials.
Cut and fix tiling carefully to form a neat closed joint where it abuts frames, other tiling or
around pipes and the like. Open irregular joints filled with mortar or plaster will not be
accepted.
The contractor shall use plastic tile spacer of the specified width to ensure uniformity of joint
widths, and ensure that the bedding mortar/adhesive cover completely the back of the tile.
All completed tiling that are uneven or not level, joints that do not align, or gave a 'hollow'
sound when tapped or quality and workmanship that is not to the satisfaction of the Architect,
shall be rejected. The Contractor shall hack and re-tile at his own expense.
13.1.14. Fixing Wall Tiles with Mortar.
Fill keys and evenly butter the entire back of each tile with the bedding materials to give a
finished thickness generally of at least 6mm. Place tiles using tile spacer and tap firmly into
position.
Fix tiles to give as far as possible, solid bedding under the whole tile and adhesion over the
whole background and tile back.
13.1.15. Fixing Wall Tiles with Adhesive
Apply adhesive to dry (or damp as per manufacturer's instructions) background as a continuous
float. Trowel surface with a notched trowel recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Press
dry tiles firmly onto adhesive with twisting/sliding action. Fix tiles to give as far as possible, a
solid bedding under the whole tile and adhesive over the whole of the background and back of
the tile.
13.1.16. Fixing Floor Tiles with Mortar.
Apply bedding material on screed floor as a continuous float, and trowel surface with a notched
trowel. Press tiles firmly onto bedding with a twisting/sliding action. Fix tiles to give a solid
bedding under the whole tile and bedding material over the whole of the background and back
of the tile.
13.1.17. Fixing of Floor Tiles with Adhesive
Apply adhesive to dry (or damp as per manufacturer's instructions) background as a continuous
float. Trowel surface with a notched trowel recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Press
dry tiles firmly onto adhesive with twisting/sliding action. Fix tiles to give as far as possible, a
solid bedding under the whole tile and adhesive over the whole of the background and back of
the tile.
13.1.18. Jointing and Finishing
Carry out jointing to wall tiling after bedding has sufficiently set to prevent dirturbance of tiles.
Carry out jointing to floor tiling between 16 and 32 hours after laying.
Joints shall be truly aligned and even. Joints shall be of the widths indicated on the drawings, or
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Grouts shall be worked well into the joints so that they are completely filled, to the depth
indicated on the drawings. Finish joints flush or recessed as indicated.
Movement joints shall be located as shown on the drawings and shall carry through the full
depth of the tile and bedding to the structure. Partially fill with filler and finish off with sealant
to manufacturer's recommendations.
13.1.19. Cleaning Off
The grout shall be given sufficient time ( as specified by manufacturer) to set and excess grout
shall be removed from the surface. Any remaining grout should be removed with a damp towel
or sponge. The sponge should be rinsed frequently in clean water, and the process repeated until
the surface is completely cleaned.
13.1.20. Protection
Do not allow water onto new tiling until bedding and jointing have set completely.
Allow no traffic on flooring until 4 days after completion of laying and jointing and only light
traffic for a further l0 days.
13.2. MOSAIC TILES
Page 125 of 262

13.2.1. Mosaic tiles unless otherwise stated shall be first quality tiles from a local manufacturer
approved by the Architecture Consultant. The contractor shall provide samples of tiles for the
approval of the Architecture Consultant.
13.2.2. The mosaic tiles shall be fixed in accordance with the relevant specification for ceramic tiling in
this Section, and with the following:
13.2.3. Tiles, or paper-mounted oanels of tiles, are to be bedded on a prepared level screed in cement
and sand (I :3) and level. The paving is to be cleaned immediately to remove all mortar from the
surface of the tiles.
13.2.4. Tiles are to be set out symmetrically with in each area and laid to regular line and pattern
required. Tiles in patterned mounted panels are to be adjusted as necessary as margin of paving
to avoid a broken pattern and to reduce cutting. Cutting is to be neatly carried out. Joints
between adjacent panels of tiles are to match those between individuals tiles. Unless otherwise
specified, the edge row of tiles against walls is to be tiled at an angle of 45 degrees to form a
small splayed internal angle, and the screed or bedding is to be dubbed out to receive this.
13.2.5. Clean off dirt, stains etc and make good and/or replace damaged and defective tiles and polish to
an approved finish.
13.2.6. Tile skirting of the same material with angle tile at the base is to be provided where indicated in
the drawings.
13.3. QUARRY TILES
13.3.1. Quarry tiles unless otherwise stated shall be obtained from approved local manufacturer.
13.3.2. The specification for ceramic tiles in this section shall equally apply here except quaryy tiles
finish is to floors.
13.4. DIVIDING STRIPS
13.4.1. Provide and lay dividing strip as specified, flushed with the floor finishes between finishes of
different materials or as directed by the Architect.
13.4.2. Dividing strips shall be indented, perforated or deep scratched, or any other approved means for
key and shall be laid to accurate line and level.
13.5. PREAMBLES
13.5.1. The rate for each item of "Tiler" shall be held to include for finishing tiling above suspended
ceiling line, narrow widths and small quantities, patterns, borders, junctions etc and fitting
around pipes and other sundry items of a like nature.
14. PAVIOR
14.1. CEMENT PAVING

14.1.1. Paving shall be laid generally in accordance with B.S CP 204. Maximum tolerance under a 3m
straight edge shall be 3mm.
14.1.2. Cement paving unless otherwise stated shall consist of cement and sand (I :3) to the thickness
specified, laid in alternate bays to match joints of concrete sub-floor or otherwise in alternate
bays of not more than 3.6 meter square; in either case timber battens shall be used to define each
bay.
14.1.3. Paving shall, unless otherwise stated, be brought to a smooth and even finish with a steel trowel.
14.1.4. Concrete slab to receive paving shall be well cleaned and wetted and a neat cement grout
applied immediately before laying the paving.
14.1.5. Where fall is necessary this shall be achieved by varying the thickness from one end to another,
but minimum thickness shall not be less than 13mm at the thinner end.
14.1.6. Where coloured paving is specified, coloured cement shall be used in the mix in lieu of Ordinary
Portland Cement. The sprinkling of coloured compound over the surface of unset cement paving
will not be permitted.
14.1.7. Excessive trowelling shall be avoided to prevent laitance from being brought up to the surface.
Paving shall be kept damp and free from heavy traffic for at least seven days. Damp curing shall
be carried out by covering the paving with wet sand, saw dust or gunny sacks.
14.1.8. Where described surfaces shall be treated with an approved proprietary floor hardener applied in
Page 126 of 262

14.1.9. Cement skirtings are to be formed in cement and sand (1:3) to the height and profile specified,
and are to be trowelled smooth. For flush skirtings a 13mm wide V-joint is to be formed at the
junction with the plaster over. Projecting skirtings are to be flushed with a rounded top edge. All
skirtings are to have a 13mm diameter cove at the junction with the paving.
14.1.10. Mitred angles, stop ends etc are to be neatly formed.
14.1.11. Coloured cement skirting are to be coloured as described above for paving.
14.2. SCREEDS AND BACKINGS
14.2.1. Screeds and backings to receive tiles and other finishes unless otherwise stated shall be
composed of one part cement to three parts of sand by volume, finished even and true to exact
line, level or falls required.
14.2.2. Screeds shall comply with the requirements for cement pavings in this section. Backings shall
comply with the requirements for plastering in this section.
14.2.3. Screeds and backings to receive tiles or stones bedded bedded in mortar shall be scratched to
form a key. Where adhesive is used for fixing, the screed shall be steel trowelled to a smooth
and even surface, unless otherwise stated. The water content of the screed mix shall be the
minimum required to give workability.
14.2.4. Waterproofed screeds shall have an approved waterproofing agent added, used strictly in
14.2.5. No moisture sensitive floor finish shall be laid unless a reliable moisture test shows the screed is
sufficiently dry to receive the covering.
14.2.6. Any defective screed shall be cut out and made good in such time as to allow a sufficient
interval for drying out prior to the scheduled laying of the floor covering.
14.3. GRANOLITHIC PAVING
14.3.1. Granolithic paving shall be laid in accordance with the general requirements for cement paving
in this section.
14.3.2. Aggregate shall be granite chippings. Aggregates shall comply with B.S 882 and 1201:Part 2.
The mix of granolithic paving shall comprise one part of Portland Cement to one part sand and
two parts selected aggregate (graded 10mm - 5mm and free from dust). Water content shall be
kept to the minimum compatible with workability. Paving shall be initially struck off and
finished with a wood float, followed by at least two finishing operations with a hand or power
operated steel float to product a dense smooth surface.
14.3.3. Finish surfaces shall be treated with silicate floride based concrete hardener/dust proofer or
other approved anti-dust solution in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
14.3.4. Where indicated, non slip inserts of carborundum strips or other approved material shall be
provided.
14.3.5. Skirting shall be as described for cement paving skirting.
14.4. WASHED AGGREGATES PAVINGS
14.4.1. Washed aggregates pavings shall be laid in accordance with the general requirements for
Shanghai Plaster under section PLASTERER
14.4.2. WATERPROOF SCREED/RENDERING
14.4.3. Refer to Roofer Section of this Specification
14.5. IN-SITU TERRAZZO PAVING
14.5.1. Generally
Terrazzo shall compose one part of coloured cement to two and a half parts of approved marble
chippings evenly graded from 12, or composition as approved by the Architect.
Paving shall not be less than 19mm thick laid in squares between division strips. Terrazzo shall
be well tamped into position, rolled and trowelled; when set sufficiently hard it shall be
grounded to expose the aggregate, voids shall be grouted with coloured cement and when
finally, dry and hard the paving shall be cleaned off with fine carborandum.
Paving shall be damp-cured for at seven (7) days after laying by covering with sand or gunny
sacks kept wet or by other approved means.
All flooring shall be polished to the Architect's approval.
14.5.2. Skirting
Page 127 of 262

In-situ terrazzo skirting where required shall be terrazzo as described for paving and finished
similarly. The maximum size of the aggregate shall be reduced where necessary for this section.
Skirtings shall be of the height and profile specified. On flush skirtings a 12mm wide 'V' joint
shall be formed at the junction with the plaster over; projecting skirting shall be finished with a
rounded top edge. Skirtings over terrazzo paving shall have 64mm diameter cove at junction
with the paving.
All mitre angles, stopped ends etc shall be neatly formed.
14.6. PREAMBLES
14.6.1. The rate for each item of paving and screeds shall be held to include preparation of base and
providing cement slurry or bonding agent.
14.6.2. The rate for each item of "pavior" shall be held to include for all rounded edges, arrises, working
and dishing round pipes, all straight, raking or circular cutting and subsequent waste, temporary
rules, making good and any other sundry items of a like nature, and grading to floor outlets and
the like
14.6.3. The rate for each item of skirtings, risers, angles, openings, moulded or rounded edges, channels
and the like, shall be held to include for all short lengths, formed, cut and purpose made angles,
junctions, ends and making good, and any other sundry items of a like nature.
15. ALUMINIUM WORKS
15.1. CODES OF PRACTICE

15.1.1. Aluminium works shall comply with the requirements ofCP 118, subject to any qualification
given hereunder.
15.1.2. Aluminium works shall be undertaken by specialist experienced at working in accordance with
the relevant Codes of Practice.
15.2. WORK TO CONFORM TO DRAWINGS
15.2.1. All items of work shall conform to the overall sizes, designs and details shown on the drawigs.
All aluminium units supplied under this Contract shall be fabricated to the best standard of
workmanship under experienced factory supervision and control and shall be completed with all
accessories. All members/sections shall be stout and strong enough for the purpose for which
they are intended to be used.
15.2.2. Unless otherwise stated or shown in the Contract Drawings, the contractor shall provide shop
drawings giving complete details of the type, section, sizes, gauge thickness, type of finish, etc.
of the aluminium units to be supplied.
15.2.3. Details of coupling members for composite units, full glazing instructions and method of fixing
and anchoring to be employed must also be given.
15.2.4. All openable parts of each unit shall have weatherstripping or seal made from materials that do
not react with aluminium and such that any shrinking, warping or adherence to sliding or closing
surfaces shall not impair the performance of the openable part.
15.2.5. The weatherstripping or seal shall be capable of being renewed without disturbing the glazing
system and without having to remove the outer frame from the structure.
15.2.6. All dimensions shall be verified before fabrication. Complete shop drawings of all works to be
finished shall be submitted to the SO for approval prior to factory fabrication.
15.3. SAMPLES
15.3.1. Samples of all aluminium sections, sheets etc shall be submitted to the SO for approval before
work is commenced. Only approval, the samples shall indicate the minimum standard to be
maintained for all subsequent works.
15.4. PROTECTION OF ALUMINIUM FRAMES
15.4.1. The contractor shall be responsible for protecting the Works against damage, abrasion, staining,
etc.
15.4.2. All exposed aluminium work shall be protected by protective plastic tape or grease during
erection. After installation, all exposed aluminium surfaces shall be protected against damage by
staining, abrasion, wet cement and other injuries until the work is handed over.
Page 128 of 262

15.5. CLEANING ON COMPLETION OF WORKS
15.5.1. On completion of the Works, all protective material shall be removed and all work thoroughtly
cleaned with water and detergent. No abrasive agent shall be used. Any defective or damaged
parts shall be immediately replaced all at the contractor's own expense.
15.6. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALUMINIUM WORKS
15.6.1. All aluminium material shall be free from defects that may impair strength durability or
appearance, and shall be adequate in every way for their purpose. Surfaces shall be clean,
straight and true with sharp defined profiles and smooth finish. All sections, sheets, etc shall be
free from bends or waves or other imperfections, true and straight vertically and horizontally
with arrises, profiles, etc true and sharp.
15.6.2. Where aluminium doors, partitions, window frames and other aluminium components are shown
in the drawings, they shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy B6063-T5 complying with the
requirements of BS 1474, with the components made up of extruded and pressed sections.
15.6.3. The external surfaces of all extruded and pressed sections shall be etched and electrolytically
anodised to a natural matt finish in compliance with the provisions of BS 1615 and the anodic
film thickness of the finished product.
15.6.4. The contractor shall submit a certificate from the manufacturer of the aluminium extrusions
certifying the BS grade designation and thickness of the anodic coatings for each batch of
extrusions delivered.
15.6.5. The structural elements of the doors, partitions and window frames including the joints,
fasteners, etc shall be of such form, thickness and extruded geometrical sections as to possess
adequate stiffness to withstand wind loading of not less than 575N/mm2.
15.7. ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, DOORS AND SCREENS
15.7.1. All windows, screens and doors shall be designed using approved sections structurally sound
and fit for the purpose intended and provided in accordance with the schedules and details
shown on the drawings.
15.7.2. Unless otherwise indicated, all windows, screens fixed panels and doors shall be constructed
aluminium sections and sheets of minimum sizes and gauge as per the samples submitted and
approved by the SO.
15.7.3. Frames shall be square and flat and shall be constructed of sections cut to length, corners mitred
and electrically welded and then cleaned to obtain a smooth surface. All joints and mitres shall
be carefully and accurately assembled and machined so as to provide close smooth connections
that will not be noticeable. Screws and bolt heads shall be concealed wherever possible and
countersunk finished flush with exposed surfaces.
15.7.4. All openable windows are to be provided approved quality PVC weather strip all round. The
contractor shall also provide necessary flashing around openings to ensure proper fixing of
aluminium units.
15.7.5. Drainage holes shall be provided to all framing section wherever necessary to discharge any
water that may have accumulate through seepage into frames. All drainage shall be provided at
location approved by the SO.
15.8. ALUMINIUM GRAVITY SHUTTERS
15.8.1. Aluminium gravity shutters shall be of the size, type and pattern selected and shall be obtained
from an approved manufacturer.
15.8.2. The shutters shall be supplied complete with all operating gear, casings, channels, brackets and
all hardward and accessories, and fixed at locations shown on the drawings all in accordance
with the manufacturer's specifications.
15.9. METAL STRIP CEILING LININGS
15.9.1. Metal strip ceiling linings shall be the proprietary system described or shown in the drawings.
Ceiling shall be to the profile and colour selected by the SO.
15.9.2. The metal strip ceilings shall be installed on a metal hangar system complete with all necessary
edge trims and accessories to the manufacturer's fixing details. Additional hangers shall be
provided where luminaries or integrated ceiling fittings are incorporated into the ceiling.
Page 129 of 262

15.9.3. The ceiling height required shall be clearly marked and approved by the SO prior to installation.
Form changes in levels or curves to ceilings in accordance to the manufacturer's details.
15.9.4. Provide standard manufacturer's access hatch of 600 x 600mm or of size as shown in the
drawings unless otherwise stated.
15.10. ALUMINIUM SKIRTINGS
15.10.1. Aluminium skirtings shall be approved aluminium alloy extrusions conforming to BS 1474.
Sections shall be clean, straight with sharply defined lines and shall be to the profile,
dimenstions and strength to suit its various purposes. All exposed aluminium members shall be
natural anodised finished. The anodic coating shall be minimum 10 microns thick.
15.11. FINISHES
15.11.1. Unless otherwise described or shown in the Drawings, all aluminium surfaces shall be 'Natural
Anodised' Satin matt aluminium finish.
15.12. FIXING
15.12.1. All aluminium units shall be properly fixed and installed in the positions shown with all
necessary lugs, straps, brackets, etc bedding with and including 'neoprene' gaskets where
required and everything else necessary for the prope fixing of the units all in accordance with
the details as shown in the drawings.
15.12.2. Wherever required, frames shall be solidly bedded with waterproofed cement and sand (1:3)
mortar or other approved grouting material to ensure watertightness.
15.12.3. Back of frames shall be painted with one coat bituminous paint before fixing.
15.12.4. Where couplings are made, either direct or with mullions or transomes, joints must be bedded
with silicone sealant to render them watertight. Couplings shall also be sealed with good quality
silicone sealant.
15.12.5. Fixing frames, straps, built-in lugs, brackets etc shall be of galvanised mild steel and of the
appropriate gauge and size strong enough for this purpose. Unless otherwise stated, they shall be
treated with rust-proofing primer to render them rust proof.
15.13. FITTINGS
15.13.1. Fittings for swing doors shall be as follows: -
i. Single/double action floor spring with stainless steel cover plate shall be fitted
ii. Concealed bolts shall be provided at top and bottom of first closing leaf.
iii. Double cylinder deadlock of the specified brand shall be mortised into door style each
leaf of door to be fitted with 2 nos aluminium push/pull handles (of a design to be
approed by the SO) of the same finish as the aluminium sections.
iv. Each lock must be provided with three (3) keys.
15.14. FITTINGS FOR HINGED DOORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: -
i. Single action floor springs with stainless steel cover plate.
ii. Concealed bolts; top and bottom of first closing leaf.
iii. Double cylinder deadlock mortised into door style.
iv. Each lock must be provided with three (3) keys.
v. Each leaf of door to be fitted with 2 nos aluminium push/pull handles (of a design to be
approved by the SO) of the same finish as the aluminium sections.
15.15. FITTINGS FOR SLIDING DOORS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:-
i. Horizontal sliding leaves to run on adjustable steel rollers fitted with stainless srteel ball base in
the sill sect
ii. Nylon head guides to ensure easy and smooth mobility of the sliding leaves.
iii. Woven piles, density-silicone treated weather strip around perimeter of the leaves for weather-
proofing and to ensure smooth operation.
iv. Doors to be fitted with approved pin lock or deadlock operated from inside.
v. The styles of the sliding panels to have a continuous extruded finger pull incorporated and the
sliding panels are fitted with cill bolts housing a stainless steel shoot, locking the sliding panels
together both closed and partially opened positions.
Page 130 of 262

15.16. FITTINGS FOR PROJECTED TOP HUNG WINDOW LIGHT SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:-
15.16.1. Each window/light is to be hung on extruded aluminium butt hinges and are to be provided with
a set of interlocking friction stay (strong enough to withstand any wind action), l no. budget lock
and 1 no. pull handle of brass of the same finish as the aluminium frames (capable of turning
down to lock).
15.16.2. All ironmongery and fittings shall be of the approved brand and quality. Samples of each item of
ironmongery or fittings used in the work shall be submitted to the SO for approval.
15.17. STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR ALUMINIUM SECTION
15.17.1. All units shall be designed to withstand loads resulting from:-
i. Wind pressure 87 km/h
ii. Dead loads of infill panels, etc
iii. Live loads that may be imposed, and
iv. Deflection factor 1/200
15.18. POWDER COATING OF ALUMINIUM
15.18.1. The criteria and performance features of powder coated aluminium shall conform to BS6496.
15.18.2. The aluminium shall be adequately cleaned to remove all oxides, residual organic or inorganic
soils, etc prior to powder coating.
15.18.3. The metal coated surface shall be continuous and free of damage, even in colour, gloss and it
shall also be free of visible blisters, craters, pinholes, and scratches.
15.18.4. Performance test and quality assurance shall conform to BS3900
15.19. GUARANTEE
15.19.1. The contractor shall guarantee the whole of the completed aluminium works, for a period of Ten
(10) years in respect of the following:-
i. Against colour fading in aluminium, and
ii. Against water leakages in the glazing and as a result of poor design and faulty
workmanship and in the installation of the frames (i.e. heads, mullions, transomes, cill etc.)
15.19.2. The guarantee shall be made in favour of the employer and shall commence upon the practical
completion of the whole building as certified by the SO.
15.19.3. Within the specified Guarantee Period, the contractor shall replace at his own expense all items
of the works which are found to be defective or faulty, and shall be responsible for making good
and reinstating any damage caused to the adjacent property of the Employer and tenants due to
commissioning of the rectification to the defective works.
15.20. PREAMBLES
15.20.1. The rate for each item of doors, windows, etc. shall be held to include for eccentric positioning
of hinges, etc.
15.20.2. The rate for each item of doors, windows, etc. shall be held to include for cutting, notching,
boring, fitting, trimming, mitreing, dovetailing mechanical cleats or electrical welding etc. and
all ends, splayed edges, short lengths and temporary supports, rebating for plaster and other
items of a like nature.
15.20.3. The rate for each item of doors, windows, etc. shall be held to include for all fixtures, screws,
nuts, bolts, rivets and other attachments and the application of anti-corrosive and anti-bi-metal
chemical reaction paints where required and pressure grouting with water-proof cement and
sand filling and caulking and pointing with approved tropical mastic where required.
16. GLAZING
16.1. GLASS GENERALLY

16.1.1. Glass unless otherwise stated shall be 'Malaysian Sheet Glass' or other approved equivalent and
is to comply with BS 952. It shall be free from blemshes, bubbles, waves and other defects.
Samples of all glasses shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before ordering.
16.1.2. Toughened (tempered) glass shall be factory supplied in the panel size required complete with
Heat Soak Test Process (proof of testing required). It must not be cut or worked on site.
Page 131 of 262

16.1.3. Deliver glass with factory labels attached. Stack glass in near vertical position (A-frames) on
timber, felt or other resilient edge strips. Keep glass clean and dry during delivery and storage.
16.1.4. Take site dimension before cutting glass. Cut accurately to size leaving a clearance of
approximately 3/16" (4.7mm) all round. Edges of panes shall be clean cut and free from
imperfections.
16.1.5. External glazing shall be wind and watertight on completion.
16.2. PUTTY
16.2.1. Glazing to wood shall be with best quality linseed oilputty to BS 544, consisting of whiting
thoroughtly ground with boiled linseed oil to form a smooth paste.
16.2.2. Glazing to metal shall be approved proprietary mastic, preformed mastic strip or neoprene
gaskets as appropriate.
16.2.3. Wood rebates are to be primed before puttying. No putty is to be painted until 14 days after
glazing
16.3. FLOAT GLASS
16.3.1. Clear glass for glazing generally shall be float glass.
16.4. SHEET GLASS
16.4.1. Clear sheet glass shall be of 'Selected Glazing Quality' (SGQ)
16.5. OBSCURE GLASS
16.5.1. Obscure glass shall be plain rolled. Sand blasted and to be cut and glazed so that the direction
and face of the pattern is the same throughout. Fix panes with patterned side inside, unless
otherwise described.
16.6. WIRED GLASS
16.6.1. Wired glass unless otherwise stated shall be Georgian wired and where required to be 'lined up',
it is to be cut so that the wire in adjacent panes line up both horizontally and vertically, within
the limit of manufacture.
16.7. TINTED FLOAT GLASS
16.7.1. Tinted float glass shall be body tinted transparent glass of the specified thickness
16.8. LOURVE BLADES
16.8.1. Glass lourve blades are to have all arrises ground down smooth and shall be from an approved
manufacturer.
16.9. LAMINATED AND TEMPERED GLASS
16.9.1. Laminated and tempered glass shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the Architect.
16.10. GLAZING GENERALLY
16.10.1. Glazing shall comply with the requirements of CP 152.
16.10.2. Use pvc or neoprene setting blocks and spacers for all panes exceeding 0.2m2. Ensure edge
clearance tolerances, provision for expansion etc. are in accordance with good glazing practice
and where relevant in accordacne with the particular manufacturer's instructions.
16.11. GLAZING WITHOUT BEADS.
16.11.1. Glass shall be well bedded and back puttied, and secured with springs (to wood) or glazing clips
(to metal). Front putty is to be neatly finished to stop 1.6mm from the sight line of the rebate.
Strip off surplus back putty and finish to a straight line.
16.12. GLAZING WITH BEADS
16.12.1. Unless a bedding strip is used, glass shall be well bedded and back puttied.
16.12.2. Where bedding strip is specified, this shall be of proprietary mastic tape, folded around the edge
of the glass.
16.13. MIRRORS
Page 132 of 262

16.13.1. Mirrors shall be of first quality polished plate glass and shall be fixed with chromium plated
dome-headed screws. Do not distort during tightening of screws and use spacer washers to
compensate for irregularities in wall surface.
16.14. CLEANING ON COMPLETION
16.14.1. On completion glass shall be cleaned both sides, any smears and excess putty removed and any
broken, cracked or defective pane shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect.
16.15. PREAMBLE
16.15.1. Glazing shall include for all raking and circular cuttings, waste, risks of breakage, cleaning all
glass inside and outside, replacing all cracked, scratched or broken panes and leaving in good
condition on completion.
16.15.2. The rates for glazing shall include:
i. setting blocks, distance pieces and like accessories for fixing
ii. drilliing fixing holes and the like in glass
iii. cleaning off protective wax or tape in glazing rebates 1v gasket and glazing
compounds.
iv. additional costs involved in using sheets which are larger than the manuracturer's
standard stock sizes.
v. cleaning
17. SANITARY FITTINGS
17.1. GENERAL
17.1.1. Sanitary fittings and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and make all necessary connections. Any fittings and accessories damaged during
installation shall be replaced at Contractor's own expense.
17.2. PROTECTION
17.2.1. The Contractor shall take every precautions in protecting the various sanitary fittings and
accessories installed and wrap every fittings with building paper or approved method to ensure
the fittings are not used during the progress of work.
17.2.2. Just before completion of work, remove all protective wrapping and clean all surfaces for
handing over.
17.3. TESTING
17.3.1. The fittings shall be tested to the satisfaction of the S.O. and local Authorities, make good all
defects and leave everything in perfect working order.
18. PAINTER
18.1. GENERAL
18.1.1. All painting works shall be executed by trained and approved applicators. The Contractor shall
guarantee and provide warranty against the performance of both the materials and workmanship
for 5 years form the date of Practical Completion.
18.1.2. The Contractor shall upon notification and within a reasonable period as stipulated in the
guarantee, rectify and make good any defects in materials and/or faulty workmanship during the
tenancy of the five (5) years guarantee. All expenses incurred by such rectification work shall be
carried out and borne by the Contractor.
18.1.3. All materials shall be of approved manufacture suitable for the particular purpose for which to
be used, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
18.1.4. Generally, all paints unless otherwise stated shall be the "Nippon" range as manufactured by
"Nippon" or other equal and approved.
18.1.5. All materials for multiple coat work, e.g. priming, undercoat and finishing coat shall be obtained
from the same manufacturer, and shall be those recommended by the manufacturer as suitable
for use together and for the surfaces concerned.
Page 133 of 262

18.1.6. All materials shall be delivered to the site fresh and in the original sealed containers, bearing the
manufacturer's name. The containers shall be clearly marked with a description of the contents.
18.1.7. All materials shall be stored on the Works, and precautions taken to mm1m1se exposure to high
temperatures.
18.1.8. Manufacturer's samples of all materials shall be deposited in sealed containers with the
Architect, at the Contractor's expense, for the approval before bulk deliveries and before
commencement of any painting.
18.1.9. During the execution of the work, further samples of all or any of the materials may be taken by
the Architect, and the Contractor shall provide the containers with necessary seals and all
samples at his own expense. The samples may be taken from sealed or open containers or from
the workmen's pails as the work proceeds.
18.1.10. All materials for paint and film finishes may be subjected to tests, including, but not limited to
the following :-
i. fading and colour fastness
ii. beading and scratching resistance
iii. oxidation, weathering and accelerated weathering
iv. resistance to mould, fungus and algae
v. application and self-levelling properties
vi. pigment content and fineness of grind
vii. chemical analysis (particularly anti-corrosive paints)
18.1.11. Samples for testing shall be supplied without charge. The costs of testing shall be borne by the
Contractor, should the product fail the test.
18.1.12. The Contractor shall allow for applying a test colour patch over the appropriate undercoat of the
various surfaces specified to be coated, and for obtaining the Architect's approval before
proceeding with the painting work.
18.1.13. Colours shall be selected from the British Standard range of colours or from the manufacturer's
standard range of colours or shall be specially mixed or milled as necessary by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall allow for any such special mixing or milling.
18.1.14. Any work executed with material found on test not to fulfil the necessary requirements, shall be
burnt off, or otherwise removed and made good.
18.1.15. The mixing of paints of different types or from different manufacturers shall not be permitted.
18.1.16. No internal or external work shall be carried out in wet or excessively humid weather, or on
surfaces which are not thoroughly dry.
18.1.17. All decorative finishes shall be applied with proper brushes. The use of coarse brushes and rage
is prohibited.
18.1.18. Unless otherwise instructed by the Architect, all materials shall be evenly spread and shall be
finished uniform in colour, free from runs, brush marks or roller marks to a high gloss finish.
Each coat, prior to the finishing coat, including sealer, primers, etc. shall be properly rubbed
down with pumice, steel wool, glass paper, emery paper waterproof garnet paper or cutting
compound, whichever is the most suitable for the particular surface, to produce the highest
quality finish. Wherever practicable, rubbing shall be wet, using one of the above in the
combination with water, lime water, turpentine or benzine.
18.1.19. The Contractor shall allow the minimum drying time between coats as recommended by the
manufacturer.
18.1.20. Floors and other work and fittings shall be properly covered up and protected, and painting pots,
etc. shall not be placed on impervious coverings, window cills etc.
18.1.21. Primed or undercoated woodwork or metalwork shall not be left for an undue period before
completing the painting process. All coats of paint shall be thoroughly dry and rubbed down
with fine glass paper, where necessary and dusted off before each subsequent coat is applied.
18.1.22. The Contractor shall allow for painting walls or panels in different tints or colours, as samples.
Subsequent work shall be identical to the samples of colours approved by the Architect.
18.1.23. The number of coats indicated shall be in addition to the sealer or priming coat. Each undercoat
shall be in a visibly different tint from the preceeding coat and colour to suit the finished coat.
18.1.24. Where the number of coats specified does not result in a uniformly solid appearance, and is due
to the faulty materials or application, the Contractor shall be required to apply further coats to
provide satisfactory appearance, entirely at his own expense.
Page 134 of 262

18.1.25. Where in the opinion of the Architect, such faulty appearance is due solely to the selection of the
colour, the Contractor shall refer to the Architect and await his instructions before proceeding
with further coats.
18.1.26. No painting work shall be carried out before the work of all other trades has been substantially
completed, and the areas conditions shall be maintained during all painting work.
18.2. PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
18.2.1. Concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly washed down to remove all traces of mould oil or any
other materials harmful to paint.
18.2.2. The surfaces shall be rubbed down with a carborundum stone to remove loose particles, nibs,
efflorescence, etc. Surfaces shall be efflorescence has ceased.
18.2.3. All holes and imperfections shall be made good with cement grout as directed or with approved
appropriate filling.
18.3. PREPARATION OF PLASTERED SURFACES
18.3.1. Plastered surfaces shall be allowed to dry out for as long as practicable. All dust, dirt, plaster
splashes or efflorescence shall be brushed off or removed by wiping first with a dry coarse cloth
and then with a damp cloth. The surface shall then be left for 48 hours to ascertain whether
efflorescence has ceased.
18.3.2. All cracks, holes, crevices etc shall be filled with an approved filler before the commencement
of painting.
18.4. EXTERNAL PAINTING TO CONCRETE OR PLASTERED SURFACES
18.4.1. The external painting to concrete or plastered surfaces unless otherwise stated shall be one coat
of Alkali Resisting Primer sealer coat or other equal and approved and shall be brush applied
and allowed to dry for 1 or 2 hours, and two coats of Acrylic Exterior Wall Finish or other equal
and approved. A minimum of 1 hour drying time shall be allowed between coats; unless
otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.5. INTERNAL PAINTING TO CONCRETE OR PLASTERED SURFACES
18.5.1. The internal painting to concrete or plastered surfaces unless otherwise stated shall be one coat
Alkali Resisting Primer sealer coat and shall be brush applied and allowed to dry for 1 or 2
hours, and two coats of finishing coat brush applied and allowing one hour between coats;
unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.6. PREPARATION AND PAINTING TO FAIR FACED BRICKWORK
18.6.1. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by a stiff bristled brush and all dirt and loose particles
shall be removed. Cleaning solutions containing wetting agents and detergents should not be
used. All cracks and joints shall be sealed.
18.6.2. The painting to fair face brickwork unless otherwise stated shall be 2 coats Silicone Water
Repellent Sealer (Clear Finish) or other equal and approved and shall be generously brush or
spray applied onto the well prepared, clean and dry surface.
18.6.3. Silicone Water Repellent Sealer shall be applied in good dry weather condition, preferably when
the chances of rain are unlikely for the next several hours; unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.7. PREPARATION AND PAINTING TO FERROUS SURFACES
18.7.1. Ferrous surfaces unless otherwise stated shall be thoroughly cleaned down to remove all dirt,
grease, etc. and all rust and scale shall be entirely removed by chipping, scraping or wire-
brushing and a perfectly clean surface obtained. Immediately after preparation, the surface shall
be brush applied with one coat of Red Oxide Primer and allowed to dry for 5 hours and then
applied with one coat of undercoat and allowing overnight drying and 2 coats of Gloss Finish or
other equal and approved allowing 16 hours between coats; unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.8. PREPARATION AND PAINTING TO NON-FERROUS AND GALVANISED SURFACES
18.8.1. Non-ferrous and galvanised surfaces unless otherwise stated shall be thoroughly cleaned down
and degreased with lacquer thinner or white spirit or equivalent solvent. Surface shall then be
roughened by lightly rubbing down with steel wool, a wire brush or abrasive paper and cleaned
down. Where required, damaged areas shall be made good with an approved cold galvanising
Page 135 of 262
paint. Immediately after preparation the surfaces shall be brush applied with one coat of Wash
Primer, and allowed to dry for 5 hours and then applied with one coat of red oxide/cromoprimer
and allowing overnight drying and 2 coats of Enamel Finish allowing 16 hours between coats;
unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.9. PREPARATION AND PAINTING TO TIMBER SURFACES
18.9.1. Woodwork unless otherwise stated shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt, grease, etc.
sanded down to a smooth even surface and dusted off. All cracks, crevices, and holes shall be
scraped out, primed and made good with approved hard stopping, faced up and rubbed down to
an even surface. All knots, gum veins, and resin streaks in woodwork shall be treated with
knotting to prevent bleeding.
18.10. PREPARATION AND PAINTING TO TIMBER SURFACES (Cont'd)
18.10.1. Large or loose-knots shall be cut and replaced with sound wood or cut back and the surface
made good with "Necol" Plastic Wood or other equal and approved wood filler. Smaller knots
shall be treated with two thin coats of knotting. Open grain shall be surface filled. The surfaces
shall then be brush applied with one coat Aluminium Wood Primer Sealer or other equal and
approved, allowing overnight drying and one coat of Undercoat or other equal and approved,
allowing 6 hours drying and 2 coats of Gloss Finish or other equal and approved, allowing 16
hours between coats; unless otherwise stated.
18.10.2. NOTWITHSTANDING the distinction made in the Architect's Drawings, the words "stained,
varnished and lacquered", "stained lacquered" and "stained" finish shall mean two coats of stain
and two coats of clear catalystic lacquer to a fine furniture finish or natural finish to the
satisfaction of the Architect and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
18.10.3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, "Ramin" timber shall be painted with light oil stain to
match colouration of design sample and shall be sealed with multiple coats of clear flat sealer
and sanded between coats. Final finish shall be natural finish to match design sample or
powdery finish.
18.10.4. The exposed timber framing and backs of wood frames built in contact with masonary shall be
painted with two coats wood preservative.
18.10.5. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all internal surfaces of timber cupboards, cabinets and
drawer base where visible when open, shall be finished with "Melamine" and applied securely
with a patent adhesive used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
18.11. VARNISHING AND CLEAR FINISH TO TIMBER SURFACES
18.11.1. Timber which is to be varnished or clear finish shall be carefully sanded down with a fine grade
abrasive paper along the wood grains and prepared generally in accordance with the foregoing
Clause for timber surfaces.
18.11.2. The surfaces shall then be brushed applied with 2 coats of Spontan Varnish Gloss or other equal
and approved, thinned with 10% of Thinner No. 7 or other equal and approved, allowing 6 hours
drying time and one finishing coat of Spontan Varnish Satin or other equal and approved
according to the required degree of gloss or satin finish; unless otherwise stated elsewhere.
18.12. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
18.12.1. Before the commencement of any work, adjoining areas which are not to be painted, or have
been already painted, shall be properly protected.
18.12.2. Any finish or work which is stained or damaged by the painting shall be cleaned and made good
by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Architect, entirely at the Contractor's own expense.
18.12.3. The whole of the work shall be left in a clean condition on completion, and all runs, splashes,
etc cleaned off to the Architect's satisfaction.
18.13. PAPER HANGER
18.13.1. Adhesive
Manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer and sealer, manufactured expressly for use with
the selected vinyl/fabric/suede coverings. Provide materials which are mildew and alkali-
resistant and non-staining to the vinyl/fabric/suede coverings.
18.13.2. Execution
Inspection
Page 136 of 262
Before installation commences, substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under
which work is to be installed shall be examined. Work shall not be proceeded until
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been
corrected.
Preparation
i. Dust on surfaces to receive vinyl/fabric/suede coverings shall be removed and surfaces
shall be thoroughly cleaned.
ii. Vinyl/fabric/suede covering materials shall only be removed from its packaging and
allowed to acclimatize to the area of installation 24 hours before application.
iii. All switchplates, wall plates, hardware, electrical fixtures and all surface-mounted fixtures
and accessories where vinyl/fabric/suede covering are to be applied shall be removed.
iv. Substrates shall be primed and sealed in accordance with the vinyl/ fabric/ suede coverings
manufacturer's recommendations for the type of substrate materials to be covered.
Installation
i. Vinyl/fabric/suede coverings panels shall be placed consecutively in the order they are cut
form the roll, including filling of spaces above or below openings. Hang by reversing
alternate strips except on match patterns.
ii. Adhesive shall be applied to back to vinyl/fabric/suede coverings and placed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
iii. For vinyl/fabric/suede coverings to wall, install seams vertically and plumb and at least
150mm away from the comers. Horizontal seams will not be permitted. Place wall
coverings continuously over internal and external comers.
iv. Seams shall be overlapped and double-cut to assure tight closure. Roll, brush or use a broad
knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters or other defects. Cut vinyl/fabric/suede
coverings evenly to the edges of the outlet box or support.
v. Selvages shall be trimmed as required to assure colour uniformity and pattern match at
seams.
vi. Excess adhesive along finished seams shall be removed using warm water and a clean
sponge, and wiped dry.
vii. Vinyl/fabric/suede coverings shall be installed in largest practical pieces, with an intimate
substrate bond, smooth, clean, without wrinkles, gaps and overlaps.
viii. The removed plates and fixtures shall be reinstated to verify cut edges of vinyl/fabric/suede
coverings are completely concealed.
18.14. PREAMBLES
18.14.1. The rate for each item of "Painter" shall be held to include for cutting to line, and for painting in
different tints from wall to wall or room to room.
18.14.2. The rate for each item of "Painter" to piping and handrails etc shall be held to include for
painting all fittings, clips, brackets, ground, etc.
18.14.3. The rate for each item of sprayed finish shall be held to include for forming grooves or panel
joints.
19. WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
19.1. GENERAL
19.1.1. The waterproofing system shall be approved system complete with protective coating. It is
applied to concrete and mortar to prevent water infiltration; all scope of work done strictly by
approved and authorised applicator; all in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions and recommendations.
19.1.2. The waterproofing system shall be able to be used for positive and negative side waterproofing,
sealing side waterproofing, sealing of hair line cracks and as a protective coating against
aggressive elements such as carbon dioxide (e.g. in concrete repair work), frost and de-icing
agents.
19.1.3. Areas to be applied unless otherwise stated shall be generally to:
i. bathroom floors and walls (to a height of 0.3m and 1.50m);
ii. wet kitchen;
iii. reinforced concrete gutter;
Page 137 of 262

iv. planter boxes;
v. flat roof;
vi. swimming pool;
vii. works around pipes and openings;
viii. other areas where indicated on the drawings.
19.2. SURFACE PREPARATION
19.2.1. Concrete, mortar and masonry surfaces must be clean, free from grease, oil, and loosely
adhering particles. Steel and iron surfaces must be clean, free from scale, rust, grease and oil.
All surfaces must be as true and flat as possible.
19.2.2. Absorbent surfaces have to be thoroughly saturated with water prior to application of first coat
of waterproofing material. However no loose standing water should be on the surface before
application.
19.2.3. For application and workmanship, the manufacturer's published recommendation shall be
strictly adhered to unless otherwise approved by the Construction Manager or the Architecture
Consultant.
19.3. GUARANTEE, WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY
19.3.1. The contractor/applicator is to produce a joint guarantee and indemnity in the joint names of the
Manufacturer/Supplier against defects caused by faulty workmanship and materials for a period
of ten (10) years from the date of the Certificate of Practical Completion. The specimen of
guarantee and indemnity ia as per format attached
19.3.2. The warranty shall cover the surfaces treated and will bind the contractor/applicator to repair,
replace or otherwise correct such defective workmanship and/or materials at his own expense,
any and all leaks through the treated surfaces which are not due to structural weaknesses or other
causes beyond the contractor/applicator control such as fire, earthquake, tornado and hurricane.
19.4. PONDING TESTS
19.4.1. Provide equipment, temporary work, water and attendance for performing ponding test prior to
laying to protective screed and/or plaster to a minimum depth of 75mm for a 72 hour period,
including subsequent removal on completion, all to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager
or the Architecture Consultant.
19.5. SAMPLES
19.5.1. Provide samples of the waterproofing materials as requested by the Construction Manager or
Architecture Consultant and execute sample areas for the works.
19.6. MAKING GOOD
19.6.1. Any area damaged by carrying out the works has to be made good to the satisfaction of the
Construction Manager or Architecture Consultant.
19.7. PROTECTION
19.7.1. Comply with manufacturer's product data regading condition of substrate to receive
waterproofing, weather conditions before and during installation and protect all installed
waterproofing system against damage and deterioration.
20. SUBTERRANEAN TERMITES (WHITE ANTS) CONTROL
20.1. GENERALLY
20.1.1. Termite control soil poisoning in buildings under construction should only be carried out by
recognised Termite Control Organisations who are members of the British or American Pest
Control Association and they shall be approved by the P.R. and Pesticide Board of Malaysia.
20.2. CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
20.2.1. The Termite control works shall be done in conjunction with the Building Works at all times.
20.2.2. The Building Contractor shall notify the Termite Control Contractor 48 hours in advance that he
anticipates pouring concrete into the areas to be treated and when the treatment has been carried
Page 138 of 262

out, the concrete should be poured within 12 hours. On completion, a Five Year Guarantee
Certificate is to be obtained.
20.3. CHEMICALS
20.3.1. The Termite Control Contractor may choose from any one of the following recognised Termite
Control Chemicals:-
i. Rentokil soil concentrate.
ii. Dieldrin.
iii. Chlorpyrifos.
iv. Aldrin
and must ensure that the finished chemicals which he prepares will have a strength of 1% and
the P.R. may at any time call for a sample direct from that which is mixed on the site and which
is being used to treat the area to be submitted to an analytical laboratory to ensure that the
correct concentration of 1% is in fact being used.
20.4. TREATMENT AREA
20.4.1. The actual area of the building including pile caps/footing, ground beam, floor slab, apron and
terrace area plus 1m on all sides is termed the building site.
20.4.2. The slab area will be treated after the hardcore has been laid but prior to the slab being poured.
20.4.3. The Termite Control Contractor must insist that all loose timber, wood shavings and other
cellulose containing materials be removed from the hardcore before treatment as the presence of
these materials could hinder the effectiveness of the treatment.
20.4.4. The periphery of the building is to be treated prior to the laying of the concrete apron
20.5. DOSAGE
20.5.1. All surface areas must be treated at the rate of 1 gallon to 10 sq. ft. with 1% finished chemical.
20.5.2. The periphery of the building is to be treated at the rate of 2 gallons per 5 linear feet with a 1%
finished chemical.
20.5.3. Applications is to be carried out by means of motor driven pressure pumps.
20.6. PUBLIC LIABILITY
20.6.1. The Termite Control Contractor will ensure that all chemicals and materials and equipment on
the site are left locked whilst not in use and will take such precautions as necessary to safeguard
all personnel working on the building site.
SECTION II – M&E WORKS
1. LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1.1. GENERAL
1.1.1. The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications.
1.1.2. The Contractor shall comply with the General Conditions of Contract which shall form an
integral part of the electrical Contract.
1.1.3. The Contractor shall include all sales taxes, import duties, permit and inspection fees payable to
all authorities, overtime payments & all other charges & cost necessary to complete the works
within the time schedule allowed for.
1.2. RELATED WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE BUILDER
1.2.1. Construction of all switchrooms, cable cellars and trenches.
1.3. SUPPLY SYSTEM
1.3.1. Supplies to the buildings are to be obtained from the Tenaga Nasional Berhad's as indicated on
the drawings.
1.3.2. The Contractor shall inform the TNB for any cables reconnection in accordance with time set
out in the work programme and, liaise with and carry out all necessary works to the satisfaction
of the Tenaga Nasional Berhad and the Consulting Engineer.
1.4. APPLICATION FOR TNB APPROVAL
Page 139 of 262
1.4.1. The Contractor shall prepare in detail the application forms together with other necessary forms
and submit ther to the Tenaga Nasional Berhad.
1.5. BALANCE OF LOAD
1.5.1. Final load balance between phases shall be carried out by the Contractor.
1.5.2. Phasing of circuits as shown on the drawings shall be taken as a guide only. Necessary
adjustments shall be carried out during the progress of work. Where additional wirings and
loads are connected up particular care must be taken to ensure that the phases are properly
balanced.
1.6. L.V MAIN SWITCHBOARDS
1.6.1. General
The main switchboards shall be metal-clad floor standing type rated as specified elsewhere in
this document and/or drawings and breaking current of 43 Kilo-amperes symmetrical at 415
volts for 1 second complete with air circuit breaker, switch fuses, fuse switches, relays,
contactors, isolators and instrumentation, protection and indication equipment, and cable
termination boxes/glands, etc. as shown in the drawings. The equipment shall be assembled on a
frame to form self-contained units. The switchboard shall also meet the following requirements:
a) Current transformers shall be so arranged & installed that they may be removed without
disturbing the other equipment or wirings in the switchboard.
b) Switchboard shall be constructed in such a manner as to allow each section to be
dismantled or assembled on site as a unit.
c) The complete switchboard shall be dust & vermin proof and, hysteresis & eddy current
heating shall be eliminated.
d) All switchgears of the same rating shall be interchangeable.
e) The short circuit rating shall not be less than 31 MVA for 1 sec. at 415 volt, 50 hertz
service voltage.
f) BS 4070 Class 2 rating, back connected.
As a minimum requirement, the switchboards and the associated switchgear, equipment,
instruments and relays shall conform to the latest British Standards in all respects with regard to
design, construction, performance & tests. The switchboard busbar design shall be attested by
Test Certificates on another similar switchboard, issued by ASTA or KEMA and they shall
accompany the tender.
Equipment manufactured in accordance with other technical specifications will only be
considered if Test Certificates issued by recognized testing authorities are submitted to show
their full compliance with British Standards & ASTA rules, and approved by Jemaah Pemeriksa
Elektrik, Malaysia (JPEM).
The main switchboards shall be installed in the Consumer L.V. Switch-room as indicated.
1.6.2. Housing
The main switchboard shall be flush fronted, floor mounted, totally enclosed cubicles pattern
units.
It shall be constructed of best quality flat mild steel sheet, supported on U-shaped steel
framework of not less than 10 SWG thickness. The switchboard shall have adequate ventilation,
but shall at the same time be substantially dust, drip & vermin proof. Precautions shall be taken
in design to prevent overheating through hysteresis & eddy current losses.
The main switchboard shall be of sound rigid construction, with all parts designed to withstand
without any sag, deformation or warping, the loads likely to be experienced during normal
operation or under maximum fault condition. The sheet steel used in construction shall be not
less than 14 gauge to prevent any distortion of the metal when holes are cut for equipment. The
front panels shall be manufactured out of furniture grade steel and have all edges turned and
matched.
The design shall be such as to allow ready access to the interior of the cubicles for operation or
maintenance purposes and such that cable jointing, where necessary, can be accomplished with
reasonable ease, boxes/glands being located in accessible positions.
Access shall be gained by hidden-hinged doors or covers fitted with chromium plated fixing
screws. It shall only be possible with the switchgear isolated and withdrawn at the front of the
board to open the door and gain access to that compartment only.
Page 140 of 262

All surfaces shall be treated to prevent corrosion and to ensure long service life. The steel sheets
shall be degreased and phosphatised before being coated with epoxy powder paint and oven
backed.
After the installation of all cables, cable trenchlopening and entry pipes shall be covered up with
non- combustible materials to prevent the entry of vermin.
All circuit compartments shall be totally segregated with non-combustible barriers from each
other and from the busbars.
All circuit breakers fuse compartments & busbar chambers shall be totally segregated from each
other with barriers.
1.6.3. Busbars and Connections
The design of busbars systems shall comply with B.S. 159. They shall be of hard drawn high
conductivity copper of adequate rectangular cross-section, to carry continuously the currents
required but a current density of 1.55 amps per square mm cross sectional area shall not be
exceeded. All joints in busbar shall be bolted or clamped, with contact surfaces suitably
prepared to prevent oxidation in service. The copper busbars shall be heavily tinned to give
reflective surface.
Busbars shall be painted with colours red, yellow, blue and black at appropriate points to
distinguish the phases and neutral. The neutral busbar shall be the same size as that of the
phases.
An earth bar, of appropriate cross section, shall be run full length, preferably at the base of the
switchboard.
The busbars shall be air insulated. They shall be rigidly supported so as to withstand any
mechanical forces to which they may be subjected under maximum fault conditions
corresponding to the rated symmetrical breaking capacity. Adequate connectors, droppers &
links shall be fitted to serve circuit breakers & switchgear.
The busbars shall be rated as specified elsewhere and symmetrical fault capacity of 43KA
symmetrical at 415 volts for 1 sec. The buscoupler isolation for the main busbars shall be
similarly rated.
Connections, tappings and/or clampings shall be made in an approved manner to ensure
faultless electrical contacts.
Neutral & earth busbars shall be provided with terminals, lugs, bolts & nut & washers to suit
requirements.
All busbar connections, shall be made in an approved manner to ensure faultless contact. Bolts
shall be tightened with an even tension & approved washer shall be used at all joints, cadmium
plated high tensile steel bolts with screwed B.S.F. thread and having approved cadmium plated
lock nuts shall be used. Approved washers shall be used on both outer faces of all joints to
busbars. Access to the busbars & connections shall be gained by removal of cover plates
secured by bolts or screws. Busbar which extend into the cabling or wiring chambers shall be
shrouded with insulated removable covers designed to prevent accidental contact with the live
parts.
The main busbar shall be sized to carry the specified current rating and busbar connections to air
circuit breakers, switch-fuses, fuse switches MCCBs, MCBs and isolators shall also be
adequately sized so that temperature rise in any part will not exceed 5O°C above ambient
temperature of 35°C.
All busbar shall be of air insulated and rectangular cross- section type. They shall be rigidly
supported and have a short circuit rating of 31 MVA at 415 volts, 50 hertz for 1 second.
They shall be so arranged that extension can be done without difficulty and the resistance of any
length of busbar with a joint shall not be greater than that of an equal length of similar bar
without a joint.
Before assembly, all busbar joint surfaces shall be filed or finished to remove burrs, dents and
oxides and tinned or coated with petroleum jelly.
If outgoing feeders are of mineral insulated cables, provision shall be made on top to the
switchboard for cables entry by providing a copper plate with fibre as separation. Terminations
shall be done with flameproof type copper glands and seals. Aluminium materials will not be
accepted.
1.6.4. Air-Circuit Breakers
All air circuit breakers shall comply with B.S. 4752 of 1971 issue and the following provisions:
Page 141 of 262

a) Construction: All breakers shall be of metal clad, flush mounted, air break & horizontal
draw-out type. They shall be interchangeable with units of similar rating. Individual arc
chute shall be provided on each pole of the breaker and shall be so designed that any arc
caused by the opening of breaker under maximum fault condition shall be contained
completely in the chute. There shall be no possibility of "flash over'' between phases or
between adjacent earthed metal.
b) Rating: All breakers shall be of the three pole type and adequately rated to take the full
load currents of the circuits. They shall have a symmetrical breaking current of not less
than 43 KA at 'a service voltage of 415V at 50 Hz. in accordance with the above
Specifications certified by ASTA or other recognized testing authority.
c) Operation: Each breaker shall be of spring assisted and manual closing type and equipped
with an extra low voltage D.C. tripping coil with a manual trip button of opening the
breaker. The tripping mechanism shall be independent of the operating handle.
Circuits to normal opening and closing mechanism shall be arranged by means of
auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker so that the operating circuit is broken
immediately when the breaker reaches the fully open position or is fully closed and
latched respectively.
The tripping mechanism shall be stable and not be capable of being opened by shocks or
jars. The design of the tripping coils shall be such that drop plunger shall be operated
immediately, there being no delay due to the building up of the coil field to maximum
value. The tripping coil shall be wound on a high grade bakelite or mica former.
d) Contacts: Main and arcing contacts shall be equipped for each circuit breaker. Main
contact shall be arranged to give a double break in each pole. All contacts shall be silver-
plated & replaceable.
e) Indication: The mechanical indicator shall use the words "ON" & "OFF" to Indicate
breaker positions & complete with locating device.
f) Isolation: Each breaker shall be capable of being completely isolated from its busbars by
withdrawable features. Automatic shutters shall be provided to seal off the main current
plugs in the switchboard when the breaker is withdrawn complete with locking in the
closed position.
g) Auxiliary Switches: Auxiliary switches, relays & contactors as necessary for the proper
operation of the circuit breaker, trip coils, electrical interlocks, alarm indication &
"operation status" indication shall be provided. Auxiliary switches shall be equipped for
each breaker for indication, alarm & control. Auxiliary switches shall be of robust, double
break action, easily accessible for maintenance, having adequate current ratings to carry
the connected loads.
h) Air Circuit Breaker Carriage: Supply a fully approved and certified circuit breaker
carriage to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the breaker.
The circuit breaker carriage shall be so interlocked that it is not possible to withdraw the
breaker while it is in the 'close' position and it is not possible to close the breaker while
the carriage or hinged panel is in any position between "fully isolated" and "service
position", or vice versa. Provision shall be made so that it is possible to operate the
breaker mechanism, if required for inspection and testing purposes, when the breaker is
fully isolated.
i) Test: The tests to verify the characteristics of circuit breaker shall include type tests,
routine tests & special tests.
Type Tests shall include:
i. Verification of temperature rise limits.
ii. Verification of dielectric properties.
iii. Verification of rated short-circuit making and breaking currents.
iv. Verification of the ability to carry rated short time current.
v. Verification of mechanical operation and endurance.
Routine tests shall include:
i. Mechanical operation tests.
ii. Calibration of releases.
iii. Dielectric tests.
The special tests which are required to be carried out by Tenaga Nasional Berhad shall be tested
at the Contractor's account.
Page 142 of 262
Should the type tests and routine tests cannot be carried out locally, the Contractor shall submit
test certificates certified by ASTA or other recognised testing authorities with the tender.
1.6.5. Over Current And Earth Fault Relays
Circuit breakers shall be provided with over current and earth fault relays. Over current and
earth fault relays shall be of the current transformer operated direct acting type each provided
with a low set overload heavily damped induction disc element having approximately inverse
time characteristics with definite minimum time of 1.6 seconds at 10 times current setting with
time multiplier settings of 0.1 to 1.0 range to B.S. 142. The current setting shall be easily
adjustable from 20% to 80% in steps of 10% of the current transformer rating for the low
current element.
Earth fault protection shall have current setting adjustable from 10% to 40% in steps of 5% of
current transformer rating.
1.6.6. Current Transformers
Current transformers (C.T.) necessary for the operation of instruments and meters shall be of
accuracy not less than Class 1 for measuring, Class 0.5 for metering & Class 5 for protection
according to B.S. 3938.
They shall be adequately rated in V.A. to carry the total burdens of all connected loads, and
shall be capable of carrying currents of the corresponding circuit breakers and fuses. Under no
circumstances, the ratio error at zero burden shall exceed -1%.
Relays for overload protection shall be of instantaneous trip type and incorporate adjustable
time delay to meet the requirements of TNB. Fault phase indicator shall be provided to indicate
the phase fault conditions. Magnetisation curves and type tests certificates shall be submitted
with the tender.
Current transformers shall be adequately supported & installed so as to permit easy access and
to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without dismantling of adjacent equipment.
1.6.7. Tripping Batteries and Charger
a) Batteries shall be Nickel Cadmium in steel containers designed for switch tripping
application. The nominal capacity shall be minimum 1O Ah at 5 hour rate of discharge, and
24V nominal voltage.
b) The battery charger shall be of regulated fully automatic constant volt, type which
automatically adjust its charging rate to the condition of the battery.
c) Supply the charger in a suitable enclosure complete with all monitoring instruments &
indication for state of charge, ammeter, volt meter, main isolating switch and indicating
lamps.
1.6.8. Fuse Switchgear
All fuse-switches & switch-fuses shall be of totally enclosed, metal-clad, flush mounting,
double air break & quick action mounting, double air break and quick action type. They shall
comply fully with B.S. 5419, and have a rupturing capacity of not less than 43KA symmetrical
at 415V and 50Hz. certified by ASTA. The fuse-switches shall be triple pole with neutral link
capable of carrying their rated current continuously without over-heating or damage.
1.6.9. Fuses
Fuses shall be of the interchangeable cartridge type. They shall comply fully with B.S. 88 and
shall have a rupturing capacity of not less than 43 KA symmetrical at 415V & 50 Hz. certified
by ASTA or other recognised testing authority.
1.6.10. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)
These shall conform to B.S. 3871 : Part 2 and shall be of makes approved for use by the JPEM.
They are rated at 4 15/240 volts, 50Hz. with breaking capacity of 43 KA at Main L.T.
switchboard. Breaking capacities at sub-switchboards shall be indicated in the drawings.
They shall be of the all-insulated, moulded, T.P. or D.P. or S.P. non-withdrawable type, suitable
for flush-mounting in the switchboards and distribution boards. A bolted type solid 'Neutral'
Link shall be provided and fitted in the same compartment.
Overcurrent release shall be of the thermal and magnetic type with approximate inverse current
time characteristics, adjustable over a certain range. The tripping device shall be so designed as
to prevent "single-phasing" of the supply (in the case of D.P. and T.P. breakers only) should a
fault occur on any one "phase" of the supply.
Where indicated on the drawings, shunt trip coil or under voltage release if required, shall be
built-in with the relevant breakers with provision being made for connections to external
Page 143 of 262

automatic or manual "tripping" of the MCCBs. MCCBs after tripping must be reset before it can
close again.
Where indicated on the drawings, rotary locking handles shall be provided to lock the MCCBs
in the "OFF" position. Mechanical "ON/OFF" indicator operating in con junction with the
operating handle of the circuit breaker must be shown.
1.6.11. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
MCBs shall incorporate a fixed unadjustable time/current tripping characteristics calibrated in
compliance to B.S. 3871 Part 1 at ambient temperature of 40°C. All MCBs protecting outgoing
circuits shall be the automatic type equipped with appropriate overload and short circuit
protection to suit the particular applications & fault levels at their respective points of
application.
1.6.12. Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker (RCB's)
Residual current operated type circuit breakers of 30 milliamperes sensitivity for single phase
and 100 mA for three phase conforming to BS & IEE 15th Edition shall be used to protect
against earth leakage. They shall operate within 40 msec. & shall operate without damage in
presence of pulsating D.C. fault currents. They shall incorporate surge suppressor circuits to
prevent nuisance trippings due to induced lightning surges.
1.6.13. Instruments and Meters
Instruments & meters shall be of flush mounting, square or rectangular type with moulded
plastic escutcheons and shall conform to the requirements and arrangements shown on the
drawings.
Indicating instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade, moving iron spring controlled with 100 mm
diameter dials (240 degree scale) with external zero adjustment. Ammeters used for motor
circuits shall have compressed scale at the top end to allow for current surges during motor
starting.
All ammeters shall be of industrial grade & shall be calibrated for use with their respective
current transformers. Instruments selector switches for ampere and volt meters shall be of
approved rotary type.
Electricity meters shall conform to B.S. 37 and B.S. 5686 as appropriate.
All relays shall be of heavy duty pattern, unaffected by external vibration and capable of
operation in any position. All the meters and relays shall be fully tropicalised.
1.6.14. Earthing
All components shall be efficiently bonded and connected to a copper earth bar of adequate
dimensions on the main switchboard.
The earth bar on the main switchboard shall be connected by copper tapes to the main earthing
pits outside the building.
1.6.15. Wiring
Supply and install wirings for all metering, protective indicating, interlocking, operating &
control circuits as shown on the drawings and as specified.
Wirings shall be either flame-proof or switchboard type and of minimum 3/029 conductor size.
But for current transformer circuits, a minimum size of 7/029 conductor shall be used.
All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 9 and securely held in
position with suitable clips, insulating bushes being used where necessary.
Meters wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated cable of size not less than 2.5 sq.mm. All
meter wiring shall be of similar colours to those of the respective busbars etc., to which
connections are made. The cable termination shall be made with approved type lugs.
Wiring shall be carried out in such a manner as to make circuits and connections easily
traceable. Cable marking ferrules or similar shall be used at each termination. Terminals shall be
designated in an approved manner.
The Contractor shall use wirings of appropriate colours to match the phases, neutral and earth.
Wirings shall be terminated in mould insulated terminal blocks and identified by approved
means. They shall be laced with approved nylon wire ties to form looms and supported in
approved wiring cleats.
Klippon make or equivalent wiring terminals on 'C' channel shall be used.
1.6.16. Identification, Label and Nameplates
Colours and symbols used for identification of busbar, connection, wiring, etc. in the
switchboard shall be to I.E.E. regulation 15th Edition.
Page 144 of 262

All labels shall be of white lettering engraved on black traffolyte, and screwed just below the
nameplate of switchgear. 'Dymo" tape will not be accepted. The size of lettering shall be
submitted for approval prior to manufacturer.
Each circuit, equipment and instrument of the switchboard shall be clearly identified and
designated according to its function. The designation labels shall be clear and legible.
Small rating plates giving serial numbers and data in accordance with the relevant B.S. are
required on each item supplied.
1.6.17. Tests
Routine Tests: The Contractor shall submit certified test sheets showing details of all routine
tests applied; during manufacture, to the switchboards & the individual components thereof.
Without in any way affecting the generality of this Clause such tests shall include the following
Clauses relating to switchgear:
a) Operation tests, consisting of fifty operations of the operating mechanisms performed
with the closing device.
b) Millivolt drop test, or resistance test at the rated current of the equipment across all
contacts individually, and as a complete unit as a check against temperature rise type test.
The record taken on the type test shall be taken as datum.
c) Test for stability of tripping mechanism, conducted by the application of shocks and jars
to the mechanism of shocks and jars to the mechanism housing and framework with an
approved rawhide or rubber hammer. -
d) Trimming test, conducted on one of the air circuit breakers to be supplied, to obtain the
times of closing and opening of the circuit breaker in relation to the results obtained under
type test.
e) Tests on each switching unit, to determine the satisfactory operation of trip coil or coils at
the minimum & at the normal tripping voltage.
Site Tests: After the equipment has been erected on site, and before final connection to supply,
the Contractor shall arrange with an approved Testing Firm or TNB & at his own expense, and
in the presence of & to the satisfaction of the Engineer carry out all necessary tests to
demonstrate that the equipment complies with the requirements of this Specification. Such tests
shall include:
a) Demonstration that all equipment are installed & all wiring connected, so that the boards
function as required.
b) Tests of accuracy of all measuring instruments.
c) Secondary injection test on C.T.'s and relays including relays setting.
d) Pressure test on busbars and circuit breakers.
e) Insulation resistance between phases, between each phase and neutral and between each
phase, neutral and earth, with circuit breakers closed including secondary wiring.
f) Insulation resistance across breakers in all circuit breakers, with the breaker open and
with all equipment installed after pressure test. Copies of test sheets, showing the results
of all tests carried out in accordance with this section of the Specification shall be
submitted in Triplicate to the Engineer.
T.N.B. Tests: The T.N.B. may carry out tests on the switchboards and earthing system prior to
connection of supply. The Contractor shall pay all fees in connection with testing.
1.6.18. Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer for approval prior to fabrication.
The drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, dimension of switchboard, wiring
diagrams & details of switchgears to be used.
1.6.19. Framed Single Line Diagrams
The Contractor shall provide Main Single Line Diagram framed in glass panels in the Main
Switch Room and other framed Single Line Diagrams for Sub-Switchboards. The diagram shall
be 1067 mm x 762 mm approximately and shall clearly show full details of connecting circuits
of the main switchboards.
1.6.20. Rubber Mats
The Contractor shall provide in front of the main switchboard and other floor-mounted sub-
switchboards rubber mats of approximately 1220 mm wide & 6.25 mm thick in continuous rolls
for the full length of the switchboards.
1.6.21. Earth Value
Page 145 of 262

At the main switchboard position a label shall be fixed to the switchboard giving the earth value
and the date of test. The label shall be of an approved plastic and engraved black on white
1ackground.
1.6.22. Anti-Condensation Heaters
Heaters shall be installed suitable for operation at 240 volts AC.
1.6.23. Electric Shock Charts & Danger Sign
An electric shock chart framed in a glass panel shall be fixed on the wall in all switch-rooms.
Regulation type "Danger'' sign and "No Admittance" notice shall be installed on entry doors of
all switch-rooms to the requirement of TNB and Engineer.
1.6.24. Certificate Tests
A Certified (TNB) Testing Engineer will carry out tests on all equipment on the switchboard.
The tests will include injection test on air-circuit breaker, tests on main earth and, protection and
insulation tests on all switch-gears & busbar. The Contractor shall pay all fees in connection
with the tests. If any equipment fails the TNB tests the Contractor shall rectify the fault or
replace the equipment at his own expense.
The Contractor shall submit the test certificate to the Consulting Engineer for record.
1.7. AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL
1.7.1. The capacitor banks and control equipments shall be housed in a floor standing steel cabinet
connected to main switchboard in the main switchroom. The capacitor banks shall be totally
enclosed & splash- proof units with dust-tight and hose-proof terminal boxes. Sheet metal of the
panel shall be treated for anti-rust and finished with two components enamel. The panel shall be
adequately ventilated.
1.7.2. The capacitor banks shall be designed to IEG 70 and arranged in steps to be switched in and out
of circuit, either automatically or manually by means of selector switches. A master sensing
element shall determine the magnitude of the inductive load and select the compensating
capacitance. The target power factor of the control relay shall be able to be adjusted in a
continuous range. The panel shall include regulators, power factor meter, switching devices,
contactors indicators and discharge resistors.
1.7.3. A no-volt release with self-rest feature shall be incorporated to disconnect all the capacitors in
the case of a main failure. When the mains voltage returns, the control relay shall commence
operation After a delay of approximate 2 minutes.
1.7.4. The rating of the panel(s) are indicated on the drawings.
1.8. DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1.8.1. Distribution board shall be metal clad or "PVC" consumer unit type as specified elsewhere,
weatherproof where specified & suitable for surface or flush wall mounting & shall be
manufactured to B.S. 5486. Metal cladding shall be rust-proof before painting.
1.8.2. Complete each distribution board with cabinet, trim, door, lock, circuit schedule, circuit
breakers, wiring busbars, terminals and links as shown on the single line diagrams and layouts.
1.8.3. Supply cabinets of the totally enclosed, metal clad type containing the equipment detailed in this
Specification or on the plans. Fabricate cabinets from minimum 16 SWG sheet steel using
folded section and/or angle iron bracing where necessary for stiffeners & weld all joints with
continuous seam welds. Use no spot welds without prior approval from the Engineer. Grind all
welds flush after fabrication.
1.8.4. Where distribution boards are not mounted within cupboards, fit doors to cabinets using
substantial concealed type hinges. Access to wiring and removal of escutcheon plates should be
possible without removing doors from the cabinets. Stiffen in an approved manner to prevent
distortion and fit with approved substantial chrome plated handles with cylinder locks. Use
latching bars of substantial cross section and provide adequate guides to prevent bars distorting
when latching or unlatching doors.
1.8.5. Arrange distribution boards for 1 phase, 2 wire or 3 phase, 4 wire services required with solid
neutral and earthing bars with one terminal for each circuit. Internally wire all switchboards
using insulated busbars connections wherever possible. Use approved insulated switchboard
wiring cables in other cases. Bolt or clamp all connections in an approved manner and fix with
locknuts.
1.8.6. Each phase & neutral shall be segregated by insulation barrier and all live parts shall be
shrouded to prevent accidental contact. Neutral bars shall have at each entry, provision for
Page 146 of 262
connection of neutral wires. An earth bar shall be provided for connection of the earth
continuity conductors.
1.8.7. Colour all connections to comply with the Standard Colour Code. Fit approved lugs to make all
cable connections & provide terminals for all wiring leaving the switchboard. Cables shall be
formed neatly and laced in an approved manner.
1.8.8. The distribution board shall be designed to minimise projections and/or irregular exposed
surfaces, which accumulate dust and/or dirt and are difficult to clean.
1.8.9. Provide insulating panels, mounting brackets, together with all necessary connections &
terminals, to all spaces for the connections of future equipment in such a way that this additional
equipment may be fitted at a future date without having to supply any material such as
connections, mounting screws, terminals, insulating panels, etc.
1.8.10. U) All current carrying parts, shall be of 99% conductivity electrolytically pure copper, securely
fastened within the boards and arranged so that they will not be displaced during installation or
sustained through fault currents.
1.8.11. Temperature rise of busbars and connections shall be not exceed 30°C above ambient at full
load current.
1.8.12. Label all items of equipment on cabinets using approved labels with letters approximately 5/32"
high to indicate the function to the equipment or the circuit it is controlling. Carry out additional
labelling of the cabinet as shown or of various compartments thereof as may be directed by the
Engineer. In addition, number all controls and label neutral and earth bar terminals to
correspond.
1.8.13. Provide and affix to the door or escutcheon plate, of each distribution board, a white Traffolyte
label engraved with black lettering to denote details of supply, service, etc. Submit proposed
details of engraving for approval.
1.8.14. Provide a typewritten circuit schedule and mount behind perspex or glass. Indicate the
distribution board designation, the sub-main distribution switch size, description of load, and
circuit breaker rating, conduit and cable sizes. Each circuit designation by an adjacent approved
label.
1.8.15. Provide a scaled plan of each floor indicating the areas or equipment served by each circuit &
mount behind perspex or glass at the switchboard position.
1.8.16. Obtain the approval of the Supply Authority for all switchboards. Permit the Engineer or his
representative to enter without notice the works where the cabinets are being manufactured at
any time during normal working hours to inspect the construction of the cabinets.
1.8.17. Finish of distribution boards shall be to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer.
1.8.18. The distribution boards shall be compact type.
1.9. DISTRIBUTION CABLE
1.9.1. General
The work to be carried out including the supply of all the necessary labour, equipment and
materials lugs, glands, compound, etc. for the laying, jointing and termination of all distribution
cables- shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The work shall be carried out to the
approval of the Engineer.
1.9.2. Cable Route and Identification
a) The cable routes are generally as shown in the drawings. However, changes to the designed
routes may be required due to site conditions or other unforeseen factors necessitating such
changes. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit to the Engineer for approval
drawings showing the proposed cable routes prior to installation.
b) Each cable shall be identified by a lead foil label, with inscription of the corresponding
designation of the circuit labelled in the panel, and voltage level attached to the cable at
every turn.
1.9.3. Underground Cable Installation
a) The cables shall be run in trenches/ducts as shown in drawings. Cables shall be run in a
neat & orderly manner without crossing wherever possible. Cables shall terminate in
approved cable glands.
b) Cables laid direct into the ground shall be laid in prepared trenches not less than 750 mm
depth & of sufficient width to accommodate the number & size of cables required. There
shall be a layer of compacted sand not less than 75mm thick as bedding. The sand used
shall be river sand free of any stones. After the cables have been laid, sand shall be spread
Page 147 of 262
over the cables covering the entire length & width of the trench to a minimum thickness of
150mm. On top of the sand, a layer of cable tiles covering the full width of the cables shall
be provided. Backfilling shall be made with first quality material and well compacted.
Where cable trenches run across turfed areas and roadways, the turfing and roads shall be
reinstated after backfilling. Cables shall not be laid in the trench until the Engineer has
inspected & approved the excavation. Cable route markers shall be provided at not more
than 100 metres interval & at every turning of the cable route.
c) No cable shall be laid in a flooded trench. Trenches which are flooded after the cables are
laid & before backfilling has commenced shall be carefully bailed or pumped dry. Cables
shall be protected from damage during installation using approved cable pulleys, guide
rollers, cable drum jacks, cable pulling grips & a cable laying capstan winch.
d) All cables shall be laid in full lengths and jointing of cables will not be permitted unless
with the approval of the Engineer. All cable termination shall be the brass cable glands or
Raychem thermofit types and cable joints shall be the acrylic bicast type. The cables shall
have sufficient slack before joining to permit future removal and rejoining of faulty joint
without additional cable being laid. Cables bending radius shall not exceed that given by
the manufacturer.
e) Space factor for installation of cables shall follow the requirement of the I.E.E. regulation
for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, 15 Edition.
f) All cable terminations & joints shall be carried out by experienced cable jointers using
original manufactured components of the cable suppliers.
1.9.4. PVC/SWA/PVC Cable
PVC insulated, steel wire armoured, PVC over sheathed cables shall be manufactured to B.S.
6346 with annealed copper conductors. The PVC over sheath shall be flame retarding and have
anti-termite additives. The voltage rating shall be 600/1000 volts. All cable terminations shall be
provided with a brass cable glands conforming to B.S. 6121. The cable gland shall incorporate
moisture seals on the inner & outer PVC sheaths, a cone type clamp for the armouring and an
earth bonding attachment.
1.9.5. PVC Insulated Cables and Cable Run
a) Final sub-circuit cables, unless otherwise specified shall be PVC insulated cables of
annealed copper conductors, 450/750 volt grade to B.S. 6004.
b) Cables shall be run in heavily galvanised rigid, steel conduit or steel cable tray or in steel
trunking as shown in the drawing. All the cables shall be adequately sized, taking into
account of voltage drop, to carry the full load of the equipment.
c) Cable shall be delivered to the site in unbroken coils with the original wrapping intact. All
wires or cables in which kinks or abrasions have occurred will be condemned and shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
d) All sags, etc, shall removed to give maximum neatness before installation. No jointing of
cables is allowed. Cables shall be a continuous run between the main switchboard and the
distribution boards or equipment and shall be coloured red, yellow, blue and black or of
distinguishing colours in accordance with local authority regulations at appropriate
intervals to distinguish the phases and neutral.
e) Cables on walls shall run vertically or horizontally only. Vertical cable runs shall not be
more than 350 mm from ceiling level or 200m from the underside of beams. Cables
running above ceilings shall be adequately supported in conduits and trunkings. There shall
as far as possible be no joints in cables between termination. Where joints are required due
to long runs exceeding 90 m appropriate joint boxes specifically designed for this purpose
shall be used.
f) The system of wiring shall be the loop-in loop-out type for all circuits and use of
connectors to tee-off at junction boxes is not allowed.
g) All bends in conduits, cable trays and trunkings shall be of appropriate radii for the cables
used. The Contractor shall apply the final painting to all conduit, trunking and all fixing
accessories after installation.
1.9.6. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated (XLPE) Cables
a) The insulation shall be free of voids and particles that may cause insulation failure.
b) Cross-lined Polyethylene Insulated (XLPE) cables shall be manufactured in accordance
with IEC 502. They shall have voltage rating E/E of 600 / l,000V and unless otherwise
Page 148 of 262

stated have stranded copper conductors, 4-core, XLPE shall have an oversheath of PVC
and armoured with galvanized steel wire.
c) Termination of XLPE cables shall be made with connectors and compression glands
recommended by the Manufacturer.
1.9.7. Mineral Insulated Copper Sheathed (MICS) Cables
a) All mineral insulated copper sheathed cables shall comply with B.S. (207 Part 1, 1969, and
shall be rated for 1000) heavy duty service. They shall be run on cable trays and clipped in
place with saddles. Saddles and clips shall not be spaced greater than 3' intervals.
b) Cables shall be neatly run in straight trefoil formation. All terminations shall be carried out
in proper cable glands, seals PVC sleeving and all necessary accessories to ensure a
moisture proof joint. For long runs, allowance shall be made in the form of loops to allow
for expansion. The bending radius of any cable shall be limited to six (6) times the overall
diameter of cable.
1.10. STEEL CONDUIT SYSTEM
1.10.1. Steel conduits and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 31, heavy-gauge
galvanised screwed type. Conduits shall be of adequate capacity for the sizes and number of
cables to be contained therein. Conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically
continuous and watertight throughout. They shall be provided with adequate inspection-type
fittings which shall be so installed that they remain accessible. All conduits shall terminate on
proper conduit fittings and there shall be no unterminated conduit ends. All conduits shall be
adequately supported.
1.10.2. All conduit runs shall be straight & run either horizontally or vertically. Diagon A1 runs are not
permitted.
1.10.3. The Contractor shall form or cut chases required in the structural works to accommodate the
conduits, etc.
1.11. STEEL TRUNKING
1.11.1. Steel trunking shall be constructed of 16 SWG and cover plates of 14 SWG with flanged edges
and of best quality mild steel sheet. The trunking shall be painted with a primer and coated with
orange epoxy paint. Removal covers shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate the
drawing-in or removable of cables at any time. Steel hangers, brackets or other approved fixing
media shall be provided at suitable intervals, If necessary, vertical trunking shall be provided
with suspension Units and thrust blocks. Trunking shall be supplied in lengths to suit the
installation. Joints and bends shall be so constructed that cables can be conveniently drawn
through. Steel trunking where used on floor slab or other damp environment shall be of
weatherproof construction. A copper tape of sufficient cross-section shall be installed on the
whole length of trunking run. A connection to the earthing system shall be provided at either
end of the copper tape run. Trunking shall comply to B.S. 4678.
1.12. CABLE TRAYS
1.12.1. Cable trays shall be of the perforated type and constructed of minimum 16 gauge galvanised
mild steel with orange epoxy paint coating. The trays shall be supported at 900 mm intervals by
galvanised mild steel hangers of adequate strength fixed to walls or ceiling slabs using rawl
bolts. The width of the cable trays shall be sufficient to allow the numbers of cable to be run,
evenly spaced without overlapping, and with spare room to accommodate 10% future increase
in number of cables. Spacing between cables shall be half the diameter of the largest adjacent
cable. Cable clamps shall be provided at 2 metres centres on horizontal run & 900 mm centres
for vertical run.
1.12.2. All cable trays shall be effectively bonded to earth with suitable copper tapes as earth continuity
conductors.
1.13. GENERAL POWER RETICULATION
1.13.1. The installation of outlets, boxes and conduits in concrete pours shall be coordinated throughout
with the Builder. Accurately scaled and dimensioned drawings of the actual installation shall be
submitted to the Consulting Engineer in the form of "As Built" drawings.
1.13.2. PVC insulated cables in conduits shall be used throughout. The minimum cable size shall be
7/029 with earth wire.
Page 149 of 262
1.14. GENERAL LIGHTING RETICULATION
1.14.1. PVC insulated cables in conduit shall be used throughout. The minimum cable size shall be
3/029 with earth wire.
1.14.2. Where it is required to install PVC cables in conduit to lighting fittings mounted on a suspended
ceiling the final connection shall be carried out by means of a flexible conduit.
1.15. ELECTRICAL CUPBOARDS
1.15.1. Supply, install and fit into the Electrical Cupboards all equipment and incidental items as
required, specified herein and/or shown on drawings.
1.15.2. Provide an approved equipment frame for the mounting of meter panels and all other
equipment. The frame shall provide rigid support for all equipment mounted on it and shall
allow cables to be run behind it. The frame shall be fabricated by bolting together angle iron or
folded sections of sheet metal to form a rigid structure. Paint the frame to the satisfaction &
approval of the Engineer.
1.15.3. All openings in floor slabs or fire walls shall be fire proofed by packing with asbestos rope and
fibres to the approval of the Consulting Engineer.
1.15.4. Supply and install cables racking and mechanical support and protection for cables, busducts
and switchboards where electrical cupboards and riser positions are other unprotected.
1.16. TEE OFF BOXES
1.16.1. Supply and install tee-off boxes as shown on drawings.
1.16.2. Unswitched tee-off boxes shall be complete with glands, earthing bars, fuse holders &
cartridges.
1.16.3. Switched tee-off boxes shall be complete with glands, earthing bars, neutral links and
combination fuse switch units.
1.16.4. Boxes shall be manufactured from minimum 18 gauge sheet steel with hinged, removable
covers and finished to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer.
1.16.5. Time-current characteristics of the system protection equipment shall be arranged so that a fault
shall be cleared as near to the location of the fault as possible. In this regard protection
equipment at Tee- off boxes shall be suitably graded to prevent a distribution board fault
interrupting the feeder supply.
1.17. INSTALLATION NOTES
1.17.1. General
a) Supply & installed all wiring necessary for the proper functioning of the complete
installation in accordance with details as to size, rating and type noted hereafter or shown
on plans. Unless otherwise detailed wire throughout in PVC cables.
b) Alternative submissions shall be made for the use of PVC cables enclosed in metal Class B
screwed in all false ceiling space.
c) Install cables on the loop-in loop-out system. No connectors shall be used. Any circuit
found to contain connectors will be required to be rewired at the Contractor's cost. Loop all
cables only in terminals of equipment or accessories.
d) Install all cables without damages to insulation & replace, without cost, any in which
damage occurs.
e) Prepare all ends for termination without cutting strands and fix in lugs or approved clips
when such are necessary to prevent spread of strands when termination are tightened.
f) Where it is necessary to insulate the body of a crimped or soldered cable lug, this shall be
done with a suitable length of delated PVC tubing. The PVC tubing shall be 660 volt grade,
colour matched to the cable insulation, and of the correct diameter to ensure that, upon the
evaporation of the dilator, the PVC tubing will shrink tightly into the cable lug.
g) Supply all cables in sizes complying with the I.E.E. Wiring Rules as detailed hereafter or
on the drawings, or where not detailed to match circuit breaker ratings. Use stranded
conductors throughout.
h) Colour code cables throughout the installation using red, yellow and blue for phase wires,
black for neutrals and green for earth conductors. Preserve uniformity of each phase wire
colour throughout the installation and rewire with correct colour if phase is changed after
installation to balance supply. Marking tape at cable terminations will not be acceptable as
Page 150 of 262

sufficient colour coding. Rewire without additional cost to correct any errors in colour
coding.
1.17.2. Cable Trunking
a) Supply and install cable trunking in lieu of conduits to enclose conductors in locations as
directed. Fix wiring ducts to walls or railings with approved brackets or hangers at
maximum 5'-0" centres.
b) Provide means for retaining conductors in ducts when the covers are removed. Allow space
factor in accordance with the I.E.E. WIRING RULES.
c) Group all conductors in wiring ducts together in circuits and label at intervals not
exceeding 8'-0".
d) Keep ducts closed at all times except when actually running conductors to prevent the
accumulation of dirt or other foreign matter therein.
1.17.3. Location of Final Outlets
a) The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the proper position of all outlets and
receptacles, incorrectly located, shall be relocated without additional cost to the Employer.
Outlet locations shown on drawings are approximate. Do not scale the included drawings
but consult the architectural plans, sections, elevations and detail for exact locations of
outlets and equipment and areas with furred or hung ceilings.
b) The location of outlets, apparatus or equipment may be varied at any time up to the time of
roughing-in. All variations shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost to the
owner providing that the variations are within a ten foot radius of the indicated location.
c) Ceiling boxes shall be aligned in rows with a maximum tolerance of 1 inch deviation each
100 ft.
d) Wall outlets shall be centred 12 inches above the finished floor (A.F.F.) unless othenvise
shown or directed.
1.17.4. Lighting Outlets
a) Erect all fittings in a workmanlike manner, square with other details, maintaining straight
and true lines and vertical drops. Allow for fibre glass insulated cables to fittings as may be
directed by the Architect or as noted on the drawings.
b) Install switches which are shown adjacent to doors on the lock side. Check door swings
before switch installation.
c) Test all lighting fittings prior to erection and allow for repairing, under guarantee or
otherwise, any part that prove defective either initially or during the Guarantee Period.
1.17.5. Permanently Wired Outlets
Supply and install an isolating switch adjacent to each appliance. Connect appliance fitted with
flexible cords to the permanent wiring through approved ceiling roses. In other cases terminate
the circuit cables in a box adjacent to the appliance. Supply sufficient length of flexible conduit
or box terminating circuit conductors to allow appliance to be removed for cleaning purpose
without disconnecting.
1.17.6. Fastening And Fastening Materials
a) Firmly secure in place all conduits, pipes, cable, switches, receptacles, all boxes, panels,
distribution boards, outlets and similar equipment furnished under this section. Use
expansion shields or concrete inserts with concrete or brick; toggel bolts on hollow tile or
wire lath; wood screws of adequate gauge on wood. Wood, lead or composite plugs will
not be permitted.
b) Secure all fastenings directly to the building structure. Do not secure to work of other
trades such as ceiling lath, pipes or pipe rackes, unless specified or noted otherwise.
c) Nuts, bolts, screws, washers, etc. used as terminals shall be brass. Bolt heads or nuts
exposed to view shall be chrome plated and polished.
d) All fixing in concrete or masonry shall be by means of the rawlbolts or similar, or by other
means approved by the Engineer.
e) All fixing in thick metal shall be by means of threaded bolts and further secured by locking
devices.
f) All fixing and mounting screws, bolts and nuts, if of ferrous material shall be plated or so
treated to prevent rust.
1.18. SPECIFICATION FOR SURGE PROTECTOR
Page 151 of 262

1.18.1. At all switch board the surge protector shall be designed to withstand 80kA for Category C,
40kA for Category B and 10kA for Category A.
1.18.2. The let through voltage shall be tested at 6kV or higher 1.2/50us, 3kA or higher 8/20us.
1.18.3. Full mode of protection is required i.e L - N, L - E, N - E.
1.18.4. All incoming using underground cable, the surge protection shall be or Category C or Category
B high as in British Standard BS 6651 : 1992 Appendix C or equivalent. The let through voltage
shall be 3 kV or less if the Incoming Board does not supply direct.
1.18.5. For all the distribution board the surge protectors must have a let through voltage of 1 kV or less
(line to earth) unless otherwise specified and tested as in accordance to item 2.
1.18.6. Surge protector installed at Switch Board or Distribution Board supplying to the UPS must have
a let through voltage 700 V or less.
1.18.7. For the Video and Audio signal cable the Surge Protector shall not attenuated the signal fine.
1.18.8. The Surge Protector is to be with MSB or SSB Board.
1.18.9. The Surge Protector shall be properly housed at the DB.
1.18.10. The line and neutral cable connecting the Surge Protector shall be as short as possible and
approximately 25 cm.
1.18.11. The Surge protector shall be complete with LED indicators.
2. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
2.1. GENERAL
2.1.1. Wherever it is indicated on the Drawings, all electrical accessories shall meet the requirements
of safety reliability and ease of installation and conform with their relevant B.S. Electrical
Contractor shall provide all the accessories to put the complete installation in functional
operation.
2.2. EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER
2.2.1. Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB) where specified shall be of the current operated type
and shall be designed to trip within 0.4 second and a current sensivity of 30 mA or specified
elsewhere on the drawing. They shall be of the 2 pole type for Single phase installation and 4
pole type for 3 phase installation. All breakers shall be complete with test buttons.
2.2.2. The ELCB shall be housed in a totally enclosed moulded metal case, manufactured and tested in
compliance with B.S. 4293 : 1968
2.2.3. Voltage operated type earth leakage circuit breakers will not be accepted.
2.3. CONTACTORS
2.3.1. All contactors shall comply with the B.S. 775 Part 1:1969. Contactors shall be designed to cater
for the most severe duties, involving sustained rapid operation, inching, plugging, etc.
2.3.2. Each contactor shall be fitted adequate auxiliary contacts for indications and control.
2.3.3. The contactors shall be suitable for panel mounting within the compartments of their respective
switchboards, control panels and distribution boards.-
2.3.4. Contact surfaces shall be silver-plated and protected against dust, and accidental contact of
'live" parts. For larger current ratings, contacts are preferred to be of the twin-break type.
2.3.5. Contactor armatures shall be centrally located to ensure balanced operation and equalised
pressure. Armature bearings shall be of the self-cleaning type. Means shall be provided for easy
removals & replacements of the coils.
2.3.6. Where contactors are required to be installed outside switchboards or control panels, they shall
be housed in dust-proof, pressed-steel or cast-metal casings fitted with hinged, lockable doors &
be suitable for wall- mounting or for installation on floor stands. Where contactors are exposed
to weather conditions or to the constant presence of water or dampness, they shall be
accommodated in cast-metal casings of weatherproof construction. All casings for contactor
units shall have provision for the entry & exit of circuit cables wired in conduit or cables of the
armoured multicore type, as the case may be.
2.3.7. Contactors coils shall be designed for sustained continuously energised operation without
damage, and shall operate continuously over the voltage range of +10% and - 15%.
2.4. TIME SWITCH
Page 152 of 262

2.4.1. Time switches shall be of self-starting, selfwinding, synchronous-motor-driven type.
2.4.2. The rated voltage shall be 240 volts and the rated current shall be 20A unless otherwise
specified. Time switches, unless otherwise incorporate the following:
a) A 30 hour spring reserve to drive the mechanism during electricity supply interruptions.
b) An easily replaceable cartridge fuse-link complying with B.S. 646 or B.S. 2950, inserted in
the motor circuit.
c) A day-omitting device to render in operative.
d) An ON-OFF manual switch to enable the circuit to be controlled at will without affecting
normal dial operation.
e) A 24-hour dial with one ON and one OFF lever and a single pole, single throw, switch.
2.4.3. Time switches shall be of the plug-in type, be provided with a cover of clear plastics material
and be housed in a metal enclosure.
2.5. LIGHTING SWITCHES AND COVER PLATES
2.5.1. The positions of all lighting switches indicated on the layout drawings are approximate only.
The Contractor shall therefore clarify the exact locations of all such switches with the
Supervising Engineer before commencement of the wiring installation work on site.
2.5.2. All switches shall be generally, mounted at a height of 1450 mm above finished floor level.
However, due consideration must be given to heights of tiling. No switches are allowed to be
located at the joint or junction of wall tiling, demountable partition of different finishes.
Adjacent Switches must be grouped in accordance with phase sequence or as shown on the
drawings.
2.5.3. The Contractor shall check the exact position of all switches and door swing and other fixtures
with the Architect before the installation of drops and switches. Any cost involved for alteration
resulting from failure to do so shall be borne by him.
2.5.4. Lighting switches shall be generally rated for 5A. For areas where the load exceeds 4 amp for
tungsten lights or 2 1/2 amp for fluorescent lights, light switch for these circuit shall be 10 amp
rating.
2.5.5. Except for weatherproof and dimmer switches, all switches for the internal wiring of lighting
points shall be rocker-operated, microgap silent operating type, grid pattern, single-pole, one-
way, two-way or intermediate, as required on the layout drawings.
2.5.6. For concealed conduit wiring installations, lighting switches shall be flush-mounted type, fitted
with all- insulated type cover plates in cream colour finish fixed on a recessed, B.S. 4642 boxes.
Inside workshop, plantroom, machine room or the like, industrial type of metal-clad cover plate
shall be used.
2.5.7. For surface conduit wiring installations, lighting switches. Complete with metal plate cover of
mat chrome finish to be fixed on a surface-mounted, aluminium-colour finished, metal-clad
boxes and of "MK", or other approved equal.
2.5.8. Where switches are connected to different "Phases" of the supply and are also grouped together
in one position, the switches shall be installed in a metal-clad "multiple phase" position
assembly unit, having built-in "phase" compartments.
2.6. SWITCHED SOCKET-OUTLETS
2.6.1. All outlets, generally shall be mounted at 300mm above finished floor level but in plantrooms,
substations, lift motor room and the like, they shall be mounted at 1450mm above finished floor
level or 100mm above counters or benches whichever is suitable. No outlets are allowed to be
located at the joint or junction of the wall tiling, demountable partition of different finishes.
2.6.2. All socket outlet plate shall be provided with the relevant plug, and fuse wherever necessary.
2.6.3. 5 amp sockets shall be of 3-pin shuttered type, flush pattern, all insulated and cream colour
comply to
2.6.4. B.S. 546. Metal-clad type will be applied for plant services area, such as machine room,
workshop, switchrooms etc.
2.6.5. 15 amp socket outlet shall be of 3 pin shuttered type, flush pattern, all insulated or metal-clad
comply to
2.6.6. B.S. 546.
2.6.7. 13 amp socket outlet shall be of 3-pin shuttered type, flush pattern, all insulated of cream colour
or metal-clad comply to B.S. 1363: 1976.
Page 153 of 262

2.6.8. For concealed conduit wiring system within the building switched-socket outlets complete with
the cover plate shall be fixed on a recessed B.S. 4662 box.
2.6.9. Switched socket outlet in floor shall be further recessed in mild steel box with hinged cover for
flushed mounting with finish floor level.
2.7. WEATHERPROOF SWITCHES AND SOCKET OUTLETS
2.7.1. Where lighting switches are exposed to weather conditions or to the constant presence of
moisture, such switches shall be of the galvanised, weatherproof type, which shall be surface-
mounted on walls and of "WALSALL" or other approved equivalent.
2.8. INDICATING SWITCH
2.8.1. Indicating switch shall be of flush pattern, all insulated type or metal-clad type with pilot light
and comply to B.S. 3676. Proper word shall be engraved on the cover plate to designate the
equipment served. Mounting height shall be generally 1450mm above finish floor level.
2.9. FUSE CONNECTION UNIT
2.9.1. Fuse connection unit shall be of flush pattern all insulated of cream colour or metal-clad type
with flex- outlet complete with cartridge fuse comply to B.S. 1362 it will be fixed adjacent to
the appliance to serve for. Cartridge fuse of suitable rating shall be provided for all connection
units.
2.10. BATTEN LAMP HOLDER
2.10.1. Batten lampholder shall be of the all insulated bayonet socket with "Home Office" ventilated
shield and plastic break joint ring in cream colour.
2.11. DIMMER SWITCH
2.11.1. In general the dimmer switches shall be able to cater for a minimum total incandescent lighting
load of 1,000W and be suitable for operation on a 240V., singlephase, 50Hz, AC. supply. Each
dimmer shall be of the manually operated type, fitted with a built-in 5A, H.R.C. fuse-link and be
suitable for flush mounting in walls with an all-insulated matching recessed box and white
cover plate.
3. INTERIOR LIGHTING FITTINGS & INSTALLATION
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install and connect lighting fittings, as indicated in the
Drawings. All fittings shall be suitable for non-stop operation.
3.1.2. The types of fittings for various areas are shown in the drawings. Tenders shall be based on
nominated makes.
3.1.3. A sample of each type of the lighting fittings proposed shall be submitted to the Consulting
Engineer on request.
3.2. POSITION OF LIGHT FITTINGS
3.2.1. The light fittings shall be finally positioned in the ceilings in accordance with any ceiling grid
layout & size, with the relative position and size of other services, structural beams and
obstructions or other factors which may have an effect on the light fittings position. The
drawing layout is approximate and indicative only. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that all the
light fittings and outlets are located, in accordance with the relative positions of the other
services and architectural layout mentioned above. Any further works necessary due to this
requirement shall be at the Sub Contractor's cost.
3.3. TERMINATION OF LIGHTING POINTS
3.3.1. Each surface mounted light fitting shall terminate at a B.S. junction box complete with
porcelain connectors suitable for the size and number of connections o be made at that point and
the wiring required to connect the specified fitting. All lighting points and switches shall be
earthed with its appropriate earth continuity conductor according to the I.E.E. Regulations.
3.4. FLUORESCENT FITTINGS
Page 154 of 262
The Sub-Contractor shall supply various types of light fittings as shown in the drawings & as specified
hereinafter.
3.4.1. Standard
The fluorescent fittings together with the lamps, lamp holders, switches, and other necessary
equipment shall conform to the latest British Standards in all respects with regards to design,
construction, performance, etc., as a minimum requirement.
3.4.2. Voltage Grade
All equipment shall be suitable for operation at 240 volt single phase, 50 Hz. supply.
3.4.3. Housing of Fluorescent Fittings
a) The construction for the fluorescent light fittings shall comply with B.S. 4533:2:2 and IEC
598 Part 2.
b) The housing shall be of sound rigid construction with all points designed to withstand any
sag, deformation or warping, the loads likely to be experienced during normal operation.
c) The housing shall be made from best quality Zinc electro plated sheet of thickness not less
then 20 gauge and reflectors of 22 gauge.
d) All metal works shall be rust inhibited with a phosphoric acid or similar solution to prevent
corrosion and baked with two finishing coats of super white enamel.
e) In the design of the recessed housing, consideration shall be given to the following:
i. Housing shall be compatible to the type of fittings requested.
ii. The design shall achieve as high a horizontal flux and as wide a spread as possible. The
luminous intensity distribution shall fall into approved relevant classes of British Zonal
Classification. The spread and efficiency of downward luminous flux are important
criteria in tender assessing.
f) Metal work and other components shall be jig or die formed to ensure uniformity.
Particular attention shall be paid to the finish of welds which shall be grind off and filled.
Fittings shall have no sharp edge & to ensure that deformation does not take place during
assembly.
g) All screws used in assembly of fittings shall engage in nuts or tapped holes. Self-tapping
screws are not permitted. Screw heads on the outside of fittings shall be counter-sunk to
preserve a smooth finish.
h) Fittings shall have separate enclosure for lamps and control gear and shall be so designed
that the maximum operating temperature in each shall not exceed 35°C and 40°C
respectively when the ambient temperature surrounding the fitting does not exceed 30° C.
i) Control gear shall be fixed to the back of each fitting and all bolts used for this purpose
shall be welded to prevent turning when nuts are tightened so that all control gear may be
dismantled and re installed while the carcass of the fittings remain in position.
j) Starters switches shall be mounted between the tubes in multi- lamps fittings and on the
underside above the tunes in single tube fittings. Fittings shall be fitted with diffusers as
indicated hereinafter.
k) Design of fittings and trims shall be such that no light leak are visible. Particular care in
this regard shall be paid to joints in the trim and to the fixing of the trim to the fittings
particularly at the ends. The Fitting shall be fully supported on its own.
3.4.4. Plastic Reflectors and Diffusers
Where reflectors or diffusers are specified they shall be made of the best quality materials
recommended for lighting service, non- deteriorating & colour stable, equivalent to I.C.I
Perspex or Acrylic. They shall be of adequate thickness & strength to prevent sag under normal
operating conditions.
3.4.5. Metalised Parabolic Louvres
Where metal parabolic louvres are specified they shall be made of the best quality materials
recommended for lighting service that can control glare.
3.4.6. Auxillaries Or Control Gear For Fluorescent Fittings
Ballast
a) All ballasts shall comply with B.S. 2818 Part I and be suitable for operating in circuit with
tubular fluorescent lamps which comply with B.S. 1853 and marked at TW 120°C.
b) All ballasts shall include the following features :-
i. Low current peak factor
ii. Class 'II' insulating materials
iii. Compact size.
Page 155 of 262
c) All ballasts shall be vacuum impregnated polyester with a nominal low power loss of 6W
as per schedule, silent operation type and fitted with terminal block for easy wiring.
d) The current rating of the ballasts shall be 0.43 amps.
e) Switch start ballasts shall be low power factor inductive type.
f) Separate ballast shall be used for each lamp.
g) The ballasts shall be either switch or rapid/quick start as shown.
h) Ballast shall be so designed & constructed that in normal use their performance is reliable
& without danger to the user or surroundings. The enclosures of the ballasts shall not have
any openings giving access to live parts other that those necessary for their use & working.
Lacquer or enamel is not deemed to be adequate protection or insulation for the purpose of
this requirement.
i) Parts providing protection against accidental contact shall have adequate mechanical
strength & shall not work loose in normal use. It shall not be possible to remove them
without the use of tools.
j) Screw terminals shall be so designed that provision is made for the conductor to be
clamped between two metal surfaces & that they allow connection to be made with
sufficient contact pressure without damage to the conductor.
k) A conduction will be considered to be damaged if it shows deep incisions or shearing.
l) Any terminals for external wiring shall be so placed that when the connection of the
conductors is correctly made, there is no risk of accidental contact between live parts of
opposite polarity or between such parts and accessible metal parts.
m) Screwless terminals shall comply with IEC Publication 162, Appendix F.
n) The ballast shall be moisture-resistant and shall not show any appreciable damage after
being subjected to the moisture treatment test as per B.S 2818:1981.
o) Insulation shall be adequate between live parts and external parts including fixing screws.
p) The insulation resistance measured immediately after humidity conditioning as specified in
BS 2818: 1981. Appendix A, shall be not less than 2 megaohm. Adequate inter-turn
insulation shall be provided.
q) The ballast shall be effectively screened against magnetic influence.
Capacitors
a) All capacitors shall comply with BS 2818 : Part 2 and be suitable for operating in circuit
with tubular fluorescent lamp which comply with BS 1853.
b) Capacitors shall be mechanically robust and shall be designed and constructed so as to
minimize the effects thereon of moisture in the atmosphere and of temperature changes
during use. Capacitors shall be rated to maintain the circuit power factor at not less than
0.85 lagging. In any case, the capacitor shall be not less than 3.25 Mfd per 36 Watt lamp.
c) All exposed metal parts shall be constructed of non-ferrous material or shall be protected
against rust. The enclosure shall be made up of flame resistant, seamless plastic case &
nonhygroscropic.
d) Terminations shall be of simple, quick installation type, by the use of snap-in terminal
block, suitable for accepting the size and number of conductors appropriate to the rating
and application of the capacitor.
e) Terminals and connection shall be of such form that the connection remains electrically
sound and mechanically secure under all normal conditions of service.
f) Discharge resistor of suitable voltage rating shall be connected permanently across the
capacitor terminals. The value of the discharge resistor shall be such that it will discharge
the capacitor from the peak of the d.c. voltage applied to it, to a voltage not exceeding 50V,
within 4 mm. Allowance shall be made for the maximum capacitance tolerances of the
capacitor, the tolerance of the resistor and voltage which is 10% above its rated value.
g) The insulation resistance shall be measured at room temperature with a d.c. voltage of
between 300V and 500V, applied for 1 minute between the terminals & shall have an
insulation resistance not less than 10 megaohm.
h) The capacitor shall have a built-in safety mechanism whereby in the event of extreme
overload, the capacitor goes safely into an open circuit mode.
Starters
a) All starters complete with starter bases shall comply with BS 3772 and be suitable for use
with lamps which comply with B.S 1853.
Page 156 of 262

b) Enclosures for interchangeable starters shall ensure protection against electric shocks.
Protections may be ensured either by an insulating enclosure or by an appropriate non-
metallic lining or other means which prevent accidental contact between live parts & the
enclosures.
c) Immediately after a humidity treatment test, the insulation resistance between live parts and
the metal canister of the starter shall not be less than .2 megaohm measured after 1 mm. at
500V d.c. and the starter shall be able to withstand for 1 minute without breakdown of a
sinusoidal a.c. voltage of 1500V rms. The starter shall incorporate a radio interference
suppression capacitor which shall have a value between 0.005 and 0.02 MF, connected
internally in such a maimer as to be directly in paralleled with the contacts of the starter.
Radio Interference Suppression
All fluorescent fittings shall be fitted with suitable capacitors to reduce the level of radio
interference to level as required by the "Radio Communication Regulations 1956
Accessories
Terminal blocks, nickel plated spring clips, plastic sleeves and other necessary accessories
which are required for the proper construction and safety operation of lighting fittings shall be
provided for all fittings.
Suspension
Fluorescent fittings are to be suspended as shown in the drawings. The Sub-Contractor shall
supply and install the lighting fittings complete with all necessary suspension rods and fixtures
as indicated.
Lighting Trunking
a) Generally, the trunking shall be in accordance with the description elsewhere in this
Specification for "Steel Trunking" and shall be not less than 16 SWG galvanised sheet-
steel. The trunking system used shall be as shown' in the drawings for receiving lighting
fittings on its underside. The trunking shall in addition, provide structural support for the
fittings with adequate through wiring capacity.
b) The close-top trunking shall be suspended by saddle brackets attached to down-drops from
the ceiling or roof structure as shown in the drawings. Joint pieces shall be used to hold
sections rigidly in line.
c) Brackets shall be provided to engage with the batten flanges of the trunking and to allow
the fitting to be hinged during installation, maintenance or subsequent modification of the
through wiring blocks shall be provided for interconnection and looping in.
d) Cable carriers shall be provided in each trunking section to retain the cables neatly in
position.
e) Where the fittings are not continuously mounted, the gaps shall be closed by black snap-on
PVC cover strip.
f) The trunking suspension span shall be as shown in the drawings. The maximum
permissible mid-span deflection shall be 6 mm. Additional struts/stays shall be used to
reduce the reflection.
3.4.7. Internal Wiring & Fused Terminal Block
a) Internal wiring shall be made with conductors of suitable size & type with nominal cross
sections not less than 1.0 sq.mm and a minimum insulation thickness of 0.6mm of PVC.
The wiring shall be insulated with a material capable of withstanding the maximum
temperature to which it is subjected in normal use without deterioration capable of
affecting the safety of the fittings when properly installed and connected to the supply.
b) Internal wiring shall be so situated or protected that it cannot be damaged by sharp edges,
rivets, screws and the likes or by moving parts of switches, joints, raising and lowering
devices, telescopic tube and the like. Joints and junctions in internal wiring, excluding
terminations on components, shall be easily accessible and shall be provided with
insulating covering no less effective that the insulation of the wiring.
c) Terminating for connection to "Quick Connection" terminals shall be machine made, and
shall be covered with insulated shrouds. Wiring shall be grouped within the fitting and
clipped to the housing at maximum 9" centres. Wiring shall be kept well clear of ballasts.
d) Wiring shall be brought to a terminal block in each fitting for the connection of external
active, neutral and earth conductors. A cartridge type fuse of appropriate rating shall be
provided in the terminal block.
Page 157 of 262

3.5. TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
3.5.1. Straight fluorescent lamps shall be energy-saving type, 26 mm diameter bi pin cap, white
deluxe. Philip colour code 33, fluorescent lamps which comply with BS 1853 unless otherwise
specified.
3.6. LAMPHOLDERS FOR FLUORESCENT FITTING
3.6.1. The lampholders for straight fluorescent lamps shall be spring loaded rotor type robust and well
designed construction suitable for mounting standard by-pin lamps. The lampholders shall
provide not only firm lamp support and good electrical contact, but also be designed so that the
lamps can easily be removed during maintenance.
3.6.2. Each lampholder shall be provided with an earthing contact for earthing the metal caps of the
fluorescent tube.
3.7. OPERATING TEMPERATURES
3.7.1. Lighting fittings, their components, internal wiring and external wiring supplied with the fittings
& supporting surfaces shall not attain excessive temperatures in conditions of normal or
specified abnormal use.
3.7.2. External parts of insulation materials providing protection against electric shock and parts of
insulation material retaining live parts in position shall be sufficiently heat-resistant and self-
extinguishing.
3.8. EARTHING
3.8.1. Metal parts which are accessible before the fitting is mounted, or are accessible when the fitting
is opened for lamp replacement or cleaning purposes, which may become live in the event of an
insulation fault, shall be permanently and reliably connected to an earthing terminal or earthing
contact. This connection shall be of low resistance and in no case shall the resistance exceed 0.5
ohm.
3.8.2. Brass screwed earthing terminals shall be provided and comply with Section 1.6 B.S 4533: Part
1. Their clamping means shall be adequately locked against accidental loosening and it shall not
be possible to loosen them without the aid of a tool.
3.8.3. All parts of an earth terminals shall be such as to minimize the danger of electrolytic corrosion
resulting from contact with the earth conductor or any other metal in contact with them.
3.8.4. Either the screw or the other part of the earth terminal shall be made of brass or other non-
rusting metal and the contact surfaces shall be base metal. It shall not be possible to loosen the
earth terminal screw by hand.
3.9. PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
3.9.1. All live parts shall be effectively screened when the fitting is fully assembled for use or open to
the extent necessary for lamp or replacement of starter. Protection against electric shock shall be
independent of mounting and of the position of the fitting and shall be maintained after the
removal of all parts, except lamps which can be removed by hand.
3.9.2. Covers and other parts providing protection against electric shock shall have adequate
mechanical strength and shall be reliably secured so that they will not work loose with normal
handling.
3.10. SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY AND "KELUAR" LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
3.10.1. Each unit shall have a sealed heavy duty nickel cadmium battery, a constant current charger, a
silicon transistor inverter with a solid state changeover circuit and a 13W fluorescent tube and
be virtually maintenance free. The unit shall be mounted in a metal housing Stove enamelled to
B.S. 631 and with prismatic diffuser. The unit shall be provided with a mains healthy light
emitting diode, indicator and a test button to simulate mains failure. In the event of mains
failure, it shall be able to provide a minimum of 3 hours emergency lighting after a 12 hour
recharging. All self-contained emergency lighting luminaries must be of types approved for use
by the Jabatan Bomba Malaysia (JBM) and JPEM.
3.10.2. "KELUAR" Luminaries shall also be type approved and their locations determined by Jabatan
Bomba Malaysia (JBM).
Page 158 of 262

4. EARTHING SYSTEM
4.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.1. All earthing installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with British CP 1013, the IEE
Regulations, 15 Edition and requirements of TNB. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor
to fully acquaint himself with these requirements.
4.1.2. There shall be separate earthing systems for Electrical LT installation, lightning protection,
isolated earth for computer/communication system, Telecom main distribution frame (MDF)
and localised earth points at each building and lighting columns.
4.2. MAIN EARTHING BARS
4.2.1. Main earthing bars shall be installed at the Consumer Switch Room.
4.2.2. The main earthing bar shall be hard drawn high conductivity copper conductors of dimensions
51mm x 6.25 mm and length to suit the number of inter-connecting tapes. The earthing bars
shall be installed in the switchrooms with suitable brass bolts and fittings. Sufficient space shall
be allowed to facilitate connections. The diameter of the bolt holes in the bars shall not exceed
1/4 of the width of the bars. Ferrous screws, bolts and fittings shall not be used.
4.3. INTERCONNECTING TAPES
4.3.1. Interconnecting conductors shall be copper tapes with cross-sectional area not less than the
dimensions as recommended in Table 3 of C.P. 1013.
4.3.2. All earthing conductors shall be run in approved positions, and fixed in an approved manner
generally along square symmetrical lines using 'Furse No. 44' gunmetal saddles or approved
equivalent for securing at intervals not exceeding 1 metre apart. All conductors shall be in full
unbroken lengths unless unavoidable and with the consent of the Engineer, in which case the
joint shall be arranged to be placed in a visible and accessible position.
4.3.3. All tee-joints and connection faces shall be brazed or tinned, rigidly riveted and soldered. All
connections to electrical equipment shall be made by a bolted connection. Conductors and joints
that are exposed to corrosion shall be protected by the application of approved anti- corrosion
paint or serving or sheath.
4.3.4. The earth connections for all sections of the installation shall be electrically continuous
throughout. All cable armour/tapes and glands shall be bonded to the earth system.
4.3.5. The Main Earthing System shall be interconnected in a loop with the two ends of the loop
connected to the Main Earthing Bar.
4.4. EARTHING PITS
4.4.1. The earthing electrodes shall be of round 16 mm diameter copper-weld or copper-bond steel-
core rods in standard lengths of 1.83 m. The total earth resistance measured at the main earthing
bar for electrical installation with the interconnecting tapes disconnected shall not exceed 1
ohm. The Contractor shall allow in his tender the cost of the necessary number of earthing
electrodes, points and interconnections to obtain the required earth resistance value of 1 ohm.
The number of earthing points indicated in the drawings shall only serve as a guide and shall in
no way imply that the earthing points are sufficient to obtain the value of I ohm. Additional
claim by the Contractor on this item will not be allowed.
4.4.2. Concrete chambers with bitumen coated steel cover shall be installed over the earthing points.
The earthing points shall be interconnected by copper tapes clamped on the top of the
electrodes.
4.5. PROTECTION AGAINST EARTH-LEAKAGE CURRENT
4.5.1. Exposed metal-work of all apparatus other than double insulated appliances and all non current
carrying metal-work systems including cable sheaths and armour, conduits, ducts, trunkings,
boxes, etc., and earth pins of socket-outlets shall be effectively earthed in accordance with Reg.
D22 of the I.E.E. regulations. Where it is not possible to obtain effective earthing, the use of
current or voltage operated earth-leakage circuit-breakers to prevent danger arising from earth-
leakage currents may be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer. Earth continuity conductors
shall be in accordance with Reg. D28 to D30 of the I.E.E. Regulations and earthing system shall
conform to C.P. 1013.
Page 159 of 262

4.6. EQUIPMENT, MOTORS, SUBMAINS AND SUB-CIRCUIT EARTHING
4.6.1. The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all earth continuity wiring for effective earthing
of the equipment, motors, submains and sub-circuits installation in accordance with the
requirements of the I.E.E. Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings.
4.6.2. All circuit points and equipment shall be earthed with the appropriate earth-continuity-
conductor (E.C.C.), the minimum size of which shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Table 02M of the I.E.E. Regulations. E.C.C. having a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 and under
shall be protected throughout with PVC insulation coloured green and yellow or green. All
conduit runs shall have their own appropriate size E.C.C. corresponding to the maximum
current capacity of the subcircuit. All final sub-circuit earth continuity conductors shall
terminate back at their respective distribution board earthing terminals.
4.6.3. For all 3 phase submains in trunkings, a separate copper tape of appropriate size corresponding
to its current capacity shall be maintained for the full length of the trunking. All submains
earthing conductors shall terminate back at their corresponding switchboard earthing terminals.
5. LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
5.1. GENERAL
5.1.1. This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the supply, delivery.
installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved working order and maintenance
during the Defects Liability Period of the underground cabling work in accordance with the
specifications, Supplementary Notes, Bill of Quantities, Conditions of Contracts, Drawing etc.
5.2. TYPES OF CABLES
5.2.1. This specification shall cover the following types of cables:-
a) PVC/SWA/PVC CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with MS
4 :18 or BS 6346 and shall have high conductivity plain copper stranded conductors
insulated with PVC suitable for a voltage of 600/1000 V laid together & bedded with PVC,
armoured with galvanized steel wires and sheathed with PVC.
b) PILCDSTAS CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BS
6480 Part 1 and shall have high conductivity plain copper stranded conductors, insulated
with strong long fibred paper, uniform in texture, free from metallic particles, mass
impregnated with non draining insulating oil compound suitable for a voltage of 600/1000
V, lead alloy sheathed, double steel type armoured and served.
c) PILCDS CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 6480
Part I and shall have high conductivity plain copper stranded conductors, insulated with
strong long fibred paper, uniform in texture, free from metallic particles, mass impregnated
with non draining insulating oil compound suitable for a voltage of 600/1000 V lead alloy
sheathed and served.
5.3. CABLE ROUTES
5.3.1. Cable routes shown in the Drawings are for tendering purpose only. The Electrical Contractor
shall, after consulting the S.O.'s Representative peg out the cable routes for the approval of the
S.O. 's Representative prior to excavation of the cable trenches. The program of work for
excavation of cable trenches, laying of cables, reinstatement of trenches etc. shall be submitted
to the S.O.'s Representative for approval one week before execution of the work.
5.4. LENGTH OF CABLE
5.4.1. The length of cable each indicated in the Drawings and / or Bill of Quantities is for tendering
purpose only. The Electrical Contractor shall ascertain the length of each cable required before
ordering. Actual length of each cable installed shall be measured on site & the Electrical
Contractor shall be paid according to the rate in the Contract. However, the rates quoted shall
include wastage due to cutting to lengths, terminations etc.
5.5. CABLE TRENCH
Page 160 of 262

5.5.1. Unless otherwise specified, cable trenches shall be 750mm deep. The trenches shall be
sufficient width to enable provision of adequate spacing between cables but in any case shall not
be less than 450mmwide.
5.5.2. Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall have vertical sides which shall be
timbered where necessary so as to avoid subsidence and damage. The bottom of the trenches
shall be firm and of smooth contour and any other objects likely to damage the cable sheathing
shall be removed. The material excavated from the trenches shall be placed or removed so as to
prevent nuisance or damage to adjacent areas or buildings.
5.5.3. The trenches excavation and filling in shall be so executed that all roads, walls, sewers, drains,
pipes, cables, structures etc. shall be reasonably secured against risk of subsidence damage.
Provision shall be made, during excavation and until interim restoration has been completed, for
reasonable access of persons and vehicles to the areas of buildings adjacent to the trenches.
5.5.4. The Electrical Contractor shall provide pumps and other appliances for the necessary pumping
required for the disposal of water so as to prevent any risk of the cables and other materials to
be laid in the trenches being detrimentally affected. Where necessary, bailing shall be provided.
5.5.5. Where trenches pass from a footway to a roadway or at other position where a change of level is
necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually.
5.6. CABLE DUCT
5.6.1. At road crossings, sewerage pipe crossing, water pipe crossings, paved areas, concrete areas,
and concrete areas and where specified by the S.O's Representative cables shall be protected by
galvanized steel pipes buried to a depth of 900 mm below finished ground level. The pipes shall
be of heavy duty type, complying with BS 1387 and complete with screwed and socketed joints.
Unless otherwise specified the pipes shall be 150 mm in diameter. Where it is necessary to cross
drains, culverts or similar obstruction which is to deep for the cables to be buried below,
galvanized steel pipes shall be supported at each end in a concrete block and shall project
through the blocks into the ground at a depth of at least 750 mm. All ducts shall be extended at
least 600mm beyond paved areas, concrete areas, drains, road crossing, pipe crossing etc.
5.6.2. Cable entering a building shall be protected by pitch fibre ducts of 150mm diameter, complying
with BS 4108, completed with bend pieces, buried to a depth of 90 mm and encased with 75
mm of concrete all round. The ducts shall be installed with a gradient so as to drain away any
water in the ducts. All ducts passing through walls shall be effectively sealed and made water -
tight.
5.6.3. Unless otherwise approved by the S.O 's Representative, the number of cables installed in each
duct shall be such that the space factor shall not be less than 60%. A draw wire shall be
provided for each duct.
5.6.4. Unless specified to be provided by others, the above galvanized steel pipes and / or pitch fibre
ducts shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor whether they are shown in the Drawing or
not.
5.7. TRAFFIC SAFETY AND CONTROL
5.7.1. When work is being carried out beside any public road or other existing road, warning signs
shall be erected. The form placing and light of the warning signs must comply with all local &
national regulations and safety codes for road works.
5.7.2. Where it is necessary for an trench or pit to be left open overnight, ample flashing warning
lamps shall be placed at each end and at intervals not greater than 10 metres. In built up areas
barricades shall be erected along the length of the trench or pit in addition to warning lamp.
5.7.3. Where necessary, flag men shall stationed at strategic locations to control traffic.
5.7.4. The trench shall then be backfilled with earth and shall be consolidated after every 150mm of
backfilling using a mechanical rammer. An orange coloured, multi-strand nylon rope of
minimum 6mm diameter shall be laid at a depth of 300 mm along the trench to identify the
cable route. At every 10 metres interval, an extra 2 metres length of nylon rope shall be coiled
and laid. The finished surface shall be left proud by 50 mm to allow for subsidence and the
Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of any surplus to a position indicated
by the S.O 's Representative.
5.7.5. The surface of the refilled trench shall be temporarily reinstated and maintained in a thoroughly
safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil achieved. As soon as the soil has
Page 161 of 262

consolidated, the trenches shall be made good to the original conditions to the satisfaction of the
S.O 's Representative.
5.8. CABLE INSTALLED IN PRE-CAST CONCRETE TRENCHES
5.8.1. Method of installation of cables in pre-cast concrete trenches shall be in accordance with
Method Type L, Type Mor Type N of Table 9A of IEE Wiring Regulations, 15th Edition.
However, if the method is not specified, the cables shall be installed as directed by the S.O's
Representative.
5.8.2. Cables laid at the bottom of the trenches shall be in accordance with Method Type L. of Table
9A IEE Wiring Regulations, 15th Edition. Cables installed on the trench wall shall be in
accordance with Method M or Type N of Table 9A of IEE 'Wiring Regulations, 15th Edition
and the cables shall be secured on the cable tray by means of saddles at suitable intervals. In the
case of single core cable, non ferrous saddle shall be used.
5.8.3. The cable trays shall be fabricated from perforated hot dipped galvanized sheet finished in an
orange enamel. The minimum thickness of the sheet steel used shall be 1.5 mm for cable
thickness of the sheet steel used shall be 1.5 mm for cable tray with width up to 300 mm and
shall be 2.0 mm for width exceeding 300 mm. The cable tray shall be supported at least 25 mm
from the trench wall by mild steel brackets at 600 mm intervals. The bracket shall be anti-rust
treated and painted with one coat of primer. Samples of cable tray and bracket shall be
submitted to the S.O' s Representative for approval prior to installation.
5.8.4. To provide electrical continuity, all cable joints shall be bridged by means of tinned copper tape
of dimension not less than 25 mm x 3 mm. All saddles for cables on cable trays shall be
installed by bolts, washers and nuts. All tees, intersection units, adaptor units etc. shall be
factory manufactured. The trenches inside the buildings shall be filled with clean sand up to a
level above the cable ducts.
5.9. CABLE RUN ON WALLS AND UNDER FLOOR SLABS
5.9.1. Cable run on walls and under floor slabs shall be mounted on perforated hot dipped galvanised
sheet steel cable trays. The construction and finished of the cable trays and the way of
installation of the cables on the cable trays shall be as described in Item 8.1 above.
5.9.2. The cable trays shall be suspended from floor slabs by hangers or mounted on wall by brackets
at 600 mm interval. The material and finishes of the hangers, brackets and other suspending and
supporting structures shall be as that described for brackets in Item 8.1 above.
5.9.3. Where cable trays pass through floors or fire resistant walls, the surrounding hole shall be
sealed to full thickness of the floor or wall with non-hygroscopic fire-resisting material of
minimum 2 hour fire rating approved by Jabatan Bomba Malaysia.
5.10. CABLE TERMINATION AND JOINTING
5.10.1. Unless otherwise permitted, all cable termination and jointing works shall only be carried out in
the presence of the S.O.'s Representative. A plastic laminated plate engraved with details such
as size of cable, number of core, date of commissioning, date of jointing, length of cable,
distance of cable joint etc. shall be securely fixed near the termination.
5.11. TERMINATION OF PVC INSULATED ARMOURED CABLE
5.11.1. PVC/SWNPVC cable shall be provided with compression cable gland for termination. The
cable gland shall be of gunmetal or brass type and shall grip both the inner and outer PVC
sheath of the cable and so designed that any strain on the cable is taken by the steel wire
armouring which shall be effectively sealed between the gland itself and the outer cable sheath.
5.12. TERMINATION OF PAPER INSULATED CABLE
5.12.1. Paper insulated cables, unless otherwise specified, shall be terminated by the heat shrinkable
method.
5.12.2. The cables shall be tested for moisture before termination is commenced. Samples of paper both
from the layer nearest to and furthest from the conductor shall be immersed in transformer oil or
paraffin wax, heated to a temperature of approximately 115 C. If any residual moisture is
present this will be immediately detected by bubbling. Samples of paper should be tested singly
and should not be touched by hand but gripped in a pair of tweezers. Phasing and insulation
resistance tests shall be taken on each length of cable laid before termination is commence.
Page 162 of 262
5.12.3. The heat shrinkable termination materials used shall be supplied in a complete kit to suit various
sizes of cable and to provide stress control, non tracking and environmentally sealed
termination. It shall consist of high permittivity, high resistivity, heat shrinkable, stress control.
UV stable, non-tracking polymeric materials and heat activated sealant to prevent ingress of
moisture and contamination. The termination shall meet the performance test of IEC 112, IEC
446 and IEC 507 section 3. It shall also have the following performance characteristics:-
(a) AC. Voltage withstand for 15 minutes, 50Hz : 4 KV phase to earth
(b) AC. Voltage withstand for 4 hours, 50 Hz : 3 KV phase to earth
(c) Impulse voltage withstand 10 positive and 10 negative, : 8 KV peak phase to earth
1.2/50 micro seconds
(d) Continuous AC. Voltage : 1.5 KV phase to earth
(e) Insulation resistance between phase conductor and ground : 1000 M. OHM or greater
5.13. CABLE JOINTING
5.13.1. The type of cable boxes, compound and jointing materials used shall be factory manufactured.
Every cable joint shall be started and finished on the same day. Whenever cables are to be
jointed in the open during wet weather conditions the Electrical Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions to prevent moisture getting into the cables. When cable sheaths is used as
earth continuity conductor, the glands must have necessary contact surfaces to provide a low
resistance path under fault conditions. Phasing and insulation resistance tests shall be taken
before jointing is commenced.
5.13.2. Core numbers printed on the papers shall be observed when jointing and whenever possible
such numbers shall be maintained throughout the system, Core number 'O','1', '2' and '3' shall
denote as neutral, red, yellow and blue phases respectively. In the case of two core cable, numb
23 '1' shall denote the phase conductor and 'O' the neutral. Crossing of the core in the boxes
shall be avoided wherever possible but connections shall be consistent with the foregoing
requirements. The jointing of cable shall be undertaken only by competent and fully
experienced jointer.
5.14. CABLE MARKER
5.14.1. Cable marker with lettering and sign as shown in Appendix T shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor at every change in direction of underground cable routes & at every 15 m on straight
run. Cable markers shall be of heavy duty reinforced concrete construction & approved by the
S.O's Representative.
5.14.2. The cable marker shall be trapezoidal block with 10 mm square top face, 150 mm square bottom
face and 400 mm in height as shown in appendix 3.
5.14.3. The top face shall be indented with bold lettering 'L.V.' and directional sign indicating the
direction / directions of the cable route. The cable marker shall be buried to a depth of 300 mm.
Cable joint marker of similar construction but with the lettering and sign as shown in Appendix
2 shall be provided and installed at every cable joint in the similar manner.
5.15. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
5.15.1. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the testing of the cables. Tests shall include
continuity, phasing out and insulation resistance between conductors and between conductors
and sheath of employing a 500 volts insulation tester. A copy of test results certified by
competent personnel shall be submitted to the S.O 's Representative. The date of commissioning
shall be agreed by the S.O. s Representative and the Electrical Contractor shall ensure that the
installation is safe before the cable is energised.
5.16. MAINTENANCE
5.16.1. During the Defects Liability Period the Electrical Contractor shall perform maintenance work
for the complete cabling and associated work. All work labour, materials, tools and parts
necessary to rectify the defects due to manufacturing or installation fault shall be supplied and /
or executed at no extra cost to the Government. The maintenance work shall be carried out as
soon as the Electrical Contractor has been informed by S.O.'s Representative.
5.16.2. The work to be performed shall include but not limited to the following :-
a) Replace or make good any defective cables, cable joints and cable terminations.
b) Replace any broken or defective cable markers.
Page 163 of 262
c) Making good any damage to building, concrete areas, slopes, drains, culverts, existing
cables, pipes etc which had not been properly made good arising out of his work.
d) Any other work deemed necessary by the S.O.'s Representative.
5.17. AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
5.17.1. Within three calendar months after the practical completion of the contract, one set of true to
scale negatives (110 / 115qm / sq.m) and four set of prints showing the cable routes with
reference to easily recognizable buildings and structures, size arid type of cables, location and
type of joint etc shall be submitted. The drawing size shall be AO or Al unless otherwise
approved by S.O 's Representative.
a) Site Plan
b) Schematic Wiring Diagram and Electrical Layout Plans
c) Layout plans of cable routes and earthing points with reference to easily recognisable
buildings and structures.
5.17.2. These drawings shall be properly stenciled and shall have at the lower right hand corner the
Electrical Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number, title
and any other particulars as required by the S.O 's Representative and the following particulars
:-
5.17.3. If the drawing submitted are not acceptable by the S.O' s representative, the Electrical
Contractor shall amend and re-submit the drawing within two weeks from the date of return oft
the drawings,
a) Installation manual.
b) Operation manual
c) Service and maintenance manual
d) Part list
e) Product data and catalogue
f) Test certificates.
5.17.4. Each of the above sets of prints together with the manuals shall be in a stiff cover ring file.
Special tool- required the operation, service and maintenance of ACB, MCCB and other
equipment shall also be provided.
5.17.5. The cost of all these prints, manual, tools etc. is deemed to be included in the Contract.
6. SATALLITE MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
6.1. GENERAL
6.1.1. The MATV System comprising Antenna, Channelised Head-End Amplifier, Modulators,
Splitters, Directional couplers, Lighting Arrestors, TV/FM Outlet, cabling Network and other
associated equipment as specified in the Tender Drawing or not shown but required to complete
the working of the System shall be supplied, installed and commissioned successfully by the
Sub-Contractor under this sub-contract.
6.1.2. Tenderer must make sure that All equipment and materials used for installation will be of the
same make and type to ensure uniformity of standards and compositions.
6.2. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND REQUIREMENT
6.2.1. The MATV System so supplied and installed shall provide High Quality Video & Audio
reception of monochrome and colour T.V. signals.
6.2.2. All T.V. signals shall be free from ghost, snowing, hum. Flutter and cross modulation and able
receive on the PAL colour system within the present VHF and UHF Band inclusive of Teletext
used by the Commercial and National television Stations.
6.2.3. The Sub-Contractor shall provide Field Strength meter and Portable Colour T.V. receiver for
use during acceptance Tests.
6.2.4. The MATV System shall conform to the following requiremenst at each T.V wall outlets:-
i) Signal to Noise Ratio : -45dB or Better
ii) Mains Supply Hum : -60dB (below the picture carrier level)
iii) The Sum of All Ghost and Echo Effects : -36dB (below the picture carrier level)
iv) Nominal output impedance at each T.V : 75 ohms (unbalance)
outlet point
Page 164 of 262

v) Signal level (RMS) at each T.V. outlet : 66 dBuV (minimum output)
point : 84 dBuV (maximum output) under
normal circumstances
: 78 dBuV or more to overcome direct
pickup problem at location near
transmitting station
vi) Radiation of signal at a distance of 3 : shall not exceed 50uv/m from any point
metre in the system
vii) Variation over a signal T.V. channel : +/- 2dB
relative to Vision Carrier Frequency
viii) Signal to Hum Ratio : 46dB minimum
6.2.5. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the proposed system performance shall be free from any
interference or being interfered by other radiated signal source.
6.3. ANTENNA
6.3.1. The Antenna shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminium or anodized metal which are not
susceptible to rusting and shall have characteristic impedance of 75 ohms.
6.3.2. The mast or pole shall be made from galvanized steel painted with 2 coats of anti-rust paint and
1 coat of other Water-Proofing compound to the approval of the Consultant. The Antenna
Master and the Antenna Arrays shall be designed to withstand a wind velocity of 100Km/h.
6.3.3. Individual Antenna shall be provided for each of the T.V Channel RTM 1, RTM 2, TV 3, SBC
8 and SBC 12. In addition an FM channel Antenna shall be incorporated. If required for aerials
to be mounted on the same mast the Antenna shall be separated by at least 1.8m to achieve
minimum interaction.
6.3.4. Lighting conductors shall be installed for the masts and connected to the main lighting
protection system by means of 25mm x 3mm cooper tape and connections shall be sprayed with
silicon sealant.
6.3.5. Location of the Antenna shall be located at the roof where reception is at its best. However, the
exact location and details of mounting the mast and stay cable shall be submitted to the
Consultant for approval prior to the installation.
6.4. ANTENNA TRANSFORMERS
6.4.1. Antenna Transformers, if required shall be provided and attached to the aerial as built-in
balancing transformers.
6.5. CHANNELISED HEAD-END AMPLIFIER
6.5.1. The Channelised Head-End Amplifier System shall consist of individual single channel
amplifier for FM, RTM 1, RTM 2, TV 3, SBC 5, SBC 8, SBC 12, 2nos In-House Video
Channel and 4 nos In-House Music Channel.
6.5.2. The single Channel Amplifier shall have Automatic Gain Control. Broad band Amplifier if
required shall be used for repeaters and for better distribution.
6.5.3. The bandwidth of the signal Channel Amplifier shall be 7MHz +/- 0.25MHz and incoroorating a
15dB gain reduction.
6.5.4. Single Channel Amplifier, power supply unit shall be of modular design type, easily plugged-in
or removed for easier maintenance. If Channel Converters are required it shall be of modular
design type house in the same amplifier rack.
6.5.5. The input and output impedance of the amplifier shall be 75 ohms unbalance and output
capabilities of the channel amplifier shall be greater than 127 dBuV or T.V. channel and 117
dBuV for FM channel.
6.5.6. The Power Supply Unit shall be of modular design type and shall have stabilized output voltage
of less that 2% with main supply of 230 +/- 10 %.
6.6. SPLITTER
6.6.1. Line splitters shall be of transformer type and resistive type shall not be permitted under any
circumstances.
6.6.2. Splitters shall be fabricated in or on a metal enclosure to minimize the affects of induction and
radiation and shall be fitted with approved type connectors.
Page 165 of 262
6.7. TAP-OFF
6.7.1. Line Tap-Off shall be of transformer type & resistive type shall not be permitted under any
circumstances.
6.8. OUTLET
6.8.1. Wall Outlet and shall be installed and positions as shown on the Drawings. The outlets and shall
be concealed mounted type complete with Frequency Dividing Network and distinctively
labeled. Outlet and shall have a 75 ohms impedance. Unbalance, Safety blocking capacitor rated
at 24V shall be incorporated into the outlet. Isolation between any two FM/ TV shall be better
that 26dB and between FM and channel shall be better that 26dB.
6.9. CABLING AND WIRING
6.9.1. All coaxial cable shall have a 75 ohms impedance copper wire with attenuation loss of not
exceeding 6dB / 100m for main drops and 12dB / 100 for secondary ohms pressured at
230mHz.
6.9.2. The coaxial cable shall be polythene single plain cooper inner conductor and cooper screed and
an outer PVC sheath for protection.
6.9.3. Taped joints coaxial cable are not permitted & all joints shall be via approved low loss coaxial
connectors.
6.9.4. All cabling shall be run in ¾" PVC pipe for concealed cabling and G.I conduit or metal trunking
for cabling running on surface.
6.10. TESTING & COMMISSIONING
6.10.1. The Sub-Contractor shall carry out an output level measurement at each and every outlet. The
exact method of measurement shall be proposed to the Consultant. All Test shall be witnessed
by the Consultant and 6 copies of the test results be submitted for records.
6.10.2. In the event of the component units and / or cables failure in such test and / or system proposed
cannot meet the requirements specified herein due to the usage of the inconsistent components
units or cables, the Sub-Contractor shall redesign the system or replace with proper components
units or cables and re-submit to the Consultant for final approval before the installation
commenced. Any extra cost incurred by such redesign or replacement pf components units and
cables shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor with no extra charges to the Employer.
7. CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS
7.1. All devices shall have voltage ratings and frequency suitable for the supply characteristics to which they
are applied and shall conform to the latest British Standard Specifications in all respect with regard to
designs, constructions, performances and tests. Devices manufactured in accordance with other
technical specifications will only be considered if Test Certificates issued by KEMA or other
recognized testing authorities are submitted to show their full compliance with British Standard and
ASTA rules.
7.2. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, all device shall withstand a minimum breaking capacity of 3 1
MVA at415 volt, 50 Hz for a duration of 3.0 second.
7.3. Air Circuit Breakers shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of metal-clad, flush mounted, horizontal draw out isolation and air break type.
b) They shall comply fully with BS 3659 and applicable parts of BS
c) They shall consist of quick-make, quick-break, mechanically and electrically trip free mechanism
arranged to give double break in all poles simultaneously and equipped with a direct acting, dual
magnetic series, or built-in current transformer type over current release.
d) Their dual over current release shall be arranged for inverse time current characteristics in the
overload range, and for instantaneous tripping without intentioned time delay in the short circuit
range.
e) They shall have self-reset under-voltage release with adjustable time delay connected to the line
side for tripping the breaker either on falling voltage (adjustable between 20% to 65% of nominal)
or loss of incoming supply.
Page 166 of 262

f) Their tripping mechanism shall be stable and not capable of being opened by shocks or jars. They
shall be equipped with independent manual push button trip by means of movement of a latching
mechanism.
g) Their closing mechanism shall be of store energy, independent manual closing type.
h) They shall be provided with contacts of a type removing arching duty from the main contact
surfaces. All contacts shall be of renewable type.
i) Each pole shall be complete with an arc chute and interpole barriers to reduce arching time, rapid
deionization of the arc & guard against flash over during maximum breaking capacity interruptions.
j) Their operating mechanisms and carriages shall be equipped with position indicators and interlock
devices as follows:-
i. Prevent withdrawal of breaker while the breaker is in the closed position.
ii. Prevent the closure of breaker while the carriage is in any position between "fully isolated"
and "fully home".
iii. Prevent opening of door while breaker is closed.
k) Provision shall be made so that it is possible to operate the breaker mechanism, if required for
inspection and testing purposes, when the breaker is fully isolated.
l) They shall be equipped with additional six numbers of auxiliary switches of double break design,
independently adjustable to either "normally open" or "normal closed" type and capable of setting
for early or late operation.
m) Mechanical interlocks, where specified, shall be made of code key type, having engraved-type lock
and removable key arranged to mechanically operate the trip mechanism latch so that the breaker
can only be closed when the key is trapped in the lock.
n) Electrical interlocks where specified shall be controlled by means of operation of auxiliary
switches of another breakers designed to cut out the closing coils & mechanism of the prevent
breakers.
o) Where used as the tie-breaker, they shall be equipped with electrical interlocks & mechanical
interlock so that it is not possible for the tiebreaker to close with its associated main incoming
supply breaker closed.
7.4. Moulded case circuit breakers shall be selected in accordance with the following:
a) They shall consist of manually operated, quick-make, quick-break, mechanically trip free operating
mechanism for simultaneous operation of all poles, with contacts, de-ion arc interrupters & trip
elements for each pole, all enclosed in moulded glass fibre polyester resin cases.
b) They shall comply fully with BS 3871 : Part 2.
c) Their tripping units shall be of thermal-magnetic type having bimetallic elements for time delay
overload protection and magnetic elements for short circuit protection.
d) They shall be manually operable by means of toggle type handle having "tripped" position midway
between the "off' and "on" position. The toggle type handle shall also be permanently inscribed
with position indicator to show actual status of breakers.
e) They shall be equipped with ambient temperature compensating features extending to 45°C.
f) Where installed in switchboards having a symmetrical breaking current exceeding 40 KA at 415V,
50Hz they shall be equipped with current limiting device of either a magnetic repulsion moving
contact type or a permanent self resetting powder fuse type. The current limiting devices shall in
every cases, be capable of interrupting a symmetrical breaking current exceeding 50 KA at 415
Volt, 50 Hz.
g) The current limiting devices shall co-ordinate with the normal trip mechanism so that all fault &
overload currents occurring within the safe capability of the breakers shall cause the breakers to
open, and all current occurring beyond the capability of the breakers shall cause the operation of
the current limiting devices.
h) Frame size exceeding 800 Amp shall, unless otherwise specified, be of withdrawal type & having
interchargeable trips.
i) Frame size of 600 Amp and below shall be of "bolted-in" with non interchargeable trips.
j) Frame size of 400 Amp and above shall have thermal and adjustable magnetic trip at the external
case.
7.5. Miniature circuit breakers where indicated shall only be used for distribution switchboard having an
interrupting symmetrical current not exceeding 5,000 Amp at 240V, 50 Hz. They shall further be
selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of quick-make, quick-break , trip free mechanism with silver tungsten contacts, de-
ion arc interrupters, trip elements all enclosed in moulded phenolic plastic case.
Page 167 of 262
b) They shall comply fully with BS 3871 : Part 1.
c) Their tripping elements shall be of thermal magnetic type having an instantaneous short circuit and
inverse time over current characteristic.
d) They shall be manually operable by means of toggle type handles having visual indication of
whether the breakers are opened, closed or tripped.
e) They shall be equipped with spring clamp at line terminal for "plug-in" to the live busbar of the
distribution switchboard and pressure type terminal for outgoing circuits.
7.6. Earth leakage circuit breakers shall be only used for distribution switchboard having an interrupting
symmetrical current not exceeding 5,000 Amp at 240 Volt, 50 Hz. They shall be either of voltage
operated type or current operated type selected in accordance with the earthing conditions of the
relevant parts of the I.E.E. Regulations. They shall further be selected in accordance with the
following:-
a) They shall be manually operable by means of test push button and toggle type handless with visual
indication for "on-off' switching.
b) They shall be equipped with sere type cable terminals at both end of the casin g. Cable terminals
shall be covered by moulded phenolic plastic with knockouts for top, bottom or rear cable entry.
c) Voltage operated earth leakage circuit breaker shall of double pole, having the trip coils, trip
mechanism, testing resistor, double break main contracts discharge gaps, all encased in moulded
phenolic plastic case and comply with BS 842.
d) Current operated earth leakage circuit breaker shall be of either double pole or triple pole and
neutral type having all the conductors. The trip coils, trip mechanism current transformers, main
contacts and testing resistors shall be encased in moulded phenolic plastic case and comply with
BS 842. Trip sensitively shall not exceed 500 mA and operation shall be within 0.1 sec.
7.7. Fuses witches and switch fuses shall be selected in accordance with the following:
a) They shall be of totally enclosed, metalclad, flush or surface mounting double air break, quick
make and quick-break type.
b) They shall fully comply with BS 3815.
c) They shall be equipped with operating handles, positive "on-off' indicators, mechanical door
interlocks. Doors shall be dust proofed by rubber or plastic seals.
d) They shall be equipped with replaceable HRC cartridge type fuses for overload and short circuit
protection.
e) HRC cartridge type fuses shall consist of moulded phenolic plastic type fuse holder having
shrouded base contacts with provision for busbar mounting and front wiring. The fuse links and
carrier shall comply with BS 88 Part I and Part 2.
7.8. Switches and isolators shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of totally enclosed, metal-clad, double air-break, quick-break and quick-make type
and arranged to break all poles simultaneously.
b) They shall comply fully with BS 861: Part I and Part 2 and relevant parts of BS 3078.
c) They shall be equipped with manual operating handles, positive "on-off' indicators & mechanical
door interlocks.
d) They shall capable of sustaining load making & load breaking duties of their normal rated current.
e) Switches where used for control proposes shall be of rotary and all insulated type complying with
relevant section of BS 9563.
f) Switches used for motor circuits and control shall be able to sustain switching duties at lock rotor
condition.
8. CABLES, BUSBAR TRUNKING, CABLE ACCESSORIES & WIRING DEVICES
8.1. All cables, busbars trunkings & wiring accessories shall be obtained from approved manufactures and
shall be manufactured and tested to the relevant British Standard Specifications and the requirements of
the Local Testing Authority.
8.2. Multicore cables and busbars trunkings shall have colour identifications to distinguish between different
phases, neutral and earth conductors.
8.3. Cables shall be delivered to site in unbroken coils with the original wrapping intact. Cables with kinks
or abrasions shall be replaced at no extra cost.
8.4. Unless otherwise specified, conductors shall be copper with 98% minimum conductivity. They shall be
stranded plain annealed type to BS 6360 where used for cables and hard drawn type to BS 159 where
used for busbar trunkings.
Page 168 of 262
8.5. Unless otherwise specified all cables shall be PVC sheated and electrical accessories made of high
impact PVC materials where used in corrosive environments.
8.6. PVC and PVC/PVC cables shall be selected in accordance with the followings:-
a) Where used as final sub-circuits for lighting and power and with conductor sizes not exceeding 25
mm2, they shall be of 440 volt/250 volt insulation grade to BS 6004.
b) Where used as mains circuits or where conductor sizes exceed 25 mm2, they shall be 600 volt/1000
volt insulation grade to BS 6346.
c) They shall have insulation suitable for 70 Degree C conductor temperature and comply to BS 6746.
8.7. PVC Armoured cables shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of 600 volt/I000 volt grade to BS 6346 and suitable for 70 degree C conductor
temperature with insulation complying to BS 6746.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the armouring shall be constructed of single layer of galvanised steel
wires complying with BS 1442.
c) They shall be multi-core type
8.8. Paper insulated cables shall be selected in accordance with the following:
a) They shall be of 600 volt/I000 volt grade to BS 6480 : Part 1 and suitable for 80 degree C.
conductor temperature.
b) Unless otherwise specified, they shall be of lead sheath double steel tape armoured (PILCDSTA)
type.
c) Single core cables shall be of non-magnetic armouring type with lead alloy sheath.
d) They shall be mass impregnated with non draining insulation compounds (M.I.N.D.).
e) They shall have the manufacturer names, year of manufacture and voltage rating printed on the tape
immediately under the metal sheath.
f) Where used as underground cables, they shall have served with compound layers of fibrous
material and bitumen. Where used indoors & exposed, they shall be finished with extruded PVC
oversheath.
8.9. Mineral insulated cables shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) Unless otherwise specified, they shall be of copper sheath to BS 6207 : Part 1.
b) Where used in final sub-circuit for lighting and power with conductor size of 100 mm2 and less,
they shall be of 440 volt insulation grade.
c) Where used as mains circuits or where conductor sizes exceed 100 mm2, they shall be of 660 volt
insulation grade.
d) Silicon rubber sleeve insulation shall be used to replace copper sheath stripped off near the
terminations. Where terminations exceed 150°C, varnished glass fibre sleeve insulation shall be
used to replaced the "stripped off' copper sheath.
e) Terminations, unless otherwise specified shall be rated for 105 degree C.
8.10. XLPE armoured cables shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of 600 Volt/1000 Volt grade to BS 5467 and suitable for 90 degree C conductor
temperature.
b) Insulated cores shall be cabled with suitable fillers in round shape and a binder tape shall be
applied helically over the cable cores.
c) Separation sheath shall be black PVC compound complying with ST2 and IEC 502.
d) Armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanised steel wires (type SWA) for multicore cables
and hard drawn Aluminium wires (AWA) of single core cables.
e) Outer sheath shall be black PVC compound complying with ST2 of IEC 502.
f) ELECTRIC CABLE voltage rating and name of manufacturer shall be embossed on the
outersheath.
8.11. Fire resistant cables shall be selected in accordance with the following:-
a) They shall be of 300 Volt grade to BS 6387 and suitable for 75 degree C conductor temperature.
b) They shall have fire resistant characteristic to IEC 331 which are established by special mica fire
proof tape applied over the conductor.
c) Special fire retardant polyethylene is used for sheathing material of the cable. They shall have
flame retardants characteristics to LEC 332-1.
d) They shall have features such as non-taxis gas (non-halagon gas) and low smoke generation at fire
to IEC 754-1.
e) Terminations, unless otherwise specified shall be rated for 105°C.
8.12. Busbar trunkings shall be selected in accordance with the following :-
Page 169 of 262

a) They shall be of low resistance, totally enclosed, non-ventilated interchargeable feeder to plug-in
type having current density not exceeding 1500 Amp. per 1000 mm2 and comply fully with BS
159.
b) Unless otherwise specified, they shall withstand a minimum breaking capacity of 3 1 MVA at 4
ISV, 50 Hz for a duration of 3.0 Second.
c) Phase and neutral busbars shall have the same cross-sectional area. They shall carry continuous
rated current with temperature rise not exceed 55°C. The impedance characteristic shall be such
that the line to line voltage drop at rated current for any power factor will not exceed 0.115 volt per
meter for feeder duct or 0.145 volt per meter for plug in duct.
d) The trunking channels and removable cover plates shall be constructed to 14 gauge and 16 gauge
galvanized mild steel sheet respectively and finished with two coats of approved paints.
e) They shall be supplied in sectional lengths to suit the installation. Proper expansion joints shall be
provided at every 6 meter interval between the lengths. Continuous tinned-copper earthing strips of
not less than 25% of cross-sectional area of phase conductor shall be provided between lenghts of
busbar trunkings.
f) Each section of the busbar trunking shall be removable without disturbing any section.
8.13. Wiring devices shall be selected in accordance with the following:
a) They shall have voltage rating suitable for the supply characteristics to which they are applied.
b) They shall be manufactured from moulded track-resisting material to BS 1322 and shall be of the
type and rating as specified and shown in the Drawings.
c) Unless otherwise specified, lighting switches shall be 5 Amp. rating, flush mounting, rocker
operated type single pole, 2-way switch and comply with BS3676. They shall be grid switch type
for multigang and plate switch type for single gang.
d) All switches rated at 20 Amp. and above shall be of the double pole type, flush mounted and rocker
operated incorporating pilot lamp.
e) Unless otherwise specified, lighting socket outlets shall be 5 Amp. rating flush mounting,
shuttered, round pin type rocker operated with single-pole micro break switch and complying with
BS 546.
f) Unless otherwise specified, power socket outlets shall be 13 Amp. rating, flush mounting,
shuttered, rectangular pin type, rocker operated with single-pole micro break switch and complying
with BS 1363.
g) In the electrical and mechanical equipment rooms, all switches and socket outlets shall be of the
metal-clad type.
h) Where exposed to weather, socket outlets shall incorporate locking rings and rubber gaskets in the
weatherproof housing manufactured for the purpose and provided with screw-in cover. Switches
shall be of the type fitted with a cork gland around the stem of the operating knob and by a cork
gasket between the cover and the base.
i) Ceiling roses shall comply with BS 67. They shall be either surface or semi-recess type with the
base having a minimum of three knockouts for cable entires. The base shall incorporate clamp type
terminals suitable for holding the phase, neutral, earth and loop-in cables in a distinct manner. The
cover plates shall be of the screw-in type.
j) 1 5A switched socket outlets and socket outlets shall be of round pin type and comply with BS
5733 and BS 546 respectively.
9. WIRING METHODS
9.1. All wiring shall comply fully with the latest IEE Regulations and the Local Electricity Power Supply
Authority's Rule and Regulations.
9.2. Where cables, trunkings, conduits and other wiring pass through floors, walls or partitions, approved
fire resisting barrier shall be incorporated to prevent spread of fire. Floor openings in riser ducts shall be
covered by fixed steel plates of not less than 10 gauge.
9.3. Cables serving different operating voltages and functions shall be segregated from each other by means
of space and approved barrier.
9.4. Adequate size and length of conduits, cables trays and trunkings shall be provided to cover the whole
area and ease of fixing, pulling and driving of cables.
9.5. Unless otherwise specified, all wirings in conduits shall be run concealed (embedded and covered
completely by building materials) except that they shall be run exposed :-
Page 170 of 262

a) Horizontally and vertically in electrical and mechanical rooms, switchrooms and riser duct
enclosures.
b) Horizontally and vertically at permanent unfinished spaces which are not assigned to mechanical or
electrical equipment and hidden from view by false ceilings and false walls.
c) Horizontally and vertically along permanent steel column and beams.
9.6. All wirings in cable trunkings, cable trays and all busbar trunkings shall be run exposed.
9.7. Exposed circuit shall be run in a completely accessible manner on the underside of all piping and
ductwork and shall be routed parallel to building walls and column lines in a co-ordinated manner with
other services and generally follow the routes as shown on the Drawings.
9.8. Concealed circuitry shall be so located that building construction materials can be applied over their
thickness elements without being subject to spalling or cracking.
9.9. Concealment of circuitry by means of embedment in field poured concrete will not be permitted except
as specifically detailed.
9.10. All cables shall be terminated in an approved manner using manufacturer's fittings and
recommendations. Lugs and connectors shall be of the size and type suited to the cable and load.
9.11. All cable termination joints or junctions must be in an accessible position. Jointing of cables to the cable
boxes shall be carried out by an approved cable jointer with methods & materials in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and the Local Electricity Power Supply Authority requirements.
9.12. Cables used as mains circuits shall be of the type and ratings as specified & shown on the Drawings.
9.13. Where cable trays, busbar trunkings or cables trunkings are used, they shall be rigidly fixed to mild steel
angle hangers spaced at regular intervals not exceeding one meter on walls or underside of the ceiling.
If necessary suspension units and thrust blocks shall be provided for the vertical run. Busbar trunkings
and cable trunkings shall be of weatherproof type construction if used in floor slab or other damp
environments. All steel hangers shall be rust proofed and finished with two coats of approved paints.
9.14. Where conduits are used they shall be installed as follows:-
a) Radii of field formed bends shall not be less than those of bends in standard manufacture for the
same size conduit.
b) Make all cuts square.
c) For steel conduits, ream out all burrs from ends and paint ends prior to screwing into place. Where
each conduit cross building expansion or construction joints, they shall be equipped with expansion
fittings having flexible grounding bonds.
d) Screw conduits buried in concrete shall have threads coated with approved jointing compound
during assembly and joints treated with rust inhibiting paint-after jointing. Conduits and boxes shall
be made water tight before concrete is poured.
e) For plastic conduits joints, utilize slip-on couplings and cements specifically manufactured for use
with PVC conduits. Where such conduits is to be made up to metal-clad equipment, utilize
threaded adapters.
f) During installation, cap all runs left unfinished and unattended. All cap terminations of finished
runs until cables ate to be pulled in. For capping utilize only fittings manufactured specifically for
the purpose.
g) In each conduit run, assemble draw-in wired in position and delay drawing-in cables until moisture
is excluded from conduits. Limit the number of bends between cable access points not more than
two right angle bends. Junction boxes instead of tees shall be used at intersections.
h) Include circular wedge-type cable supports for cables at top of any vertical conduit not exceeding 5
meter run interval. Supports shall be of non-deteriorating insulating materials manufactured for the
purpose.
i) Where a number of conduit follow the same route utilize multiple conduit draw-in boxes.
j) Where more than one conduits runs paralled on walls or ceilings, utilize metal brackets with multi-
way saddles. The metal brackets shall be fixed to the surface by means of "Ramset" studs washers
and nuts.
k) Cables of different phases shall be run in close proximity with each other in either trefoil or flat
formations. No overloading between groups of circuits are permitted. Where cables are run in
trunkings, cable trays or ducts, they shall be rigidly held in positions with suitable supports
manufactured for the purpose so as to minimise mechanical stress on the cable and their
termination. The interval of supports for the vertical and horizontal runs shall be to the cable
manufacturer recommendations.
l) The minimum internal bending radius of the cables shall follow the cable manufacturers
recommendations but in no case less than the followings :-
Page 171 of 262
Type of Cables Multiplication to overall cable diameter
i. PVC Insulated (with or without sheath or armoured) 6
9.15. Cables used as final sub-circuits shall be of the type and ratings as specified and shown on the
Drawings.
9.16. Unless otherwise specified, all the final sub-circuits shall be run in steel conduits and shall be of the
minimum l.5mm2 for lighting circuits serving not more than ten lighting points and of minimum 2.5
mm2 for radial power circuits serving not more than two power sockets (13 Amp. rating).
9.17. Where the last outlet extends further than 60 meter from the distribution switchboard, use cables of size
2.5mm2 for lighting circuits and 4mm2 for proper circuits.
9.18. Wiring shall use the 'loop-in" methods with phase and neutral conductors of the same size.
9.19. Cables used as equipment circuits such as internal wiring for lighting fittings, switchboards and the like
shall be of hard grade ethylene polylene rubber type with ratings not less than the control apparatus
ratings which are specified and shown on the Drawings.
9.20. Wiring used inside switchboards shall be arranged in a regular and traceable manner with bends set a
90% & securely held in positions by suitable clips, the terminals being fitted with brass washers & lock
nuts.
9.21. Cable trays, trunkings, conduits and fittings shall be supported in accordance with the best industrial
practice and the following:-
a) Support less than 80mm horizontally run, (plastic) conduit at intervals no greater than 0.75 metres.
Support such conduits, 80mm or longer at intervals no greater than 1.0 metres.
b) Support less than 25mm horizontally run steel conduits at intervals no greater than 2.0 metres.
Support such conduits, 25mm or larger, at intervals not greater than 3.0 metres.
c) Support less than 25mm vertically run steel conduits at intervals no greater than 2.5 metres.
Supports such conduits, 25mm or larger, at intervals no greater than floor to floor height or 44.0
metres whichever is smaller.
d) Support vertical runs or busbar trunking, cable trays, cable trunkings at intervals no greater than the
floor to floor height, or 4.0 metres, whichever is smaller. Support horizontal runs of busbar
trunking, cable trays, cable trunkings at intervals no greater than 1 .5 metres.
e) Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on conduits, raceways,
or cables for support.
f) Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well
as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling. Vertical member which suspend the
ceiling (together with their horizontal bracing which occurs above the ceiling), however, may be
used for support.
g) As a minimum procedure, surface or pendant mounted lighting fittings shall be supported:-
i. From its outlet box by means of an interposed metal strap, where weight is less than 2.3 Kg.
ii. From its outlet box by means of a hickey or other direct threaded connection, where weight is
from 2.3 Kg.
iii. Directly from structural slab, deck, or framing member, where weight exceeds 23 Kg.
h) As a minimum procedure, recessed lighting fittings shall be supported:-
i. From ceiling suspension members, as described above, where weight is 36 Kg or less
ii. Directly from structural slabs, decks or framing members, where weight is more than 36 Kg.
Where fittings and ceilings are such as to require fitting support from ceiling opening frames,
include the members necessary to tie back the ceiling opening frames to ceiling suspension
members or slabs so as to provide actual support for the fittings as noted above.
i) In conjunction with lighting fittings weighing less than 23 Kg, the above restriction against
supporting from suspended ceiling splines, runners or bars in the plane of the ceiling will be
waived for ceilings which have been specifically approved for the weight and arrangement of
fittings being applied. Any support members, or other appurtenances, however, required to tie in or
adapt the fixtures and their ceiling opening frames, (if any) to the ceiling in the approved manner
shall be included as art of the electrical work.
j) As a minimum procedure (in suspended ceilings), support shall run of circuitry (e.g. conduit not in
excess of 25mm size) from ceiling suspension members, as described above (support large runs of
circuitry directly from structural slabs, decks or framing members).
k) Where support members of necessity penetrate air ducts, include, in accordance with instructions
issued in the field, air-tight sealing provisions which allow for a relative movement between the
support members and the duct walls.
9.22. Cable Trench
Page 172 of 262
9.22.1. Unless otherwise specified cables shall be buried to a depth of 750mm. The minimum width of
cable trench shall be 450mm in order that the cable may be properly handled on rollers at the
bottom of the trench. The width shall increase of more cables are laid in the same trench so as to
allow for adequate clearance (9" at least) between cable in horizontal laid position. When the
trench has been excavated it shall be throughly inspected along its entire route and all stones and
any other objects likely to damage the cable sheathing shall be removed. The bottom of the
trench shall then be covered with layer of 75mm clean river sand and the cable laid on top. After
cable laying a layer of 75mm clean river sand shall cover the cable and carefully spread before
placing the cable protective covers.
9.22.2. Cable protective cover shall be good quality house bricks. They shall be laid lengthwise from
end to end along the entire route of the underground cable. Cable covers shall have at least
50mm overlap for each side of the cable(s).
9.22.3. Trench shall be backfilled with soil and shall be consolidated after every 150mm of backfill
using a mechanical rammer. The finished surface shall be left proud by 50mm to allow for
subsidence.
9.22.4. If the original ground is a turf ground, the Contractor shall lay back the turf after backfilling.
9.23. Cable Ducts
9.23.1. At road crossings, the cable shall be protected with G.I. or steel pipes buried to a depth of
920mm below road level. Pipes used shall be 100mm or 150mm in diameter as directed by the
Superintending Officer.
9.23.2. Where the cables are run under paved or concrete area, they shall be protected with 150mm
diameter earthen ware ducts encased in concrete or 150mm diameter pitch fibre ducts c/w bend
pieces.
9.23.3. Cables entering a building shall also be similarly protected as that specified for paved &
concrete area.
9.23.4. All cables ducts, through which cables have been pulled, passing through retaining walls,
interior and walls, etc. shall be sealed effectively by means of sealing compound.
9.24. Cable Marker
9.24.1. Cable markers shall be provided by the subcontractor at every change in direction of
underground cable routes &at every 15m straight runs. Cable markers shall be of reinforced
concrete construction. They shall have bold indented lettering "L.V." inscribed on top and be
buried to a depth of at least 300mm. Cable joint markers shall be made to TNB Specification
and be provided beside every cable joint.
9.24.2. Individual identification shall be made for the following:
a) Each Main Switchboard.
b) Each Submain Switchboard and Distribution Switchboard.
c) Each wire or cable in each feeder.
Each wire or cable in a feeder shall be identified at its terminal points of connection and in each
cable chamber pull box or junction through which it passes.
The nomenclature used to identify transformers and circuit breaker cubicles shall designate the
names and numbers assigned to them on the Drawings.
d) The nomenclature used to identify switchboards shall:-
i. Where the control incoming services, designate this fact together with suitable
differentiating nomenclature where more than one service is involved.
ii. Where they control outgoing feeders, designate the names and numbers assigned to the
feeders on the Drawings.
The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires & cables shall designate the feeder number
only.
Identification for switchboards shall be by means of engraved lamacoid nameplates
showing 3mm height white lettering on a black background fastened on the outside front
face of the enclosure.
Identification for the wires and cables of feeders shall be by means of fibre or non ferrous
metal tags fastened with non-ferrous metal wires or bands. Fastening for metal tags shall be
of the same metal as the tag.
On gear where key interlocks are involved, suitable plaques describing the function of
same shall be provided.
Prior to installing identifying tags and nameplates, their nomenclature shall be submitted
for approval.
Page 173 of 262
9.25. Galvanised Steel Conduits
9.25.1. Steel conduits shall be of galvanised, heavy gauge, Class B, screwed type complying with BS
31 or BS 4568 and finished with two coats of approved standard orange paint.
9.25.2. The conduits shall be fitted with brass busbar at the free ends and expansion devices at
appropriate intervals. The ends of each length of conduit shall be properly reamed. All steel
conduits shall be effectively earthed.
9.25.3. Underground conduit shall be buried at a minimum depth of 450mm below ground level or
100mm below floor slab or hardstanding.
9.25.4. Junction boxes, outlet boxes etc. shall be of galvanised steel or alloy material. The covers shall
be galvanised sheet steel with thickness not less than 1.2mm. Junction boxes downdropping to
luminaires shall have diecast cone-shaped metal cover.
9.26. Cable Trunkings
9.26.1. Cable trunkings shall comply with BS 4678. They shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet and
finished with two coats of standard orange enamel. They shall be equipped with removable
covers at suitable intervals. They shall be supplied in lengths to suit the installation and shall
have the following minimum wall thickness:-
Normal Size (mm) Minimum Wall Thickness (mm)
50 x 50 and below 1.0
75 X 50 to 100 X 100 1.2
150 X 50 to 300 X 150 1.6
Above 300 x 150 2.0
9.26.2. The trunking shall be supported by fixing brackets so that the trunking will not be in contact
with the walls or floor slab. The brackets shall be installed at intervals not greater than 1.5m for
vertical runs and not greater than 1.0m for horizontal runs. The brackets shall be de-rusted,
finished with a primer and coated with standard orange enamel.
9.26.3. Wherever the trunking passes through a floor or a fire resistant wall, fire resisting barrier shall
be provided. At these positions the cables shall be sealed with non hygroscopic fire resisting
material of minimum 2 hours fire rating and approved by Jabatan Perkhidmatan Bomba of
Malaysia. In addition, the floor openings and wall openings shall be sealed with similar type of
compound.
9.26.4. Cables running in the trunking shall supported by hard wood racks securely fixed at the base of
the trunking spaced not more than 600mm apart. Cables for each final circuit shall be properly
bunched together and labelled.
9.26.5. v) Where conduit is tapped off from the trunking, suitable bronze type smooth-bore bushes
shall be fitted at all conduit terminations.
9.26.6. Unless otherwise specified, all trunking, shall have either tinned copper tape of dimensions not
less than 25mm x 3mm as circuit protective conductor or earth cable of appropriate size. In the
later case, all trunking joints shall be bridge by means of tinned copper tape of dimension not
less than 25mm x 3mm.
10. INTERNAL TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
10.1. GENERAL
10.1.1. This specification covers the supply of all materials, labour, cartage, tools equipment and
appliances necessary for the construction, installation, testing, commissioning and completion
of the work as hereunder more fully described with all consequential and incidental work
requisite, though not specifically mentioned herein to the true intent and meaning of the
Specification & the accompanying Drawings under the direction of and to the entire satisfaction
of the Consulting Engineers and Telekom Malaysia Berhad (TMB).
10.2. DRAWINGS
10.2.1. The drawings accompanying the Specification indicates the positions of the outlets to be
installed and the cable run and connections. Any modification in the cabling must receive the
prior approval of the Consulting Engineers.
10.3. WORK BY OTHERS
Page 174 of 262

10.3.1. The Contractor for this whole System may arrange some of the work to be carried out by others
after the Consulting Engineer has been briefed thoroughly as to the nature and units of the
works and has given written permission to do so. However, the Contractor shall still be held
responsible for all the works, whether sub-let or carried out by his Contractor.
10.4. TELECOMMUNICATION INCOMING CABLES
10.4.1. The point of cable entry and the method of entry shall be decided in conjunction with the
Superintending Officer to ensure that foundations and walls are not damaged.
10.4.2. The cable shall be led into the building by means of underground G.I. pipe or PVC pipe.
10.4.3. Where an entry hole has to be made in a wall below ground level care shall be taken to seal the
hole to prevent water from getting into the building.
10.4.4. The cable shall be terminated on a distribution case or distribution frame depending on the
number of pairs to be terminated and the space available. The distribution frame shall be large
enough to terminate not only the main cable but all the necessary cables to the various floors.
10.5. RISERS
10.5.1. Risers are provided for cables to be run from the main distribution box or frame to various
floors.
10.6. HORIZONTAL RUNWAYS
10.6.1. Horizontal cableways or runways are required from the Intermediate distribution boxes to all
places where outlets may be required. Such cableways shall consist either of PVC under-floor
conduit or trunking of appropriate size to accommodate the cable-pairs required. The conduit
and trunking shall be neatly run and cemented into position and the floor surface made good.
10.6.2. The cover-plates for junction boxes shall be of the type approved by the Consulting Engineer.
10.6.3. Details or samples of the ducting system, junction boxes, and pick-up points shall be submitted
to the Consulting Engineers for approval prior to installation.
10.7. CABLING
10.7.1. Telephone cables shall be of PVC insulated, PVC sheathed if triple formation, tinned copper
conductors of appropriate colour code and shall be approved by TMB
10.7.2. The system of vertical risers and horizontal ducts and the suitable method of concealment is
designed as shown in the drawing. The Contractor shall be responsible for erecting the cabling
installation strictly in accordance with the drawing and the relevant TMB specification and
instructions. Any modification in the cabling must receive prior approval of the Consulting
Engineer.
10.7.3. Cabling in trunking and in conduit shall be laid with great care. Suitable size of draw-wire shall
be provided in pipes during concreting operations, pipes and ducts shall be plugged so that they
do not become blocked.
10.7.4. Where runways pass from room to room or from corridor to room there shall be a pipe or a hole
through the intervening wall.
10.7.5. Contact between metal work and TMB plant must be avoided. Cables shall therefore be given as
great clearance as practicable from the electrical wiring and equipment. In no case shall the
clearance be less than 1 feet and 9 inches. Careful attention shall be given to concealed
electrical wiring.
10.8. EARTHING
10.8.1. All metallic conduits, metallic trunking and metallic fittings which form part of the installation
shall be electrically continuous and earthed to the requirements of TMB.
10.8.2. Earth Connection shall be provided at the distribution box. The earthing of PABX or PBX if
required shall be effected by means of cable pairs or earth lead between the distribution box and
the PABX or PBX.
10.8.3. The earth wire to be used shall be tinned wire copper 3 strand 20 lbs. gauge. The earth wire
shall be bonded using a type of earth clip approved by TMB.
10.9. INSTALLATION
10.9.1. The installation shall be subject to regular inspection of the representative of Consulting
Engineers and the TMB.
Page 175 of 262
10.9.2. The Contractor shall not cause any interference in any way in or around the building. All
necessary precaution shall be taken not to cause any damage to property or other installations.
Any such damage shall be made good by him at his own expense.
10.9.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the liaison with TMB for the installation of Sub
Distribution Frame and other telephone equipment in the Building in accordance with the Time
Schedule set in the Work Programme.
10.9.4. The Contractor shall also obtain approval from the TMB for the ducting and cabling system on
each floor prior to installation and/or during the progress of works.
10.10. LABELLING OF EQUIPMENT
10.10.1. All items of equipment shall be properly and adequately labelled in English or Bahasa Malaysia.
The labelling shall be of permanent nature and shall include drawing number of the item.
10.11. GUARAINTEE
10.11.1. All equipment shall be received at site, in good working conditions. Any item of equipment
considered unsatisfactory by the Consulting Engineers shall be replaced / repaired by the
Contractor, without delay or any additional charge.
11. COLD WATER AND SANITARY PLUMBING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
11.1. SANITARY PLUMBING SERVICER INSTALLATION

11.1.1. Sanitary Plumbing and Vent System
a) This section of the specification covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing & putting
into satisfactory operating condition of a system of sanitary plumbing & vent piping from
all water consuming fixtures, equipment & drains & floor traps.
b) All vent piping shall be carried through roof complete with anti flash protection. Testing
gates shall be provided at each floor for stacks & provisional stacks.
c) All pipe work shall be in galvanized steel or cast iron or UPVC or PP of the sizes
scheduled under materials section of this specification. Branches of soil & waste stacks
shall have regular falls towards the stacks.
d) The junction for branches to soil & waste stacks shall have 50mm & 25mm throat radius
bends respectively.
e) Inspection openings & clear outs shall be provided to the requirements of the authority
having jurisdiction. They shall be positioned to ensure easy prodding of the entire soil &
waste systems.
f) Soil & waste discharge shall extend to external sewer lines within the boundary limits as
shown on the drawing.
11.1.2. Sewerage Plumbing System
Earthworks for Sewer Pipes
a) General
- Throughout the work, craftsmen & skilled operators shall be employed & a high
standard of workmanship must be obtained.
- The opinion of the S.O regarding the Standard of Workmanship shall be final & any
work condemned as of inferior quality or standard shall be cut out, removed & replaced
to the full extent as directed by the S. 0.
b) Excavation
- Before commencing any excavation, the Sub-Contractor shall take cross-sections or
levels along the proposed line of excavation, at frequent intervals & agree upon them
with the S. 0.
- All excavation shall be carried out to the required lengths, breadths, depths, inclinations
& curvatures as may be necessary for the construction of the works or as shown in the
drawings, in whatever ground or soil that may be necessary for the construction of the
works.
- Excavations for sewer trenches in open cut shall be to the straight lines & to be correct
depths & gradients required for the pipes & beds as specified hereinafter. The trench
bottom shall be of such widths as indicated in the drawings so as to allow adequate
working space for the pipe-jointers & the width of trenches at surface shall be the same
Page 176 of 262

unless otherwise directed. Excavated materials shall not be deposited within 450mm of
the edge of the trench.
- All excavated material shall be deposited so that it will do as little damage &
inconvenience as possible.
- The excavation shall proceed in such portions as the S.O may direct & no placing of
bedding or permanent work of any kind to commence until the S.O has approved of the
excavation.
c) Excessive Excavation
Where excavation has been carried out in excess of the limits of permanent works for
which it is intended, the S.O may, if he considers necessary require the Contractor to fill
the void so formed with materials of a similar nature to the adjacent work. Where
excavation has been carried out to the extent greater than that required, the void formed
shall be filled solid with 1:4:8 mass concrete. In both cases, this filling shall be done at
the expense of the Contractor.
d) Excavation of Unsuitable or Soft Materials
If after excavating the sewer trench or manhole to the required bedding level, it is found
that any part of the bed is unsuitable to provide a satisfactory foundation, such portion
shall be further excavated to such depths as the S.O may direct & backfill to correct
bedding level with well compacted selected & approved materials.
e) Timbering Including Sheet Piling
- The term "Timbering" shall cover all methods of support including the use of timber,
steel plate, sheet pile or such other materials as may be approved by the S. 0.
- The contractor shall allow in his rates for excavation the supply & fixing of strong &
sufficient timbering to support the sides and/or bottom of the excavation when
necessary to the satisfaction of the S. 0. & shall maintain the sane until the construction
work is sufficiently advanced in the opinion of the S. 0. to permit the timbering to be
withdrawn, which shall be conducted only under personal supervision of a competent
foreman.
- The S.O. may order the trench, excavation or work to be closely timbered whenever it
may appear to him to be necessary & the Contractor shall carry out such order and no
charge shall be made for this by the Contractor.
- The Contractor shall be responsible for any failure of his timbering during fixing, when
in position, & for any injury to the work & any advice, permission or approval given by
the
- S. 0. in respect of the removal of the timbering shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility herein defined.
f) Trenches and Excavation to Be Kept Clear of Water
- The Contractor shall keep the excavations clear of water by means of temporary drains
laid below the level of the permanent works and shall pump out all water which may
arise or flow into. Unless otherwise directed by the S.O, all temporary drains or sub
drains shall be finally blocked up with concrete till it is made watertight.
- The Contractor shall provide, form, fix, maintain & work, where & as directed by the
S.O. such engines, pumps, chutes, wells, dams & other things necessary for keeping the
subsoil or accumulated water out of the excavations or at a level below the bottom of
any permanent works for such a period as the S. 0. may direct. After raising the water
herein referred to the Contractor shall at once convey it away in such a manner as not to
cause any nuisance or injury. No new or existing pipe or culvert shall be used for the
purpose of carrying water away from the excavation without permission in writing from
S. 0. When new or existing pipes or culverts have been used for this purpose, the
Contractor shall be responsible for clearing out & removing all silt, etc. before handing
them over for their normal function. Any damage whatsoever resulting from such use or
cleaning out of new or existing pipes or inverts shall be made good at the Contractor's
expense.
- All sumps and wells which may be required for the purpose for keeping the work dry
are to be sunk clear thereof, and care shall be taken to avoid undermining any parts of
the works by pumping. The Contractor shall afterwards refill & re-install any such
sumps or wells to the satisfaction of the S. 0., & cost borne by the Contractor.
g) Removal of Foul & Offensive Water and Ventilation
Page 177 of 262
- If any foul or offensive matter arises or flows into the excavation or trenches, the
Contractor shall immediately remove it from the works without extra cost.
- The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation and efficient apparatus to keep all
excavations, trenches, tunnels, and headings free from all gases whether generated in
the strain or arising from the use of explosives for blasting or otherwise & he shall take
precautions to ascertain that they are in a safe condition before allowing workmen to
descend.
h) Back filling Excavation and Trenches
- In back filling excavations after permanent works therein have been approved by the
S.O., the best and most suitable materials shall be used and shall be deposited in layers
not exceeding 150 mm deep, each layer shall be thoroughly rammed & watered if
required, one man being employed for ramming for each man filling.
- Where excavated materials are not considered suitable by the S. 0. selected materials
from approved sources shall be used for back filling and bedding.
- In back filling trenches after the pipes have been approved by the S.O., the standard
bedding for sewerage pipes shall be followed & shall be deposited in layers not
exceeding 6 inches deep, and each layer shall be thoroughly rammed and watered, if
required.
- As most sewer lines are located under road pavements the Contractor shall ensure that
all back filling of pipe trenches is done up to the formation level.
Note : The formation level is the sub grade level of the road pavement.
All sewer manholes constructed under proposed roads (yet to be constructed) will
then protrude from the formation level.
11.1.3. Sewer Pipes
All sewer pipes up to 100mm shall be cast iron. Pipes of 150mm & above shall be vitrified
clay pipe.
a) Cast Iron Pipes
Cast iron pipes used in sewer manholes shall comply with B.S.416 & shall be supplied by
an approved manufacturer acceptable to the local authority. They are to be spigot & socket
ends. The pipes are to be joined in spun yarn or tarred gaskin, molten lead well caulked to
the full depth of the joints.
b) Vitrified Clay Pipes
All vitrified clay pipes & specials supplied by the contractor shall be from approved
manufacturer. It shall comply with B.S. 65:1981 or other equivalent. No defective pipes &
fittings shall be permitted. All fittings & joints to be jointed shall follow the manufacturer's
specifications.
c) Laying of Pipes
- Pipes shall be laid to straight lines and even gradient as required.
- Great care shall be exercised in setting out & determining the levels of the pipes & the
contractor shall provide all setting out and determining the levels of the pipes & the
contractor shall provide all setting out equipment, set up & maintain all sight rails,
bench marks & boning rods necessary for the purpose.
- All pipes shall be kept free from earth, debris, superfluous cement & other obstructions
during laying & until completion of the works they will be handed over in a clean
condition.
- Pipes shall be laid with the socket leading uphill on the prepared bed of concrete.
- The bedding & hunching of pipes shall be done as shown in the drawings or as directed
by the S.O.
d) Concrete Encasement
Concrete Encasement shall be done for all sewers crossing waterways such as drains,
culverts, etc. or when the depth of sewer is not deep enough to take surcharge loading as
shown on the drawings.
11.1.4. Manholes
a) Brickwork Manholes
- Construct the manholes to the dimensions and depths as shown in the drawings.
- The base slab of concrete shall be as specified. The edges of the base slab are to finish
flush with the external faces of chamber brickwork.
Page 178 of 262

- Construct the chamber walls of brickwork, 225mm, 340mm, 450mm or 570mm thick
(as applicable) to the height as indicated on the relevant point externally, rake out joints
in internal faces & render with High Alumina Cement Mortar (1:3), trowelled hard and
smooth to a finished thickness of 20mm.
- Cover the chamber with slab, thickness as specified, of 1:2:4 concrete reinforced with
- M.S. bars with hooked ends.
- Construct the shaft in brickwork, thickness as shown on the Drawings, from the level of
the top of suspended slab to a point 450mm below ground level & from this point corbel
the brickwork inwards to provide symmetrical seat for manhole cover & frame.
- Build in galvanized cast-iron step-irons or other approved equivalent at intervals, as
specified. In vertical plane, alternative step-irons being separated by horizontal distance
of 225mm from center.
- Bench up channels in 1:2:4 concrete to soffit level of sewer finished with a layer of
granolithic concrete. The top of the benching shall be finished smooth to slope upwards
from the edge of the channel to the chamber walls at a gradient as directed. Float the
benching to smooth hard surface with 10mm thick coat of High Alumina cement mortar
in equal proportion of sand & cement.
- Build in the ends of all pipes & construct brick arches or R.C. Lintels as directed.
- Fix in position to correct level, manhole cover & frame on a bed of cement mortar (1:3).
b) Precast Manholes
All precast manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings complying with
B.S.5911 or other approved equivalent acceptable by the local authority. All dimensions &
depths shall be as specified. All works done should be under the supervision of S. O. or his
representatives.
c) Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Frames
- The manhole covers & frames shall unless otherwise described, be cast iron coated flat
covers & frames, clear opening of 500 mm diameter grade 'B' single seal type,
complying in all respect with B.S.497: Part 1 (1976) & acceptable by the local
authority.
- Interior manholes shall be filled with recessed cast iron covers & frames suitable for
accepting the floor finish specified for the surrounding areas.
- Exterior manholes in roadways & driveways shall be provided with heavy-duty cast
iron covers.
d) Step Irons
The step-irons for manholes shall be galvanized cast iron complying in all respect with
B.S.1247: 1975.
e) Channel, Etc. In Manholes
Main channels, branch channels, bends etc. are to be glazed ware or precast high alum
granolithic cement concrete, as indicated on the drawings & shall be obtained from
approved manufacturer. All channels are to be properly bedded & jointed in high alumina
cement mortar (1:2).
f) Drop Pipes to Manholes
Where the total drop exceeds 1700mm, all drop pipes, their bends & tee pieces, shall be
cast iron unless otherwise specified. Where the total drop exceed 600mm & does not
exceed the drop pipes, bend & tee pieces shall be vitrified clay or concrete unless otherwise
specified. The concrete surround to all drop pipes shall not be less than 150mm thick.
11.1.5. R.C. Grease Trap
The grease trap of reinforced concrete construction shall be to dimensions as indicated on the
drawings. Accessories shall include a bar screen & bucket strainer all of stainless steel material.
The internal surface shall be rendered with a 19mm thick alumina cement mortar (1:2).
11.1.6. Stainless Steel Grease Strap and Oil Interceptor
The stainless steel Grease Trap shall provide as designed specification.
11.2. PLUMBING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
11.2.1. Location of meter position shall comply with JBA requirements.
11.2.2. All individual meter position for individual or housing scheme shall be located in front but
outside fencing.
Page 179 of 262

11.2.3. Main meter and hydrant meter for apartment/ flats / condominium /schools to be located inside
fencing near entrance. For factories all meters shall be outside the fencing and near entrance
within the boundary of the premises.
11.2.4. All individual sub-meters in multistory shall be located at public corridor.
11.2.5. All pipes for cold and hot water system shall be approved by JBA.
11.2.6. Meters located on ground floors for all walk-up buildings must be in ascending order and
identified with permanent address plate.
11.2.7. All tanks to be provided with inspection cover scour overflow pipes and mosquito proof. All
scour, overflow and warning pipes shall be of JBA approved materials. (Sizes of pipes shall be
provided according to required.)
11.2.8. Access to roof tanks must be provided from within buildings.
11.2.9. Stopcock to tank inlet to be fixed 2 metres from floor level.
11.2.10. Stopcock shall be provided to the inlets of tanks, W.C. and urinals cisterns.
11.2.11. Stopcock for tank outlets to be fixed immediately after outlet from tanks. In the case where
there is only one outlet point from the tank then only one stopcock is required between the tank
and the outlet point.
11.2.12. All concealed pipes and fittings to be inspected and approved by JBA before concealed.
11.2.13. All materials and workmanship shall comply with JBA.
11.2.14. All plumbing works are to be carried out under the supervision of the consulting engineer.
11.2.15. Warning pipes should be laid to edge of building.
11.2.16. Water taps located in the same enclosure and in very close proximity to W.C. shall be supplied
from feed tanks/cisterns.
11.2.17. All fittings for draw off points shall be of brass or stainless steel. (Refer to drawing G)
11.2.18. Address plate shall be provided at the meter position for the purpose of identification when
necessary.
11.2.19. Where the supply come from the storage tank the minimum pressure at every meter position
shall be 10m.
11.2.20. Cold Water Distribution System
a) The contractor shall supply and install a system of cold water distribution piping to all
water consuming fixtures & equipment as shown on the drawing. Pressure reducing sets are
to be incorporated to meet the requirement of the Local Authority.
b) All pipe work & fittings shall be supported by steel hangers, brackets & anchors in a
manner that will allow flexibility of the pipe work for expansion & contraction, consistent
with the operating temperature without overstressing any portion of the pipe work.
c) Pipe anchors shall be of the vice type and shall be shaped to fit the outside diameter of the
pipe & contact the pipe for 75mm minimum length.
11.3. WATER STORAGE TANK
11.3.1. Specification for Material for Pressed Steel Tanks with Internal Liners (For Domestic Use)
a) All components of the pressed steel sectional tanks shall comply with BS 1564 : 1975
b) All hot-dip galvanizing shall comply with MS 740: 1981 and from the source approved by
JBA.
c) The following additional specifications shall be fully complied with:-
Component Material
i Pressed Steel Tank Plates Hot-dip galvanized tank plates
ii Cleats internal braces to tank and Stainless steel 316
internal ladder plates
iii Roof cover to tank I) Hot -dip galvanized pressed steel sectional
roof plates of minimum 3.0mm thick.
OR
II) GRP/FRP sectional water tank roof panels
to SS245 : 1981.
iv Supports of roof plates I) Stainless steel 316 for hot-dip galvanized
roofing plates as in (iii) (I)
OR
II) UPVC for GRP / FRP roofing plates (as in
(iii) (ii) as recommended by the GRP / FRP
roofing panels manufacturer.
Page 180 of 262
v Strapping of lining onto Stainless Stainless Steel 316
Steel 316 top perimeter edge
vi Bolts, nuts and washers. Stainless Steel 316
Internal to tank plates
vii Bolts, nuts and washers. Hot-dip galvanized.
External to tank plat
viii Bolts, nuts and washers. Hot-dip galvanized.
To roof plates
ix Internal liner High Density Polyethylene (HOPE) minimum
thickness 2.0 mm
x I) Tank support Concrete or hot-dip galvanized steel beam.
II) External Ladder Stainless steel aluminum or hot dipped
galvanized steel.
11.3.2. FRP Panel Water Tanks Requirements

The use of FRP panel tank shall be in compliance with the following requirement:
a) Manufactures shall manufacture & test FRP Panel water tanks to SS 245 1995 or MS 139 :
1995.
b) Manufactures shall provide a 15 years warranty for their products and workmanship.
c) Panel shall be coated externally or covered I sheltered as protection against Ultraviolet
light.
d) There shall be continuous external vertical bracing from the 1st tier to the 3rd tier max 3
tier 1.
e) The roof panels shall be supported & secured by 50mm UPVC Class "D" (MS 628 1999)
pipes at every panel intersection for tanks up to 3 metre height ( max 3-tier)
f) Installation of FRP panel tank shall be carried out by the tank's manufacturers only or their
appointed competent installers & market their tank systems on a supply & install basis FRP
panel tank manufacturers must shown written approval on the installers installation by
other parties would not be accepted.
g) Repair works shall be undertaken by the respective manufacturers only & shall use original
parts and components.
h) Internal Ladder to tank to be Stainless Steel Type 316 or UPVC.
i) Tank support/ skids to be HOT DIP galvanized to MS 740
j) Internal Bolt and Nuts washers to be Stainless Steel Type 316
k) Bolt and Nuts/ washers external to tank and roof plates are to be only HOT DIP galvanized
to MS 740.
l) All internal reinforcements (tie rods) used if of stainless, shall be of the TYPE 316 and
m) Roof cover to tanks shall only be of FRP / GRP plates and no other.
n) Mechanical level indicators
o) FRP tank expose to sunlight should have a permanent anti-ultra violet coating. Internal
frame support to be of stainless steel frame support as per manufacture recommended.
11.3.3. Specification for Material for Pressed Steel Tanks (For Non Domestic Use)
a) All components of the pressed steel sectional tanks shall comply with BS 1564 : 1975
b) All hot -dip galvanizing shall comply with MS 740 : 1981 & from the source approved by
JBA
c) The following additional specifications shall be fully complied with:-
Component Material
i Pressed Steel Tank Plates Hot-dip galvanized tank plates
ii Cleats internal braces to tank plates Hot-dip galvanized
and internal ladder
iii Roof cover to tank Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel sectional
iv Supports to roof plates roof plates of minimum 3.0mm thick.
v Strapping of lining onto top Hot-dip galvanized
perimeter edge
vi Bolts, nuts and washers. Hot-dip galvanized
Internal to tank plates
vii Bolts, nuts and washers Hot-dip galvanized
External to tank plate
Page 181 of 262
viii Bolts, nuts and washers. Hot-dip galvanized
To roof plates
ix I) Tank support Concrete or hot-dip galvanized steel beam.
II) External Ladder Stainless steel aluminum or hot dipped
galvanized steel.
11.3.4. Spiral HDPE Tanks (Comply to MS 1225:1991)

a) Each Spiral Tank is individually made from heavy duty polyethylene (HOPE) by a unique
helically wound extrusion process whereby an extruded profile string is wound round a
mandrel. Overlapping edges are then homogeneously fused together while in hot plastic
state to produce a smooth inner surface.
b) The specially formulated HOPE material must has a high level of chemical resistance,
coupled with stand alone mechanical properties. Spiral tanks are designed for non-
pressurized (atmosphere) use.
c) In addition to the above the tanks are light in weight, strong, virtually maintenance free,
easy to clean and cost less than conventionally manufactured tanks.
d) Fittings available are manhole, level indicator, inlet, outlet, vent, drain and other flanged
connections.
e) Each spiral water tank must be manufactured from physiologically safe, non-toxic, inert,
high density polyethylene and polypropylene material.
f) The polyolefin resins used are of high performance grades created to take long term stress
& are excellent ultra violet, crack & craze, resistance. Material for high density
polyethylene (HOPE) tank conform to ASTM D-1248.
g) Properties - Tough, lightweight, rust free, non-toxic, low head room, outstanding chemical
resistance, unharmed by disinfectants, craze and crack resistant, non-brittle, maintenance
free, no lining or painting required, uniform load distribution.
Polyethylene
Properties Test Values Test Methods
Density 937 kg/ m3 ISO 1872/1-1986
Tensile Strength 16 MPa ISO/ R527-1966: type 2 speed D
Elongation > 200% ISO/ R527-1966: type 2 speed D
Flexural Modulus 650 MPa ISO 178-1975
Impact Strength 20 KJ/M 2 ISO 179-1982: Contion 2 C
Hardness ( Shore D) 62 ISO 868-1985
Softening Point 117°c ISO 306
Thermal Conductivity 0.48 W/m°C ASTM C 117
Melting Point 125°c ASTM D 2117
Linear Expansion 10 X 10-41°c ASTM D 696
11.3.5. Accessories (Apply to all types of tanks)

Accessories to water tanks shall include but not be limited to the following:
a) Internal (Aluminium) and external hot dipped galvanized steel cat ladders
b) Hinged manhole covers
c) Vent cowl and tap-off pipe stubs c/w netting
d) Incoming pipes complete with ball valves and ball float
e) Mechanical level indicators
f) Overflow, warning, scour pipes, balancing pipes and All associated gate valves
g) Water level control switches (Electromagnetic float type with high and low level alarms)
h) Electrode c/w wiring to control Panel and Pumps
i) Sampling point c/w gate valve and pipes.
11.3.6. The Contractor shall supply & install Ground & roof storage tanks complete with all
accessories, flanged pipe stubs, ladders etc as shown on the drawings &/or described herein.
Roof Hop Dip Galvanized/Press Steel shall incorporate a mechanical level indicator of the
direct reading type and with a scale length and location consistent with the water level. The
scale shall be calibrated in 1OOOgallon divisions with each division marked to show the
quantity of water in the tank. The scale & indicating pointer shall be "readable" from 3m.
11.4. PUMPS SERVICES AND PUMPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Page 182 of 262

11.4.1. Pumping System Requirements
The following requirements apply to pumphouses which are to be handed over to JBA.
a) Building Structure
i. The land which the pump house is constructed shall be handed over to the JBA.
ii. Suitable drainage shall be provided in the pumphouse to allow overflow or dripping
water to be drained out to the drain outside the building.
iii. Suitable and sufficient ventilation shall be provided in the station. All ventilation outlets
must be covered with mosquito netting (stainless steel).
iv. The pump room shall be labeled and its doors are to be made of hard timber, opening
outwards.
v. A hoist or gantry crane as appropriate should be installed for lifting the pumpsets.
vi. The building shall be of R.C. design with a flat R.C. roof and painted according to the
colour scheme of JBA.
vii. The pump station shall be fenced up with 8 - 0 high ht dip galvanized fencing and the
compound surrounding the pumphouse within the fencing shall be tarred.
viii. Fire extinguisher to be provided.
ix. To provide first aid and CPR posters framed up on wall.
x. To provide suitably sized rubber mat in front of switch board.
b) Suction Tanks
i. Suction Tanks size shall not be less than 5% at storage tank capacity.
ii. Ball valves, if used, shall be of the copper type.
c) Pumps
i. Minimum of two pumps with one unit duty and the other as standby.
ii. Pumps shall be automatically controlled with stainless steel electrodes installed at the
suction and storage tanks.
iii. Rate of pumping must fill tank between 4 - 6 hours.
iv. By pass shall be provided at the pump incorporated with non-return valve.
v. To state the make, model and duty of pumps.
vi. A suitable surge anticipating valve shall be installed on the delivery line and the
discharge connected to the drain. House in a chamber with locked cover.
vii. The standby pump shall be able to operate as a duty pump and vice versa through a
selector switch installed on the starter panel.
viii. The standby pump shall operate in addition to the duty pump when the roof tank storage
is to low.
ix. No power driven ump shall be supplied with direct water supply except from the suction
tank.
x. Suction and delivery pressure gauges of min 100mm diameter shall be fixed for each
pump. Individual check valves and flexible joints shall be provided.
xi. Maintenance space of min 900mmm shall be provided around each piece of equipment.
xii. A steel cabinet of size 1.5m x 0.6m x 0.6m shall be provided at each pumping station
for keeping of spare parts.
xiii. Suction and delivery pipe to be provided with adaptor flange.
xiv. Pump set shall be installed according to JBA specification. All design calculations must
be submitted to Consultant/ JBA for approval.
d) Mechanical & Electrical
i. To provide alarm when the water level in roof tanks drops below the standby pump
starts level.
ii. Where standby generator is provided, the pump motors shall be connected to the
generator via automatic switching.
iii. A float switch shall be fixed at the storage tanks to stop the pump if overflow occurs.
An indicator light & a reset button shall be provided for manual reset of indicator light.
The subsequent running of the pump shall not be affected by the operation of the float
switch.
iv. Two 15 amp. Switch socket outlets & adequate lighting in & around the station shall be
provided.
v. All buttons on the starter panel, pipelines and pumps must be properly identified &
labeled.
Page 183 of 262

vi. A framed laminated circuit diagram shall be provided and placed in a convenient
position inside the pump room.
vii. Float type level indicators shall be provided for both the suction and roof storage tanks
and the wires used for these indicators shall be of the soft steel wire cable type.
viii. A magnetic flow recorder is required at each pump station. The recorder shall have
indicator, integrator and recording chart for the flow & pressure. Chart drive can be
electrical of 8 - day mechanical clock.
ix. To provide a magflow meter. The magflow meter shall be erected in a chamber
according to JBA standard drawing suitably dimensioned and provided with a cover.
x. Minimum duration between start and stop operations shall be 20 minutes.
xi. Single phasing relay to be provided.
xii. To submit M&E shop drawing for approval.
11.4.2. Domestic Pumps
i. The pumps supplied must have a local agent with good reputation & after sales service.
The pumps chosen for the project must have been extensively used before by others &
proven to be reliable. Pumps with unknown quality & poor local agent will not be
accepted.
ii. All the pumps must be selected such that they are operating at or near the maximum
efficiency point. In general, pumps operating below 60% will be rejected.
iii. For the cold water pumps, the pumps shall be centrifugal type with direct coupled motor.
The motor shall be 3-phase, 415V, 50Hz & TEFC type conforming to BS 4999 & BS
5000. The pump body shall be cast iron, the impeller bronze & the shaft stainless steel.
The pump & the motor shall be truly mounted on a common base frame.
11.4.3. Pump Control System
i. For the cold water pumps, there are two pumps operating on standby/alternative system.
When pump No. 1 has stopped, the next start will cause pump No. 2 to start
automatically. The next start will be back to pump No. 1 & so on. A manual selector
switch shall also be provided so that a particular pump may be selected to operate if the
other pump is faulty. A low level switch in the suction tank will cause the pumps to stop
when the water level is reduced to a predetermined level.
ii. The pump level controls are achieved by using stainless steel electrodes or float switches
built in the pump. If stainless steel electrodes are used, each of them shall be sleeved with
a PVC tubing to prevent foreign matters short-circuiting the electrodes. The control levels
are such that the pump shall not start more than 15 times per hour.
11.4.4. Standard Specification for Vertical Multistage Pump Sets
Contractor shall furnish, install and place in operation Vertical lnline type Booster Water
Pumpsets similar to Salmson or approved equivalent and all appurtenances call for herein.
Pump Performance: Each pump shall be designed for pumping water at capacity & head as
specified.
The pump shall be multistage vertical inline type with ·cartridge'
assembly inside a stainless steel & assembled between 2 end covers by
external tie bolts to allow quick replacement of cartridge during pump
service.
The pump shall also incorporate the feature of facilitating the
replacement of mechanical seal without dismantling the motor & pipe
line for motor HP of 4kw & above. The maximum speed of the pump
sets shall not exceed 2900 rpm.
Pump shall be capable of handling water in the range of 4°C to 40°C for
continuous of 24 hrs operation & suitable for 1000KPa working pressure
unless otherwise stated outlet vec shall not exceed 4.2 m/s at the point of
discharge & each pump suction shall be at least one size larger than its
discharge.
Pump Construction: Casing - The pump casing/outer sleeve should be of stainless steel type.
The hydrostatic test pressure should be 1.5 times of pump shut off
pressure.
Impeller - The impeller shall be of the double curved blades type & shall
be constructed of Bronze Noryl PO-786 developed by G.E. Impeller
shall be accurately balance to provide for smooth performance
Page 184 of 262
throughout its operating range. The rotation of the impeller shall be anti-
clockwise view from the drivers end of the pump.
Shaft - The shaft shall be of stainless steel Grade 316. The diameter of
shaft shall be sized to withstand all induced stresses.
Bearing - Bearing should be pumped liquid lubricated of ceramic type. It
shall be design as such that the lower guide bearing shall be above the
1st stage of impeller ensuring perfect lubrication of the bearing bush &
better adaption to presence of slightly sandy water.
Bearings shall be self aligning ball or roller type positively located on
shafts. Bearings shall be selected for an operation life of not less than
100,000 hours & shall be fitted with lubricant restraining & dust
excluding seals.
Seal - The seal should be of graphite with ceramic faces or balanced
mechanical type.
Pump Driver: Each pump shall be vertically direct driven with two sets of adjusted
rigid coupling. The traditional way of mounting through 2 coupling
valves fastened by means of 4 Allen Screw are not acceptable. It shall be
coupled to a totally enclosed fan-cooled type squirrel cage induction
motor of class B insulation of IP54 enclosure as standard.
Motor and drives: Motors shall each have a minimum kW rating of not less than the max.
power required by the pump when projecting the system resistance curve
to the max. impeller size. Motors shall comply in all respects with the
"Motors" clause in the section on "Electrical works" of this specification.
Pump Base: Each pump & motor set shall be provided with a common, rigid, fully
welded, steel base fabricated from standard rolled steel sections hot dip
galvanized & provided with height saving brackets & vibration isolation
mounts.
Noise & Vibration All motors/impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced to
Levels: International Standard ISO - 1940 "Balanced Quality of Rotating Rigid
Bodies" & shall be free from vibration at all operating speeds & during
starting & stopping cycles.
11.5. PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

11.5.1. Piping Installation
a) The installation of all pipe work systems shall comply with all latest Local Authorities
regulations & requirements.
b) Drawings are generally diagrammatic & indicative of work to be installed. Run &
arrangement of piping are approximately as indicated, subject to modifications as required
to suit conditions at building, to avoid interference work of other trades, or for proper,
convenient & accessible location of all parts of piping systems. All required offsets,
fittings, valves, traps, drains, etc shall be provided even they may not be indicated. Refer to
& carefully check architectural, structural, electrical & mechanical drawings & details,
beams, columns locations of beam core holes, location of pipe shafts & arrange work
accordingly, furnishing all offsets, valves, traps, drains, etc required to meet such
conditions.
c) Piping shall be run straight & direct as possible in general forming right angles with or
parallel with walls or other piping & neatly spaced, with risers erected plumb & true. Pipes
shall be installed so that there is clearance of at least 25mm between finished covering
(fitted hubs on uncovered piping) or piping & also between finished covering or fitted hubs
& adjoining work. Hang piping at or in ceiling from construction above, as close as
possible to bottom of slabs, beams, etc maintaining maximum headroom at all times.
Obtain from Architect's drawings approved ceiling heights & install work above this
height.
d) Where pipes pass through the roof a 150mm high sleeve shall be provided. The contractor
shall over flash this up stand to the respective pipe.
e) The contractor shall, two weeks before pouring of concrete, furnish for the approval of the
consulting engineers drawings showing the details and locations of all the core holes to be
Page 185 of 262

cast in the beams, walls and floor slabs. No core holes shall cut through any structural
members without the written approval of the structural engineer.
f) All horizontal sanitary plumbing piping shall be run at uniform grade & as indicated in the
following schedule unless noted otherwise on the drawing.
INTERNAL (WITHIN BUILDING) EXTERNAL (OUTSIDE BUILDING)
PIPE SIZE GRADIENT (Approximate) PIPE SIZE GRADIENT (Approximate)
32mm 1:20 100mm 1:60
40mm 1:20 150mm 1:80
50mm 1:20 200mm 1:100
65mm 1:30 230mm 1:250
80mm 1:30
100mm 1:40
125mm 1:60
150mm 1:80
g) All vent pipes shall have a minimum gradient of 1: 40 unless noted otherwise on the
drawings.
h) Every section of branch supply piping shall be controlled by a stop valve where it is
connected into the supply main.
i) Each group of fixtures shall have separate control valves located so as to be accessible.
j) Piping connections under 50mm to all pumps, tanks, automatic valves & to all other
specialty equipment shall be made up with unions.
k) Sufficient elbows & offsets shall be provided to permit free expansion & contraction.
Reducers or increasers shall be used where changing pipe sizes.
l) Ream or file each cut pipe to remove burrs. Inspect each length of pipe & each fitting for
m) workmanship & clear passageway.
n) Cover, cap or plug open ends of all piping with wood or metal plugs or caps during
construction, to prevent damage to threads or flanges & prevent entry of foreign matter,
rags, paper or miscellaneous construction materials will not be acceptable for this purpose.
o) All exposed, finished, polished, or enameled connections to fixtures shall be put up with
special care, showing no tool marks or threads at fittings & piping. No bowed or bent
piping will be permitted.
p) All piping through finished rooms & corridors shall be carried in partitions, in chases, or in
recesses where same are provided in the walls, through the floors & in furred ceilings, run
exposed pipes only as directed.
q) All buried pipe work shall be properly & adequately supported prior to back filling or
casting into concrete & proper precaution shall be taken to ensure that the supports are not
displaced or removed during the back filling or casting of concrete. Earth shall be well
rammed under and around the pipes to prevent settlement or lateral movement.
11.5.2. Piping Materials
a) Materials used shall be the best of their respective kinds manufactured in accordance with
the relevant British Standard Specifications & with the local authorities specifications.
b) The words 'or approved materials' as indicated in the specification shall mean that such
materials shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before being used.
c) The piping system to be provided under this specification shall conform with the following
requirements:
System Material Pipe Size Design Design
Range Pressure Temperatur
Range
-Below Ground UPVC Brown 1000 & above 70 kPa 2'C-100'C
Soil Vent
-Above Ground UPVC/MUPVC to BS Up to 1000 70 kPa 2'C-50'C
5255 & 4514
-Below Ground UPVC Brown Up to 1000 70 kPa 2'C-50'C
HDPE 1500 & above 70 kPa 2'C-50'C
Condensate Drain UPVC Class C to BS All 250 kPa 2'C-50'C
1387
Cold water ABC Blue All 700 kPa 10'C-60'C
-Incoming mains to tanks &
Distribution Pipe
Page 186 of 262
-All other pipes UPVC/MUPVC to BS All 700 kPa 10'C-60'C
5255&4151
Hot Water Copper to BS 2871 All 700 kPa 10'C-100'C
Table X
Meter Stand Stainless Steel /MS pipe All 700 kPa 10'C-100'C
Pipe material and pressure rating

Class Conforms To Pressure Test
a. Grey Cast Iron 213 MS 708 125 bar
b. Ductile Iron - MS 4772 16 bar
c. HDPE Pipe 15 MS 1058 15 bar
d. ABS Class' 15' 15 MS 5391 15 bar
e. ABS 9 - 10 bar
f. ABS Class' 12.5' - BS 1387 12 bar
g. Steel Pipe - MS 534 15 bar
h. Sluice Valve - BS 5163 16 bar
i. Air Relief Valve - - 16 bar
j. Hydrant - BS 750 16 bar
k. Cupper Pipe - BS 5391 8 bar
d) All piping shall be of the best available quality & shall be supplied in clean full standard
straight lengths, free from any defects such as mill scale, rust, burns, dents, kinks, etc. &
with all ends sealed against the ingress of foreign matter & protected against mechanical
damage. All piping shall be kept in a clean condition at all times during storage, fabrication,
installation & testing.
i. HDPE Pipe
- HPPE is made up of polyethylene thermoplastic polymer materials.
- HDPE pipe to comply to ISO classification PE 80 or M.S standard 1058 Part 2, 2002
"n". The minimum nominal pressure for HOPE pipe design stress is 6.3 N/mm.
- Fitting for connection of HOPE pipe shall be the method of electro fusion / clap, or
compression fitting (Hansen).
ii. ABS Pipe
- ABS plastic pipe is made of high quality thermoplastic polymer materials-
Acrylonitrile, Butadiene, and styrene and has the properties of non-toxicity,
corrosion-proof, high impact and environmental friendly. ABS pipe to follows
specification of MS 1419 Part 1 standard for pipes and MS 1419 Part 2 for fittings.
The pipe has to resistance to chemicals and corrosive, industrial liquids & must not
require any maintenance. The pipe must withstand for 1 hour of continuous working
pressure of 38kg/cm2 between 21°C-25°C & remain in perfect condition for at lease
50 years in normal environment.
- 100% toxic free, no heavy metal stabilizer and comply to MS 1583: Part 1
:2003.Heat loss 200 times less than iron pipe and performs consistently between --
40°C - +80°C.
- Formation of slime or scale, no restriction to flow of fluids & withstand impact even
at very low temperature.
11.5.3. Pipe Supports
a) General
- All pipes shall be adequately supported & appropriately restrained by hangers, brackets,
pedestals, clips, rollers & expansion joints & anchors designed to suit the requirements
of each piping system.
- The location of anchors & all major supports shall be shown on the shop drawings
together with the details & type of support proposed.
- All piping exposed to view in such location such as plant rooms, service tunnels & on
roof areas shall be supported from common supports where practicable & shall be run in
neat groups.
- All steel supports, anti-vibration hangers, brackets, pedestals & associated fittings shall
be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated after fabrication & dissimilar metals shall be
isolated by approved types of non conductive materials.
Page 187 of 262
b) Support Loadings and Spacings
- All piping supports shall be designed to take the combined loads of pipes, valves,
fittings, insulation (if applicable) & fluid in the pipes & all reactions due to thermal
expansion or contraction of the piping.
- All valves shall be located as close as possible to points of support & all valves in line
sizes 200mm & larger shall be separately supported.
- All supports shall be capable of keeping the piping in proper alignment & shall conform
with all appropriate statutory and code requirements.
- Notwithstanding the above, supports for piping shall be located at centers not exceeding
the following:-
Pipe Size mm Maximum Spacings of Support mm
Horizontal Vertical
15 & 20 1,500 2,000
25 & 32 2,000 2,500
40 & 50 2,500 3,000
65 3,000 4,000
80 & 100 3,500 4,000
125 4,000 5,000
150 5,000 6,000
200 6,000 6,000
250 & Over 7,000 6,000
- Spacings shall be closer than specified where required by relevant standard codes or
where recommended by the piping materials manufacturer.
- All pipe work shall be internally restrained in a similar manner to maintain alignment
under all conditions (at not greater than 6 m centres).
- Capillary tubing shall be clipped to large pipes or steel battens at 400mm interval.
c) Pipe Clamps and Saddles
- All individually hung pipes shall be provided with bolted, two-piece type clamps.
However for pipe sizes 65. or less, bolted, one-piece type clamps may be used in
approved locations.
- All clamps shall be rated for the full load of the pipe plus its fluid contents, insulation,
flanges, valves & fittings. Where necessary, particularly in respect of hung pipes of 200
mm and larger the spacings of supports shall be reduced in order to reduce the loads to
within the rated carrying capacities of the clamps.
- All insulated lines on services operating at or below 60'C, shall have hardwood saddles
located between the clamps & the pipes. The saddles shall consist of wedge shaped
hardwood blocks arranged to form complete circular collars of the same thickness as the
insulation & have lengths sized to project approximately 10mm on either side of the
clamps.
- All clamps & collars described above shall be firmly attached to pipe work and/or
insulating saddles without applying undue pressure to the pipe walls.
- Allowance for movement due to thermal expansion & contraction shall be in the method
of support (e.g. hanger rods or rollers) & not between the pipe & the saddle or clamp.
Vibration shall be absorbed by the use of anti-vibration hangers.
d) Hanger Rods
All hanger rods & associated fittings shall be fabricated from hot dip galvanized or zinc
plated mild steel bar of not less than the following diameters:-
Pipe Size mm Rod Diameter mm
Up to 50 (inclusive) 10
65 & 80 12
100 & 125 16
150 & Over 20
e) Fixed Supports
- Where no allowance need be made for expansion, contraction or vibration, hanger rods
may be fixed direct to floor slabs, structural members or to support brackets fixed to
floor slabs, walls or structural members. Alternatively, the pipes may be clamped
directly on to support brackets fixed to floor slabs, walls or structural members.
Page 188 of 262

- Where more pipes are to be run in parallel & adjacent to each other, they shall be
supported from common channel section rigid brackets or trapeze type supports fixed to
floor slabs, structural members of walls as appropriate.
- All propriety type channel sections shall be installed & used strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations particularly in respect of maximum allowable
loadings.
- All supports, brackets, pedestals & other ferrous fixings shall be fully detailed on shop
drawings for approval prior to manufacture.
f) Moving Supports
- Moving supports shall be provided in all cases where the pipes are subject to movement
due to expansion or contraction & the supports shall be designed to allow for the
maximum possible movement involved.
- Where hanger rods are used to take up this movement, they shall be selected such that
the ratio of the effective rod length between pivots, to the maximum movement of the
pipe is not less than 6:1.
- All hanger rods used for moving type supports shall be provided with "U" type brackets
having over-sized holes for the rods. Similarly the clevis or welded yokes on the pipe
clamps shall have oversized holes for the rods. The rods shall be secured at both ends
with spherical washers & lock-nuts. Nuts shall not be used on any part of the rod
between the bracket & the clevis or welded yoke.
- Where the ratio of the effective rod length between pivots, to be maximum movement
of the pipe exceeds 12:1, flat washers nay be used instead of spherical washers.
- Where sufficient rod length cannot be provided to take the maximum movement of the
pipe & the movement is less than 25' from the vertical swing, spring & double
deflection hangers similar to Manson PC 30N-400 & 30N-400 shall be used.
- Where pipe movement is extensive due to high operating temperatures, rigid channel
section brackets or trapeze type supports shall be used complete with rollers to
accommodate pipe movement.
- All supports & fittings shall be fully detailed on shop drawings for approval prior to
manufacture.
- Where roller or sliding supports are required for use with insulated pipes, the insulation
shall be rigid for at least four pipe diameters & sheathing shall be of heavy gauge
galvanized sheet steel forming a sleeve adequate to fully support internal pipe work &
to protect insulation during movements.
g) Anchors
- Anchors shall be provided where necessary and/or where shown on drawings to provide
reactions for expansion devices & flexible type connections to prevent excessive
expansion or contraction forces in pipe work from being transmitted to equipment.
- On steel pipes, anchors shall be fully welded to the pipe unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings.
- On copper pipes the anchor shall comprise bronze flanges or clips fully brazed to the
pipe & bolted to galvanize fabricated mild steel anchor plates with approved type non
conductive washers & bushes to isolate the dissimilar materials & obviate electrolytic
action.
- The anchors shall be so designated so that all welds are in shear not bending & shall be
attached to the building structure in a location & manner which will prevent any
damage to the structure to which they are attached.
- Details of fabrication and method of fixing all anchors to structural members shall be
shown on shop drawings for approval.
- No anchor shall be attached to any part of the building structure until full approval has
been obtained for the location & method of fixing the anchor.
h) Welding
All welding on supports, brackets, pedestals, anchors & all ancillary items shall be carried
out by qualified & competent tradesman & with adequate supervision.
11.5.4. Pipe Expansion
a) Provision shall be made in all piping arrangements for expansion under operating
conditions by use of expansion loops or full radius bends of approved type as shown on the
drawings & where necessary.
Page 189 of 262
b) Provision shall also be made in all piping arrangements for dimensional alterations to the
building structure due to such factors as concrete shrinkage and wind loadings.
c) If pipe runs are straight in any direction for a distance of 30m or more on one side of an
anchor point expansion bends or pipe deviation shall be provided to approval.
d) Where required, solid anchor ages of welded structural steel construction shall be provided
(set in concrete if necessary).
e) Where it is not practicable owing to space limitations to provide allowance for expansion
as previously described approved type bellows may be used subject to these meeting the
system pressure & temperature requirements. Bellows shall be installed in complete
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
f) The contractor shall ensure that all necessary measures are taken to avoid excessive
stresses in the pipe work or fittings. Unless otherwise specified, expansion joints or loops
shall be provided in all straight run piping wherever firmly anchored at both ends. The
preferred method will be to use loops or offsets either manufactured or site produced.
Expansion joints will only be used when specified or where loops or offsets cannot be used
due to the limitations imposed on site.
g) Whenever expansion joints have to be used they shall be Packless Bellows' type & shall
have stainless steel bellows of smooth curvilinear contour hydraulically formed from tubes
containing only longitudinal weld & shall be externally reinforced by means of snug fitting
rings of material & design appropriate to the service conditions. All expansion joint shall
be provided with stainless steel slip-type internal guide sleeves.
h) The bellow shall be designed to withstand, without failure, not less than 5000 opposing
movement per annum. They shall be installed in line with the axis of the pipe & shall be
free from compression, tension, or torsion. Two anchored pipe guides per joint shall be
fitted to the pipe to restrain internal movement.
i) Expansion joints shall not be used to correct misaligned pipes.
j) All anchors, guides & supports will be installed in accordance with good piping practice.
Anchors shall be of substantial steel or malleable iron construction suitable for dead-weight
frictional loads & for pressure, flow & thermal forces as indicated by the expansion joint
manufacturer; they shall preferably be welded to the pipe work.
11.5.5. Pipe Penetration Sleeves and Cover Plates
a) All galvanized & black steel pipes passing through walls, floors or partitions shall be fitted
with pipe sleeves of galvanized pipe cut-offs.
b) Generally, pipe sleeves shall be one nominal diameter larger than the service pipe
concerned except for 100 mm bore & above where the sleeves may be constructed from
3mm thick (minimum) galvanized sheet steel. In this case the constructed pipe sleeve shall
have an annular clearance of 25 mm between the sleeve and the pipe, or pipe insulation in
the case of insulated pipes.
c) Pipe sleeve fitted in walls or partitions shall have the ends flushed with the finished
surfaces of the walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves fitted in floors shall generally end with
15mm above the finished floor level except indoor wet areas, such as plant room, etc.,
where the sleeves shall end 100mm above the finished floor level.
d) Where pipes pass through floors & fire walls the annular space between the sleeve & the
pipe shall be tightly caulked with asbestos robes of suitable 0 throughout the entire length
of the sleeves or other approved method.
e) Where water tight construction is necessary the annular space between the sleeves & the
pipe shall be caulked with oakum & lead or other approved method of construction.
f) Where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings or internal partitions in occupied areas
heavy duty chromium plated escutcheons shall be provided & fixed after the final coat of
painting & interior decorations are completed.
11.5.6. Installation
a) All piping shall be run generally parallel to the axes of the building as close to the ceiling
or other construction as practical & free of unnecessary traps or bends. Bending or
offsetting of finished piping connections & "cocking" of fittings or trim will not be
permitted.
b) No pipe shall be installed so as to cause an unacceptable noise under normal operations. If
such a noise does occur, then the Sub-Contractor will alter the pipe work as necessary & as
directed by the Engineer.
Page 190 of 262
c) Install piping clear of all doors, windows, access spaces, service areas, etc.
d) Where immersion thermostats or thermometer bulbs are installed in small piping, the pipe
shall be at least one size larger than the main straight run.
e) All cut pipes shall be reamed and filled to remove burrs.
f) All ends of pipes shall be capped with metal or PVC caps, or if not screwed, with wooden
plugs. Any other method will not be accepted.
g) Supply & install on all vents, stacks & other piping passing through the roof or walls a
stack counter flashing fitting, consisting of an overlapping coupling, caulked to the pipe
with poured lead, or screwed to the pipe with a water tight joint. The couplings shall extend
over a cylindrical flashing sleeve & be made watertight with Permaseal, or similar
compound.
h) Cover flashing shall be brazed all around & shall lap over the flashing a minimum distance
of four inches.
11.5.7. Joints
a) Piping connections less than 65mm to all valves & equipment shall be made with unions.
All pipe connections 65mm & over shall be flanged. Final solid connections will not be
accepted.
b) Except for connections to equipment as specified above, steel pipes shall be welded.
c) In welded piping, directional changes & branch connections shall be made with factory
fabricated swept welded fittings. Field fabricated fittings made of lengths of piping will not
be accepted.
Screwed joints - make up tight using wicking or permacell tape or as
approved; apply on male threads only.
Flanged Joints - supply & install 1.5mm asbestos free composition
or cotton duck reinforced red rubber gaskets,
suitable for the temperature & pressure of the
service. Each gasket shall be stamped with the
manufacturer's name or trade mark.
Capillary joints - in copper piping shall be made with approved silver
solder joint fittings.
MUPVC/UPVC/PVC Joints - shall be fusion-weld of non-heat application method
all as per manufacturer's instructions.
Cast iron joints - shall be lead caulked.
Ductile iron cement lined joints - shall utilize rubber ring joints.
ABS pipe - shall be apply as per manufacturer instruction
11.5.8. Pipe Insulation

All hot water pipe insulation shall be of pre-formed mineral wool sections or closed cell
insulation of minimum 25mm thick, 144kg/m density & sheathed with 24g aluminium sheet.
The thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.027 W/mK at 20'C. Condensate drain pipe
insulation shall be closed cell insulation of similar thermal properties of minimum 25mm thick
& sheathed with 24g aluminium sheet.
11.5.9. Drain Points and Vents - Water System
a) Supply & install automatic air vents, manual vents, at all high points & drain points at low
points of all water systems.
b) All drain points, & manual & automatic vents, shall be piped by means of suitable
galvanized iron pipe or copper tubing as designated to physically accessible termination
points in the system as appropriate. Manual vents shall be fitted with plug cocks & a drain
run to discharge 25mm above the nearest floor drain, into a tundish or drip pan as
appropriate. Drain points shall be installed with gate valves & fitted with hose connections
on water circulating systems.
c) Piping - Each & every high point of the piping shall be provided with suitable venting. In
ceiling space, concealed areas & where the high point is above 3m, an automatic 12mm
float type air relief valve shall be installed for easily accessible areas. All such valves &
fittings shall have pressure rating appropriate for the duty intended. At each low point
supply & install a 25mm gate valve with hose connection.
11.5.10. Flexible Connections
Page 191 of 262

a) Propriety flexible connections shall only be used where shown on the drawings or where
specified in particular section of the specification. Irrespective of the need or otherwise for
flexible connections, connection to pumps & similar equipment shall be arranged in such a
manner as to eliminate undue strains in piping & equipment. If used, flexible connections
for water systems shall be of the reinforced rubber type with flanged ends.
b) Isolated tension member or other approved means shall be provided as necessary to prevent
excessive elongation.
c) All flexible connections shall be suitable for the maximum working pressure & temperature
at the point of their installation. Appropriate fittings & bends shall be furnished as
necessary to avoid springing of pipes during assembly.
11.5.11. Identification of Piping
All pipe work shall be painted, colour banded & lettered in accordance to "Painting & Finishes"
section of this specification.
11.5.12. Valves and Fittings
a) All valves & fittings shall be the standard products of approved manufacturers.
b) All valves shall be suitable & correctly sized for each application & unless otherwise
shown shall be of pipeline size. Control valves & bypass valves shall be selected to suit the
operating characteristics of the system.
c) Control valves & valves such as pressure reducing, safety & relief valves, shall be selected
to meet the pressure & operating characteristics of the system in which they are installed
with pressure drops & velocities strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
d) All valves & fittings shall be suitable for the system design pressure & in any case not less
than 1000kPa design pressure.
e) All valves, controls, & accessories shall be installed in positions readily accessible for
operating & maintenance. Thermometers, pressure gauges & similar instruments shall be
readily visible after installation. Upon completion of the piping system & before placing it
in service valve packing shall be thoroughly examined & where necessary replaced.
f) The connection between each valve & adjacent lines shall be made with either flanges or
unions to permit removal of the valves.
g) Pockets for thermometers & similar purposes shall be located in positions where no
adverse effects occur to flow conditions.
h) All pockets are steel lines shall be of the removable (screwed) stainless steel type inserted
through screwed type bosses welded to the pipe.
i) All pockets in copper lines shall be of the fixed copper tube type with the bottom end
blanked off & the pocket brazed into the copper pipe.
j) Pockets shall project sufficiently far into the pipe to give a good reading & shall complete
with minimum of 50mm depth of approved heat conducting fluid & shall be capped.
k) Pipes smaller than 65mm shall be enlarged to accommodate the pockets without loss in
flow area. Pockets shall be vertical or set at an angle to retain the heat conducting fluid.
l) Bosses for pressure gauges & similar purposes shall be of a standard internally screwed
type, welded or brazed as appropriate at right angle to the pipes & sized as required for
each application. The lengths & outside diameter of the pipe bosses shall be kept to a
minimum consistent with pipe sizes.
m) All gauges on pumps & similar equipment shall be neatly installed on pressed stainless
steel sheet metal panels or solid hardwood timber panels to approval.
n) All thermometer pockets, universal pressure/temperature tappings, thermometers, pressure
gauge tappings, pressure gauges, orifice fittings shall be provided as shown on drawings, as
specified, & where necessary for the success operation of each system.
11.5.13. Type of Joints
a) UPVC Pipe to BS 4515, 5255 & 4660: All joints shall be solvent welded to AS2032 using
the manufacturer's approved cement. Seal ring fittings to be used only where necessary to
accommodate thermal movement. Pipe to fitting, glue / solvent shall be manufacturer
recommended.
b) ABS Pipe: Pipe to fitting, glue/ solvent shall be manufacturer recommended.
11.5.14. Erection of Pipes and Fittings
a) All pipes & fittings shall be cleaned just prior to installation. All exposed ends shall be
adequately sealed against ingress of dirt, etc.
Page 192 of 262
b) The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, labour & equipment necessary for
the installation of pipes & fittings. Straight pipe runs shall be in continuous lengths as far
as possible, with the number of joints kept to the absolute minimum. On all changes of
directions, easy sweep bends long elbows or tee fittings shall be used. Short elbows may
only be used where a physical problem warrants it.
c) A minimum clearance of 2" (50mm) between pipes & nearest obstruction shall be
maintained, unless otherwise approved. All pipes & fittings shall be installed in locations
as indicated in drawings & as near to the columns as possible. The pipes & fittings shall be
installed in positions such that future connections from floors above can be made plumb &
true. Should the Contractor install pipes & fittings in position otherwise, he shall be
responsible for the expenses incurred for the rectification works involved.
d) Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of the
pipes used in this Contract furnish directions differed or not shown in the drawings &
specifications.
e) All buried pipes connections shall be extended 12" (300mm) above floor slabs & shall be
blanked off with removable plugs or stoppers which could be removed without difficulty
for future above ground connections.
f) All buried cast iron pipes shall be encased in concrete surrounds & to the requirements of
the local authorities.
g) Pipes shall be properly supported & adequate provision shall be made for expansion,
contraction, slope & anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to
measurements established at the construction site. Pipes shall be inserted into places
without springing or forcing.
h) Where pipes pass through fire barriers like walls, slabs, beams, etc, pipe of one (1) size
larger of similar material shall be provided. The space between the pipe & the sleeve shall
be fully packed with fire proof material to form an effective fire seal without hindering
pipe expansion & contraction. Sleeves through floor slabs shall be extended 50mm above
finished floor level.
i) Concrete angle blocks shall be provided at every bend, branches & dead-end in buried
pipes to resist hydraulic thrust.
11.5.15. Cleaning Eyes and Inspection Openings
Inspection & cleaning eyes shall be provided on all soil, waste & combined pipes so as to
provide access for the proper inspection & cleaning of the entire length of pipe. All bends &
junctions shall be provided with cleaning eye, secured airtight by means of a washer & non-
corrodible bolted cover for proper inspection & cleaning.
11.5.16. Cleaning of Pipes & Fittings, Sanitary Fittings, Traps, Floor & Roof Drains
a) The Contractor is responsible for all necessary measures to ensure that all pipes, fittings,
sanitary fittings, traps, roof & floor wastes, etc are clear of rubbish, debris & any blockage,
during installation.
b) On completion & before handing over, all above works shall be cleared out & flushed with
water. The Contractor shall provide all materials & labour for carrying out the cleaning
operation.
11.5.17. Pipe Joints
a) Joints for Galvanized Pipes
All pies & fittings shall be connected by screwed socket joints. Any exposed thread after
jointing shall be painted with antirust coating before applying the finishing coat of painting.
b) Joints for Unplasticised PVC Pipes.
PVC pipes & fittings shall be connected either by cold set adhesive or any other jointing
method as recommended by the manufacturer. The adhesive shall be of the type
recommended by the pipe & fittings manufacturer & all jointing parts of the pipes &
fittings shall be carefully prepared in accordance to the recommended practice by
manufacturer.
11.5.18. Access Opening
a) Sufficient access shall be provided to enable all pipe work to be cleaned & tested. Access
openings of adequate size shall generally be provided on the vertical stack directly opposite
a branch line, at the extreme end of a main branch & at bends.
b) Rectangular access openings shall be equal in width to the full diameter of the pipe & in
length to at least one & a haft times the width.
Page 193 of 262
c) Oval access openings shall have an area of not less than the cross sectional area of the pipe
to which they are fitted.
d) The internal face of the cover shall be shaped to form a true completion of the bore of the
pipe. The openings shall be made gastight & water-tight with secured with good quality
rubber washers, and covers firmly secured with gunmetal or other suitable screws or studs.
11.5.19. Testing Gates
Testing gates shall be located on the vertical stacks between floors to enable each floor to be
tested independently as specified hereafter.
11.5.20. Fixture Trap
a) Plumbing fixture, except those having integral traps, shall be separately trapped by a water-
seal, placed as close to the fixture outlet as possible.
b) Trap seals, if not provided with union connections at each & to permit removal for rodding,
shall have an accessible brass trap screw of ample size protected by this water seal.
11.5.21. Floor Waste
The Sub-Contractor shall supply & install floor wastes comprising 4" x 3" gully traps complete
with inlet riser & chromium plated screwed grating at a level to enable the floor to be graded to
same & connect to the drainage system with 3"0 UPVC pipe complete with all necessary
inspection eye fittings.
11.5.22. Grease Interceptor
a) Grease interceptor shall be fitted with approved tight fittings cover designed to prevent
emission of odors.
b) Grease Interceptor shall be completed with baffles, non-skid cover, cleanout, lock & lift
ring, neoprene gasket etc. similar to Smith Grease Interceptor 8000 series or equivalent.
c) The biomatic enzymes must be applied as per manufacturer's recommendation. Grease
Interceptor supplied shall fully comply with requirement as set by PDI (Plumbing and
Drainage Institute).
11.5.23. Floor Drain Traps
a) Floor Drain Traps shall be of stainless steel to grade 304 of size 12" x 12" complete with
stainless steel sediment bucket of the same grade. These floor drain traps shall be used to
install at the kitchen areas.
b) Floor Drain Traps shall be fully comply to the requirement as set by PDI (Plumbing And
Drainage Institute) Similar to Smith Series 3009 or equivalent)
11.5.24. Appliances
All sanitary appliances, WC's, sinks, basins, traps etc. shall be supplied by others but fixing &
installation inclusive of supplying the necessary connectors, fittings shall be by this Sub-
contractors, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. This Sub-Contractor shall connect all
soil & waste pipes to these fittings. It is the responsibility of this subcontractor to liaise with the
Main Contractor & other trades to ensure proper installation & connections are made.
11.5.25. Installation of Underground/Buried Pipe
a) Excavation and Trenching for Piping
- The Contractor shall perform all excavation to the depths indicated on the drawings or
as specified in conformance with local relevant authority requirements. All excess
excavation materials shall be removed from the site. Grading spaces be done as
necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or the excavations & any
water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved
methods.
- Sheeting & shoring shall be as necessary for the protection of the water & for the safety
of personnel.
- Excavation shall be by open-cut method, except that short sections of a trench may be
tunneled if, in the opinion of the Architect, the pipe work be safely & properly installed
& backfill can be properly tamped.
b) Trench Excavation
Trenches shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of the pipe, & the banks shall be
as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottoms of the trenches shall be accurately graded to
provide uniform bearing & supports for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at
every point along its entire length, or may be over excavated 4" (100mm) below depth
indicated & filled with well tamped salt free coarse sand or other approved materials.
Page 194 of 262

Layers of brick, concrete base & angle blocks shall be used support for the laying of
piping.
c) Depth of Cover
Trenches for utilities shall be of a depth that will provide 2'-0" minimum depth of cover
from top of pipe to finished ground level where there is reinforced concrete slabs above.
For other areas where there is no reinforced concrete slab above, the minimum depth of
cover shall be 3'-0".
d) Protection of Existing Utilities
- Existing utility lines or other completed utility lines if damaged by the Contractor shall
be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
- When connecting to existing utility lines, no section of the existing piping shall be
abandoned unless it is specifically indicated on the drawings.
e) Back filling of Trenches
Trenches shall not be back filled until all required pressure & other tests have been
performed. Backfill trenches shall be well tampered & well watered with a 6" (150mm)
layer of coarse salt-free sand under the pipes & 12 (300mm) minimum over the top of the
pipes, to 90% compaction. Backfill remaining trench & compact with soil to match
surrounding soil except under paved areas, roads & RC slabs, etc. where backfill &
compaction is to match Structural Engineer's requirements.
11.5.26. Provision for Expansion and Contraction
Wherever possible, the piping shall be arranged with sufficient bends so that system is
sufficiently flexible to absorb the whole of its own thermal expansion or contraction or level
settlement without developing excessive in the piping itself or in the connected equipment.
Where this is not practicable, approved joints shall be used.
11.5.27. Installation of Sanitary Fixtures and Accessories
a) All connections shall be made in such a manner that as much pipe work as possible is
concealed. Any exposed part of pipe work shall be neatly clipped to the approval of the
Architect.
b) All bolts, nuts & studs shall be made of stainless steel/brass for the installation of water
closets, basins, sinks, etc.
11.5.28. Testing
The completed plumbing system shall be tested for water & gas tightness as well as for
hydraulic performance.
a) Water Test
Water test shall be applied before the appliances are connected & carried out in sections so
as to limit the static head 15ft. all opening affected by the test shall be sealed & the system
filled with water. Sometime shall be allowed for absorption by the pipes & joint to take
place after which the level shall be topped up. The pipes & joints shall be inspected for
leakage. If no appreciable fall in water level occurs during a period of 10 mins. The system
shall be deemed be have passed the test.
b) Air Test
- Air-test may be applied at the upper end of the ventilation pipe shall be fitted with a tee-
piece with a cock on each branch being connected by a flexible tube to a Manometer.
Air pressure is then introduced into the system through the other branch of the tee-piece
until a pressure of 2½" water gauge is shown on the Manometer scale.
- Alternatively, the air pressure may be applied by passing a flexible tube from a tee-
piece attached to Manometer through the water scale of the trap of the sanitary
appliance, the test then carried out as described above.
c) Smoke Test
Smoke test shall be employer to locate faults indicated by the air tact. Smoke is pumped
into the system with a smoke machine, care being taken to ensure that the system is filled
with smoke before scaling with plugs.
d) Hydraulic Performance Test
- Hydraulic Performance Discharge tests shall be made from all appliances, singly &
collectively. Obstruction in any of the pipe lines shall be traced & the whole system
examined for proper hydraulic performance, including the retention of any adequate
water scale in each trap.
Page 195 of 262

- Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good & the tests repeated until a
satisfactory result is obtained.
11.6. SCHEDULE OF VALVES AND FITTINGS
11.6.1. General
a) All valves shall have a rated working pressure of not less than the test pressure of the
respective installation concerned.
b) All valves over 2" (50mm) diameter shall be flanged end. Valves up to & including 2"
(50mm) diameter may have screwed ends except that-valves with screwed ends shall not be
used where the working pressure exceeds 125psi. Flanges shall be in accordance with the
BS Tables as specified for their respective service pipe work.
c) The valves shall be of make approved for use by local water works authority & fire
department.
d) Gate valve of dimensions up to 2½" (65mm) shall conform to BS 1952. Gate valve of 2½"
(65mm) & larger shall conform to BS 3464.
e) Check valve shall generally conform to BS 1953 & where indicated. nonslam, spring
assisted check valve shall be used to reduce the effect of water hammer due to valve
closure.
f) Butterfly isolating valve shall be of cast steel body with bronze disc, stainless steel shaft &
g) Nitrite rubber seals construction, similar to Keystone manufacture.
h) Strainers shall be "y" pattern type & of the same material as the valves used. The filter
element shall be of stainless steel, robust in construction & with correct designed
perforation for the fluid handled. The contractor shall ensure that the strainer is installed in
a position for easy removal & cleaning of the filter element.
i) All valves & fittings shall be Toyo, Johns, Spirax or approved equivalent.
j) Automatic air release valve shall be installed at the high point of the system piping to
eliminate air pockets or locks. Each of these valves shall be installed with a stop cock to
permit removal of the valve when necessary.
k) Pressure reducing valves shall be installed where required by applicable codes. The valve
shall be set to control the outlet pressure of the piping system. Pressure reducing valves
shall be of adjustable, scale-proof type, with pressure gauge taps, similar to A Desbordes
manufacture.
l) The flexible connector shall be of wire & fabric with high pressure molded rubber
construction. The flanges shall be an integral part of the isolator which shall be clamped in
place using split steel flanges. The connector shall have pressure rating not less than test
pressure of the system.
11.6.2. Globe Valves
Globe valves shall be of flanged bronzed, cast iron or cast steel body with removable stainless
steel valve seat & zinc-free non-rising inside screw type spindle. Set positions shall be
permanently marked after setting.
11.6.3. Isolating Valves (Up to and including 50mm)
Gates valves shall be of the screwed bronze bodied type complete with zinc free, non-rising
inside screw type spindles.
11.6.4. Isolating Valves (over 50mm)
- Isolating valves shall over 50mm shall be butterfly wedge type with high tensile cast iron
body, Buna N seat, Bronze disc & Monel Stem.
- All butterfly valves 150mm & above shall be provided with handwheels at low level & with
chain wheels & chain when located over 2 metres above finished floor level to centre of
wheel.
11.6.5. Check Valves (over 50mm)
Check valves shall be of the swing check type with screwed bronze body with stainless steel
trim.
11.6.6. Check Valves (Up to 50mm)
Check valves over 50mm shall be of the spring loaded split plate type. Valves shall have cast
bodies aluminum bronze disc, Buna N Seal & stainless steel spring & pins, suitable for flanges.
11.6.7. Strainers
- Strainers shall be of the Y type of Spirax or approved equivalent with screwed bronze bodies
on all lines up to & including 50mm & flanged cast iron above 50mm with easily removed
Page 196 of 262
perforated brass strainer having perforations considerably less than the smallest aperture in
the system.
- Mesh shall above net free area of not less than four times that of the pipe. Strainers over
50mm shall be fitted with valve & drain line to waste to facilitate cleaning.
- The strainers shall be of such design as to allow blowing out of accumulated dirt without
discontinuity of service & to permit removal of the basket without disassembly of pipe.
- Strainer in condenser water system shall be of all bronze construction up to & including
65mm. Strainers 75mm & above shall be cast iron stainless steel trim.
- Supply & install blow-off gate valve with hose adapter, the full size of the trainer outlet, but
not larger than 50mm. Where gate valve is less than full size the 50mm connection shall be
made eccentrically at the bottom of the outlet. Keep space below such blow-off valves free
of other piping or equipment.
- Pressure rating of each strainer shall be suitable for the duty intended.
11.6.8. Pressure Relief Valves
- Relief valves shall be spring loaded, side outlet types designed to discharge at full capacity at
a pressure not greater than 10% higher than the design pressure.
- Valves shall have bronze bodies & shall be complete with renewable stainless steel disc &
seat. Springs shall be protected from contact with the working fluid. Easing gear shall be
provided. A lockable shield shall be provided to prevent unauthorized alteration of the
setting. Disc & seat shall be drained to waste.
11.6.9. Ball Float Valves
Ball valves used in tanks to provide a constant water level shall be brass with extended cast
brass level & copper or stainless steel ball & shall comply with requirements of the Local Water
Supply Authority.
11.6.10. Cold Water Stop Taps
Stop taps used on cold water make-up lines shall comply with the requirements of the Local
Water Supply Authority.
11.6.11. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be of the flanged type manufactured of high grade neoprene suitable for
the temperature & pressures involved.
11.7. SCHEDULE OF GAUGE AND INSTRUMENT FITTINGS
11.7.1. Thermometer Pocket
Thermometer pockets, suitable for insertion of mercury-in-glass or dial type thermometer shall
be provided where shown on drawings.
11.7.2. Pressure Gauges
i. The pressure gauges shall be bourden tube spring type with a dial size of not less than 4"
(100mm). Each gauge shall have a brass, duct & moisture proof case with thick protective
glass & legible white face & black figures. The calibration of dial reading shall be in both
Pascals & PSI with maximum scale reading not less than 20% above the maximum
working pressure.
ii. Gauges shall be mounted so as to be free from vibration & a gauge cock shall be provided
between the tap-off point & the gauge.
11.7.3. Thermometers
Dial type thermometers shall be of as close as possible the pressure gauge configuration & shall
be calibrated in 'c. Dial range shall be approximately twice the operating temperature range. The
limit of inaccuracy shall be +/- 1% of scale range.
11.7.4. Pressure Switches
Pressure switches shall be of micro-switch with adjustable cut-in & cut-out setting. Maximum
cut-out setting shall not exceed 20% of the operating cut-out setting & minimum differential
between the settings shall not exceed 5% of the cut-out setting.
11.7.5. Flow Switches
Flow switches shall be of the paddle type of manufacture approved by local authorities. Rating
of flow switches shall be such that the switch will close at a minimum flow rate of 10igpm
when fitted in the appropriate size of pipe. A five (5) second solid state relay to prevent false
alarm caused by water surges shall be fitted with each flow switch.
11.7.6. Automatic Air Relief Valve
Page 197 of 262

Automatic air relief valves shall be provided at all highest points & at all other points in piping
systems where air may collect, or as indicated in the drawings.
Approved type of air relief valves shall be used.
11.7.7. Ball Float Valves
The ball float valves shall be copper with brass lever & valve complete with heavy duct washer.
The valve shall be Edward Barber UK or approved equivalent.
11.7.8. Water Meter
The water meter shall be approved by the local Authorities.
11.8. SCHEDULE OF FLOAT DRAINS
11.8.1. Heavy duty Bucket Drains
Heavy duty bucket drains shall be of cast iron construction 300mm & 300mm deep complete
with stainless steel sediment bucket for connection to 100mm pipe. Grating shall be of nickel
bronze.
11.8.2. Floor Drains
For all floor drains located on Ground Floor, the drains shall of cast iron construction 100mm to
80mm pipe. Grating shall be of nickel bronze. For all floor drains located on suspended floors,
the drains shall be 100mm UPVC gully trap type for connection to 80mm0 pipe. Grating shall
be of heavy duty PVC.
11.8.3. Roof Drains
Roof drain shall be of cast iron construction 200mm for connection to 100mm pipe. Strainer
shall be self-locking dome type of nickel bronze.
11.8.4. Planter Drains
Planter drain shall be of cast iron construction 200mm complete with 200mm long adjustable
ABS perforated standpipes & clear epoxy coated polished nicalloy dome for connection to
80mm Gully Traps
11.8.5. Gully Traps
- Gullies shall be deep sealed, coated cast iron with outlet & inlets as required complete with
necessary extension piece & cast iron hinged grating. Install gullies in positions indicated,
bedded & surrounded with plain concrete 150mm thick.
- Joints of gully outlets of pipes shall be made with appropriate joints described for the type of
pipe.
11.8.6. Floor Traps/Floor Wastes
- The sub-contractor shall supply & install cast iron floor trap fittings which are associated
with the soil drainage system. The sub-contractor shall co-ordinate closely with the Main
Contractor to ensure that these floor wastes & all associated piping are correctly installed as
regards locations & levels to suit the final floor finishes.
- All floor traps shall be readily accessible for cleaning in the event of a blockage & suitable
means shall be provided to ensure that the trap seals are maintained "wet" by an adequate
flow of water from other fixtures. Floor gratings for floor shall be provided & shall be
chrome plated brass/steel hinged-type with minimum 100mm outlet.
- Samples of the fitting shall be submitted to the Architect / M&E Engineer for approval
before any gratings are installed.
11.8.7. Installation of Sanitary Fixtures
The sub-contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures including taking delivery, uploading,
sorting, assembling & jointing component parts, making all connections to services & wastes &
removing from site all packing cases & debris.
11.8.8. Underground Pipe Protection
- All underground pipe work of copper or steel construction where located below ground of
within corrosive areas shall be adequately protected with a protective adhesive wrapping of
Bituthene 3000 or approved equivalent.
- The wrapping shall adhere to the insulation & be install with a minimum 50% overlap when
covered in spiral formation over the pipe. Tape widths shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the size of pipe to be covered but shall not be less than 100mm wide for
pipe work up to 50mm.
11.9. VIBRATION ISOLATION
11.9.1. General
Page 198 of 262

- All services piping connected to mechanical equipment in the plant room shall be isolated by
isolation hangers, floor mounted isolation supports or clamp resilient supports.
- When a pipe passes through the plant room wall, a minimum of 25mm clearance shall be
provided between the pipe & the penetration in the wall. The pipe shall be supported on
either side of the hole, so that the pipe does not rest on the wall. The clearance space shall be
stuffed with fibrous filler material & sealed both sides with non-setting caulking/sealing
compound.
- The first three supports or hangers for pipe work connected to equipment in the plant room
shall be of spring in series with neoprene types with static deflection equal to machine
mounting & minimum 25mm static deflection for remaining hangers or supports in the plant
room.
- All small water pipes shall be isolated with 13mm thick resilient felt pad under pipe strap or
clamp.
- All pumps shall be connected to associated pipe work with flexible connector of below-type
or wire-reinforced neoprene piping. Twin-spheres are normally preferred.
11.9.2. Vibration Isolation Mounts
a) All vibration isolation mounts required for rotating equipment & pipe work shall be
manufactured the best quality materials & selected to last the fully life cycle of the
building.
b) When selecting vibration isolation mounts with respect to minimum installed isolation
efficiencies & recommended static deflections, due allowance shall be made for the
designed floor deflection for suspended floors & accordingly the floor deflection shall be
added to the recommended spring static deflection. Refer to the "Schedule of Anti-
Vibration isolation" clause for the minimum static deflection required for the items of
equipment.
i. Spring mounts shall be of free standing type selected & positioned so as to produce
uniform deflection for all springs.
- All spring mounts shall have a ratio of mean coil diameter to compressed length at
the specified static deflection of not less than 0.8. Spring shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the specified static deflection.
- Spring mountings shall incorporate leveling screws with locknuts & shall be used in
conjunction with ribbed neoprene pads.
- Spring shall be selected by the supplier for the duty & a check shall be made of the
surge frequency of the spring of the machine to be isolated. The surge frequency
shall not be within 30% of the predominant frequency of vibration.
ii. Neoprene Pads
Loading of ribbed neoprene pads shall be within the manufacturers' ratings & any case
shall not be greater than 400kpa.
iii. Anti-Vibration Hangers
- Anti-vibration hangers shall contain a spring & double deflecting neoprene cups in
series.
- Neoprene cups shall have a static deflection of 9mm. The complete hanger shall
have a total deflection of 25mm.
- The first three anti-vibration hangers adjacent to vibrating equipment shall be as
previously specified except that they shall be provided with the additional capability
of holding the piping at a fixed elevation during installation & shall also have a
secondary adjustment to transfer the load to the spring & maintain the same position
& scale.
11.9.3. Schedule of Anti-Vibration Isolation
i. All anti-vibration mountings & hangers shall be selected for the particular duty & in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
ii. Isolation efficiency and static deflection shall not be less than the following :
Minimum isolation Static
Equipment Type of Mounting or Hanger Efficiency Deflection
% mm
Pumps Neoprene single deflection mounts. 90 10
Water Piping Spring hangers with neoprene insert. First 95 25
Page 199 of 262

three hangers from equipment to have static
deflection equal to machine mounting
11.10. PAINTING AND FINISHES
11.10.1. General
a) This section of the specification covers the painting & finishes requirements pertaining to
the installations covered by this specification.
b) Painting shall be carried out by capable & skilled tradesmen under the direction of a
competent painter foreman & under conditions that with not mar the finish. Paint shall be
applied evenly & strictly in accordance with the specific recommendation of the
manufacturer & all on correctly prepared surfaces. Brushes, paint containers & all other
painting accessories shall be kept clean & in good condition at all accessories shall be kept
clean & in good condition at all times.
c) Where necessary, finished paint work shall be protected during the progress of site works,
by suitable dust covers.
d) Factory assembled steel components & pre-fabricated metal parts shall be painted before
dispatch with good coat of zinc chromate or other anti-corrosive primer to provide
adequate protection against the action of dampness & weather during the transport to site &
subsequent erection.
e) Materials for site fabrication such as piping, rolled steel sections & sheet metal shall be
supplied unpainted & primed after fabrication as necessary for protection against corrosion.
11.10.2. Painting (Within Building)
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, rust, scale welding flux & the like. The
surface shall then be given one (1) chromate type priming coat & two (2) finishing coats of the
colour designated below. The finishing coats shall be full gloss enamel & shall be as smooth &
free of brush marks as possible. All exposed pipes including pipes in enclosures shall be
painted.
11.10.3. Painting Exposed of Weather
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, rust, scale, welding flux & the like. The
surface shall then be given one (1) coat of heavy duty anti-corrosive primer. The second coat
shall be an anti-corrosive gloss enamel of the colour designated below.
11.10.4. Extent of work
a) Paint with first quality material as specified in this section of all parts of the installation
covered by the work of this contract to approval.
b) The work shall include painting of all exposed work, equipment & machine basses,
supports & the following items but excluding normally bright & polished metal
components.
i. Pipe work, valves, fittings & hangers exposed to view.
ii. Machine bases & plinths
iii. All plant & equipment which is not finish painted to approval in the factory.
iv. Switchboards, control panels, conduits, cable trays & electrical ducts exposed to view.
11.10.5. Material
a) Paints, fillers, temporary surface dressings & all other painting materials shall be the
products of an approved manufacturer & of the best quality in their respective types. All
painting materials shall be delivered to site in the original manufacturer's sealed & labeled
containers.
b) All paint shall be such that if applied in strict accordance with specific instructions of
manufacturer the finished surface will remain of true colour, will not fade, tarnish, peel, or
otherwise deteriorate for a minimum of three years.
c) All sealers, primers, undercoats & finishing paints shall be of the type specified by the
manufacturer as appropriate for the particular application. Sealing compounds shall be
approved proprietary fillers.
11.10.6. Equipment and Metalwork
a) Equipment supplied in a factory finished condition will be acceptable provided that the
finish is of high standard, acceptable in colour, & does not require extensive touching up.
Otherwise factory finished equipment shall be cleaned, wire brushed & painted on site with
not less than two coats of approved finishing paint.
Page 200 of 262

b) All other equipment & metalwork shall be painted with one coat of zinc chromate or
similar approved metalwork primer & two coats of full gloss enamel paint of the specified
colour.
c) All galvanized steel surfaces shall be cleaned of all oil & other protective coatings used in
manufacturer & given one complete cost of approved type etching primer before applying
the finishing coats as above.
11.10.7. Pipe works Valves and Fittings
a) All pipe work including fittings & valve shall be cleaned & painted externally with one
priming coat & two finish coats.
b) The final coat of paint on each piping service shall constitute the basic identification colour
or ground colour of the service. In addition to the basic colour all pipes shall have
identification colours painted on in the form of bands of colours & lettering to approval.
c) Alternatively, proprietary self-adhesive labels may be utilised provided that samples are
submitted for approval prior to installation.
11.10.8. Identification and Sign Wiring
a) Identification
Identification colour bands & lettering shall be painted on pipelines or alternatively
pressure sensitive tape bands may be used.
Identification shall be applied at :-
- 8000mm intervals along pipe runs.
- All branches in the system.
- Each side of a safety band
- Each side of a partition through which the pipe passes.
b) Sign Wiring
i. The following sign wiring shall be provided :-
- Arrows indicating flow direction
- Lettering indicating Flow and Return on all services
- Lettering indicating piping content at the positions specified on pipes on both sides
of all valves.
ii. Lettering codes shall be abbreviated (e.g. Domestic Hot Water - DHW) as detailed in
the "colour Scheme" clause & be in a contrasting colour in vertical Microgramme Bold
Extended letters 12mm high on larger surfaces.
iii. In addition to the above 80mm minimum length safety bands of gold yellow No.3E with
black vertical stripes shall be provided when the pipe or duct contains:
- Toxic substances
- Acids & alkali in dangerous concentrations.
iv. All items of equipment such as pumps & similar items shall be labeled in accordance
with the symbolism & equipment identification used throughout this specification &
drawings or otherwise to approval.
c) Signing Wiring Abbreviation
The following abbreviations shall be used for sign writing purposes.
Domestic Cold Water DCW
Domestic Hot Water DHW
Drain DRN
Vent VNT
Natural Gas Supply NTG
Storm Water STG
Sanitary Plumbing SP
Vent Plumbing VP
11.10.9. Concrete Bases
Where specified all concrete bases for mechanical equipment & switchboards shall be first
treated with one coat of linseed coats of approved synthetic emulsion paint.
11.10.10. Cleaning and Polishing
Upon completion of painting the whole installation & the surrounding building surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all paint marks, grease, oil & dirt. Normally bright metal parts of
installation & all equipment identification plates shall be polished to approval.
11.10.11. Labeling
Page 201 of 262

a) All instruments, gauge, indicators, control equipment, valves & switchboard equipment
shall be except otherwise specified. Lettering shall be upper case & black in colour on a
white background. Warning labels or installation pertaining to fire/safety equipment shall
utilise upper case white letters on a red background. The height of lettering shall not be less
than 6mm in general & 3mm in switchboards & control panels.
b) Labels shall be attached using round head screws & glued to prevent distortion. On valves,
labels may be attached to hand wheels or spindles using key rings.
11.10.12. Colour Scheme
Description Standard & Colour Reference Lettering Colouring
Domestic Cold Water BSS 109 Middle Blue Black
Domestic Hot Water BSS 109 Middle Blue
Electrical (Conduit Ducts and BSS 557 Light Orange Black
Motors)
Drains Black White
Sanitary Plumbing White Black
-GI and Cast Iron
Machine Bases and Plinths Charcoal Grey
Natural Gas Yellow Orche Black
Valves and Pipe line Fittings White with black handles Black
Switch board
-exterior Blue
-interior White
11.11. ELECTRICAL WORKS

11.11.1. General
a) This section of the specification covers the supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of
the complete electrical installation associated with the proper functional requirements of the
service installation.
b) All workmanship shall be first class & the materials supplied shall be new & approved for
use by Kuala Lumpur Electricity Supply Corp., Jabatan Bekalan Air Malaysia & the
Architect.
11.11.2. Rules and Regulations
a) The installation shall be in accordance with rules & regulations of Kuala Lumpur Electrical
Supply Corp., IEE regulations & requirements of Jabatan Bekalan Air Malaysia.
b) The Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangements permission to install wiring.
On completion of work, the Contractor shall arrange for testing, submission of Test
Certificate & Results to the authority, & to ensure that the installation is approved under the
tests as prescribed under Rule 22 of the Electrical Board Supplies Rules 1949.
11.11.3. Cables
a) All cables & wires from starter panels to the motors shall be PVC cable in galvanized steel
conduit/trunking unless specified otherwise.
b) The cables shall conform to the Institution of Electrical Engineers Standards insulation
standards of Cable Manufacturers Association & relevant British Standards. The cables shall
be colour coded throughout in accordance with the current IEE Regulations.
c) All cables supplied shall be in original packages with labels intact. Cables with kinks or
abrasions on the insulation will be rejected & replaced at no additional cost
d) The Contractor shall check & ensure that cables are of correct sizes & that voltage drops
across are within the allowable limits in accordance with the IEE Regulations.
e) Unless otherwise specified, all wiring within the building shall be either in galvanized steel
conduits or steel trunkings. Except in plant rooms & service areas, all wiring shall be as far
as possible concealed in walls.
f) Terminations of cables shall be by connectors for conductors up to 6mm & by copper lugs or
ferrules of suitable sizes, sweated, welded or crimped for conductors above 6mm.
11.11.4. Conduit work
a) All conduits used shall be medium grade Class "B" steel galvanized & with internal finished
to LLN standards. The minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4" (20mm) diameter.
Page 202 of 262

b) Sufficient junction boxes shall be provided for ease of drawing in cables & no wiring shall
be drawn in until the conduit work has been completed. The total number of cables drawn in
any one conduit shall be such that a space factor of 0.4 is not exceeded.
c) Where possible, the exposed conduits shall run parallel to the building lines & secured at
intervals of not more than five (5) feet (1.5m) by galvanized iron straps & screws. Should
hangers be required, steel rods & steel straps shall be used. Wire hangers shall not be
accepted.
d) An adequate number of drawing & ventilation points shall be provided throughout the
conduit installation. Open ends of drains & ventilation points shall be fitted with brass
bushes into which a disc of fine mesh, brass gauge is to be inserted.
e) Conduit termination at distribution boards, conduit boxes, metal-clad boxes & equipment
shall be by means of brass or gun-metal bush & couplers.
f) The joints of conduit work shall be painted with red lead & on completion of installation all
exposed conduit shall be painted by the Architect.
11.11.5. Trunking
a) Trunking shall be made of mild steel sheet, rigidly formed & with galvanized or enamel
finish. Thickness of the steel sheet shall be 18 SWS for trunking of sizes up to 4" x 4"
(100mm x 100mm) & 16 SWS for sizes bigger. Covers of same material shall be protected &
secured by means of plated screws. No projection from screws or other sharp objects shall be
allowed inside the trunking.
b) Trunking shall be mounted in a neat symmetrical manner suitably spaced to permit easy
removal of covers & supported by strap spaced to permit easy removal of covers &
supported by step hangers at intervals of not more than five (5) feet (1.5m). Connection
between adjacent length of trunking & fittings shall be by butt joint & earth continuity shall
be provided across all joints by means of copper holding links along the whole trunking
length.
c) Rubber or insulated bushes shall be provided for holes in trunking where cable or conduit
penetrates through.
11.11.6. Earthing
a) Main earth-continuity to motor control centres shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractors, but the Fire Services Contractor shall provide & connect all earth continuity
contractors shall the protected from mechanical damage throughout its entire length.
b) Equipment earthing shall be by means of conduit which shall be electrically & mechanically
continuous & effectively bonded. Point of electrical contact shall be cleaned to ensure good
contact before connecting the earth conductors.
11.11.7. Power Distribution
a) For installation where a main control panel has been provided to house two (2) or more
pump starter panels, power distribution to the respective pump panels shall be by burbars.
b) All burbars shall be of high conductivity & drawn copper. Burbars shall be identified by
colours - red, yellow & blue for phases, black for neutral & green for earth.
c) Joints in burbars shall be smooth & holes shall be clear & without burrs. Bolts clamping
burbars together & studs connected to burbars shall be secured by locknuts.
11.11.8. Approval of Drawings
The Contractor shall submit in duplicate details of control or starter panels & shop drawings for
approval by the Architect prior to fabrication. Panels which are not according to the approved
specifications shall be rejected & are to be replaced at no additional cost.
11.11.9. Surge protectors install at Supervisory Panel Systems
a) Surge protectors shall be installed on all signal lines entering or leaving the building, in order
to protect the equipment connected to the lines, against transient over voltages. Where signal
/ data lines link equipment in separate buildings, the surge protectors should be installed at
both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment.
b) Protectors shall conform to:
BS 6651:1992 Protection of structures against lightning (Appendix C), and CCITT IX K17
standard.
c) The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not: -
- restrict the systems bandwidth or signal frequency
- introduce excessive in-line resistance
- cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (on high frequency systems)
Page 203 of 262
d) The protection systems shall consist of: -
- Signal lines protection similar to Furse ESP 06D and Furse ESP 30D
- Power protection similar to Furse ESP 240-5A
e) The protector shall have a low transient 'let-through' voltage for test conducted in accordance
with BS 6651:1992 Category C - High (5kV 10/700 microseconds test).
f) This 'let-through' performance shall be provided for all combinations of conductors: -
- signal line to signal line
- signal line to screen / earth
g) The protector shall be tested to Category C - High exposure.
h) The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
i) The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers of
protectors through an accessory combined mounting and Earthing kit.
11.11.10. Surge protectors install at Sub-Distribution Board
a) The Electronic Surge Protector shall be supplied and install in parallel to the various Sub-
Distribution Boards, in order to protect equipment connected to the power distribution
system against transient over voltages generated by the secondary effect of lightning as well
as by the effects of inductive coupling or electrical switching effects.
b) The protectors should be installed on all power cables entering or leaving the building, in
order to protect equipment connected to the power distribution system against transient over
voltages coming into the building from outside, similar to Furse ESP 415 M1.
c) Protectors should also be installed at local power distribution boards feeding vulnerable
sensitive equipment.
d) The protector shall conform to: -
BS 6651:1992 : (Appendix C), location Category B, high-exposure
BS 2914:1972 : Surge diverters for low voltage installations
IEC 801-5 : Surge immunity requirement draft standard
e) The protector must not interfere with or restrict the systems normal operation. It should not: -
- corrupt the normal mains power supply
- break or shutdown the power supply during operation
- have an excessive earth leakage current
f) The protector shall be tested in accordance to BS 6651:1992, Appendix 'C' Category B, High
Exposure.
g) The protector must be able to detect the following possible faults at the power distribution
system via an LED Warning Light for: -
- Neutral and Earth fault
- Incorrect wiring
- Unbalance power supply
- Discontinuity of Neutral and Earth cables
h) The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.
Unless otherwise stated the peak transient 'let-through' voltage shall not exceed 600 volts, for
protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in accordance
with BS 6651: 1992 Category B - High (6KV 1.2/50 microseconds open circuit voltage, 3kA
8/20 microseconds short circuit current).
i) This peak transient 'let-through' voltage shall not be exceeded for all combinations of
conductors: -
- phase to neutral
- phase to earth
- neutral to earth
j) The protector should have continuous indication of its protection status. Visual status
indication should clearly shows: -
- full protection present
- reduced protection - replacement required
- no protection - failure of protector
k) An advance volt free remote contact Warning Light should be included for remote indication
of: -
- Pre-fail warning of protector
- Power failure
Page 204 of 262
- Tripping of MCCB / Blown fuses
l) The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of
conductors, including neutral to earth.
m) The protector shall be supplied with detailed installations. The installer must comply with
the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
n) The Electronic Surge Protector (ESP) shall conform to the following specification: -
o) Test standard : BS 6651:1992 Appendix C
Other international Standard : IEEE C62.41:1991
: UL 1449
: IEC 801-5 (draft)
p) Let-through voltage when tested
in accordance to BS 6651:1992 : L-N 600 V
6 kV, 1.2/50 µsec : L-E 600 V
3 kA 8/20 µsec : N-E 600 V
q) Current Rating
Total unit peak discharge current : 120kA
(8/20 µsec) to Earth
r) Working Voltage
Single phase : 200 - 280 V
Three phase : 346 - 484 V
11.12. PEDESTAL STREET HYDRANT
11.12.1. General
The pedestal street hydrant shall be connected to a 1000 duct-foot bend which is connected to a
1000 M.S. pipe. The 1000 pipe is tapped from the 1500 underground hydrant pipe via a sluice
valve mounted in a concrete chamber with heavy duty cover.
11.12.2. Pedestal street Hydrant
a) The pedestal street hydrant shall have two way valved outlets of 0 65mm. The outlets shall
be made of brass or bronze with a female instantaneous coupling, capped & chain.
b) The bottom of the hydrant pillar shall be flanged & drilled to BS 10 Table D. The hydrant
pillar shall be capable delivering of 300igpm.
c) The whole assembly shall be approved by C.I.F.S. & Jabatan Bomba Malaysia.
11.12.3. Hydrant Hose Cabinet
a) The hydrant hose cabinet shall be made of galvanized sheet of not less than 10 SWG
complete with galvanized angle stand. The contractor is required to provide concrete plinth
of 100mm higher than the surrounding for mounting & security the cabinet. Two coats of
painting shall apply with primer & red gloss finish.
b) Proper lettering shall be printed.
c) Two coils of 65mm x 30m canvass hose complete with nozzle & qiuck couplings shall be
housed inside the cabinet. The door of the cabinet shall be locked & the key kept in a glass
enclosure. The whole cabinet together with its content shall be approved by C.I.F.S.
d) A key a bar shall be chained to the cabinet's leg. The chain shall be galvanized type & long
enough to reach the sluice valve of the hydrant pillar.
11.12.4. Underground Pipings of Hydrant
a) The underground hydrant pipe shall be connected from the existing water main underground
pipe near the existing factory. The pipe & fitting used shall be M.S. cement line internally &
externally coated with bitumen, wrapped with thermo-glass tissue, manufactured to BS
534:1981. The following minimum specifications shall apply to the pipe.
NOMINAL 0 THICKNESS OF THICKNESS OF THICKNESS OF
METAR PIPE BITUMEN
100 6 3.6 3
150 6 3.6 3
b) Flange joint shall be used for the underground pipes. Flanges shall comply to BS 10 Table
"E", All flanges after installation shall be coated with bitumen before back filling.
c) The hydrant pipe shall be tested to pressure of 250psi for 2 hours. Any failure shall be
rectified & re-tested before back filling.
Page 205 of 262

d) Concrete haunching shall be provided for the pipes at the joint. Minimum 2 ft. of the pipe
next to the flange at both sides of the joint shall be supported by the haunching.
e) Concrete anchor blocks shall also be provided at the bends & the tees.
f) A trench of minimum 3' wide x 5' deep shall be excavated for the laying of pipe. Before the
pipe is installed, water must be pumped dry & clean sand shall be laid & compacted to 6"
thickness. After laying the pipe, haunched, anchored & tested, inspection shall be carried out
before the trench is back filled shall be minimum 4 ft. below the finished road surface. All
unwanted earth must be loaded & transported away by the contractor to a dump site outside
the owner's compound & to be arranged by the contractor himself.
11.13. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
11.13.1. General
a) This section of the specification covers the testing & commissioning requirements for the
various hydraulic services.
b) Provide all necessary competent personnel & equipment to carry out testing &
commissioning of the installation covered by this specification. Balancing & commissioning
shall be carried out by personnel trained in that task & preferably holding appropriate
recognized qualifications. All tests shall be carefully pre-planned & scheduled to ensure that
they are co-ordinated with the work of other trades involved & that they are carried out in a
safe & efficient manner with the minimum of inconvenience to all concerned.
c) All tests required by statutory authorities shall be carried out to approve that the system
operate to their satisfaction & in accordance to all appropriate codes & regulations.
11.13.2. Pre-Commissioning Procedures
Prior to commencement of the commissioning of the systems the following procedures shall be
carried out:
a) Thoroughly clean & flush out all water system including all equipment which forms part of
& is connected to the systems.
b) Pressure testing of all pipe systems.
c) Provide manufacturers test certificates for all proprietary manufactured items. Test
certificates for pressure vessels shall be mounted in glazed frames adjacent the equipment.
Fix to pressure relief valves the manufacturers tags indicating the set pressure of the valves
& all pressure valves shall be stamped with the manufacturer's design & test pressure ratings.
d) Test log sheet proposed to be used during commissioning shall be submitted for approval at
least 4 weeks prior to the commencement of the tests.
11.13.3. Testing of Sanitary Piping
The sanitary branches below floor level shall be tested when completely roughed-in by plugging
or capping all outlets, except stacks above the roof & filling the entire system with water.
Plumbers testing plugs shall be used in openings where required to allow testing. All leaks &
"sweating" shall be corrected with new materials. Caulking will not be accepted.
11.13.4. Testing of Sewerage Piping
a) All lengths of sewer up to at least 760mm in 0 & all manholes & inspection chambers shall
be tested for water tightness complying with OP 2005:(1968) or other equivalent standard.
b) Water or air tests shall be carried out after laying & before back filling or haunching of
concrete surround & they will reveal the occurrence of cracked or porous pipes & faulty
joints. Checks after back filling may reveal faults in the bedding or support of the pipes,
inadequacies in design or accidental damage during, subsequent to, back filling, & show
whether or not the finished work meets the specified requirements regarding water tightness.
c) Wherever possible, testing shall be carries out from manhole to manhole. Short branch
sewers connected to a man sewer between manholes shall be tested as one system with the
main sewer. Long branches, together with the manhole, shall be separately tested.
i. Water Test
- Sewers shall generally be subjected to internal pressure test of 1.2m head of water above
the crown of the pipe at the high end but no more than 6m at the low end. Steeply graded
sewers shall be tested in stages whenever the above maximum head is exceeded.
- The test shall be carried out by inserting suitable strutted plugs in the low end of the
sewer & in connections, if necessary & by filling the system with water. For small pipes a
knuckle bend may be temporarily jointed-in at the top end & a sufficient length of vertical
Page 206 of 262

pipe jointed to it so as to provide the required test head, but for both large & small pipes a
hose pipe may preferably be connected to a plug with pressure gauge or stand.
- Fall of the test water level may be due, among other things, to one or more of the
following causes:
* Absorption by pipes or joints;
* Excessive sweating of pipes or joints;
* Leakage from defective pipes or joints or plugs;
* Trapped air.
- Some pipes absorb more water or trap more air at the joins than others. Allowance shall
be made for this by adding water to maintain the test head for appropriate period.
- While the aim shall be to commence the test proper as soon as possible, preferably within
one hour, the appropriate period will best be determined by conferring with the pipe
manufacturers.
- The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a
measuring vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes & noting the quantity required to
maintain the original water level. For the purpose of this test, the average quantity added
to the pipes up to 450mm0 shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per hour per 100 linear feet per
inch of nominal internal diameter of sewer (equivalent to about 1litre per hour per liner
metre per metre of nominal 100 internal 0). For larger pipes expert advice shall be
obtained.
- Any leakage, including excessive sweating which causes a drop in the test water level,
will be visible & the defective part of the work shall be removed & made good.
ii. Air Test
- It is often more convenient to test sewers by means of internal air pressure. However,
while an excessive drop in pressure when employing the air test may indicate a defective
line, the location of leakage may be difficult to defect & the leakage rate cannot be
measured. The air pressure is also affected by temperature changes. Consequently, failure
to pass this test is not necessarily conclusive & when failure does occur a water test as
described above shall be made & the leakage rate determined before a decision as to
acceptance or rejection is made.
- The length of pipe under air test shall be effectively plugged as before described & air
pumped in by suitable means (e.g. a hand pump) until a pressure of 150mm of water is
indicated in a glass U-tube connected to the system. The air pressure shall not fall to less
than 75mm during a period of five minutes without further pumping after allowing a
suitable time for stabilization of the air temperature.
- Before testing, attention shall be paid to the following point:
* Inspect pipeline for possible damage during or subsequent to laying.
* Thoroughly check mortar joints are used, leave for at least 24 hours before testing to
allow the mortar to set & reach adequate strength.
* Thoroughly check all plugs & equipment. The average drain plug is quite often not
airtight & rubber tubing used in connections must be in good condition & not perished.
* See that the ends of the line are adequately strutted against movement with all plus held
firmly in position.
- Testing Procedure is as follows:
* Pump, or blow in, air until pressure of slightly in excess of 100mm water gauge is
indicated on a manometer connected to the system.
* Pumping or blowing warms the air so a minute or two shall be allowed for this to cool
to the pipe temperature.
* If necessary, then reduce the pressure to 100mm water gauge.
* During a further period of 5 minutes the air pressure shall not fall below 75mm water
gauge.
11.13.5. Testing of Domestic Water Piping
a) Progressive hydrostatic testing of all pipe work shall be carried out to a pressure of not less
than 2½ times the system operating pressure or a maximum pressure of 1000kpa (150 psi)
whichever is the greater for a period of not less than 24 (twenty four) hours without leaks.
b) Allowable pressure drops must not exceed 5% of test pressure during the initial pump-up &
shall hold constant thereafter for the test period. Welded joints which leak shall not be
replaced.
Page 207 of 262
11.13.6. Commissioning
a) General
Carry out all commissioning tests necessary to put the systems into commercial use & to
approval before Practical Completion is granted. Each items of equipment individually, each
sub-system and each complete system as a whole shall be checked & adjusted to the design
duties & general as follows:-
b) Water Systems
- All pressure & flow actuated controls, relief devices, bleeds, vents & drains shall be
checked & proven to approval.
- All temperature control valves shall be fully opened during balancing of water flows.
Final settings of all regulating valves shall be permanently marked in an appropriate
manner.
- Flow measurements shall be undertaken across major items of plant to verify the system
performance.
- Any major adjustment necessary to water flow rate shall be made by changing pump
impeller sizes. Minor adjustments may be made by partial closing of the pump discharge
valves when such valves are suitable for throttling. Valves used to regulate final flows to
equipment shall be clearly & permanently marked in the balance position.
- On completion of the water balancing & flow measurements the system performance
shall be plotted on the pump curves.
c) Controls, Gauges and Instrumentation
- All control shall be adjusted & activated by competent personal provided by the
manufacturer of his authorized agent. A complete log of the settings & readings of all
controls, gauges & instruments shall be maintained throughout the Commissioning
period.
- In addition, hand instruments shall be provided as necessary to check & log readings for
which permanent gauges or instruments may not have been installed:-
* Ammeter readings for all motors.
* Megger tests of all electrical equipment.
* Voltage tests.
* Speeds of all motors, pumps, etc.
* Water flow rates in all equipment.
d) Electrical Control Panels and Switchboards
The operation of all indicating & recording instruments associated flashers & relays shall be
proved under full working conditions. Refer also to the "Electrical Works" section of this
specification for other electrical testing & commissioning requirements.
11.14. SANITARY FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES.
11.14.1. Fittings and Fixings
a) All sanitary fittings shall be as specifically stated in the Bills of Quantities & shall be
complete with all necessary accessories. The sanitary fittings & accessories are to be
correctly assembled & jointed together & connected to services & wastes, the whole fixed
strictly in accordance with approved practice & manufacturer's recommendations &
instructions. Brackets, lugs, etc, are to be carefully positioned & built-in, screwed of plugged
& screwed.
b) W.C. pans are to be screwed or plugged & screwed the floor & except on wood floors,
bedded & pointed in cement mortar. Outlets are to neatly joint to soil pipes in cement & sand
(1.1). Squatting closet pans & floor treads are to be bedded in cement & sand to finish flush
with paving. On concrete upper floors & on ground floors where so specified, raised
concrete plinths are to be formed with one or more steps as necessary. Outlets are to be
jointed to drains or soil pipes as last specified.
c) Waste outlets of lavatory basins & sinks are to be bedded in red lead putty.
11.14.2. Protection of sanitary fittings
The Contractor shall take every precaution in protecting the various sanitary fittings once they
have been installed & shall wrap every fitting with building paper or other method to ensure that
they are not used during the process of the work. Just prior to completion of the Works, the
Contractor shall remove such protective wrapping & clean all surfaces for handing over.
11.14.3. Rates
Page 208 of 262
Rates for each item of sanitary fittings & accessories shall be held to include for all fixing,
connections to water supply, soil, anti-siphon pipes, etc. as required & for the provision of all
necessary coupling, connections, suitable length of flexible metallic hose, etc.
PART 7: PAM CONTRACT 2006 (WITH QUANTITES)
Page 209 of 262

Invitation To Tender - XMUM23T1001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Invitation To Tender - XMUM23T1001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A4-5F CONNECT LAB RENOVATION

TENDERER COMPANY NAME:

CLOSING DATE & TIME : 14th April 2023, 9:30 am-10:00 am

PROJECT NAME: A4-5F CONNECT LAB RENOVATION

Dear Sir/ Madam

TENDER PROCESS AND TIMELINE

To: XMU JIAGENG EDUCATION DEVELOPMENT SDN BHD

CADANGAN PENGUBAHSUAIAN DAN TAMBAHAN KEPADA RUANG AKADEMIK BLOK A4

a) Alternative Tender "A" at Ringgit Malaysia: - ........................................................

b) Alternative Tender “B” at Ringgit Malaysia: -..................................................................

BILL NO. 1 - PRELIMINARIES

Item Description RM Sen

07 Contractor : The person or persons, firm or company referred to as such in the

08 Architect : Messrs. Tan CE Architect, D-20-02, Menara Mitraland, No. 13A,

Item Description RM Sen

01 Superintending Officer : The term `Superintending Officer’ (S.O.) shall mean

02 Month : The term `Month’ shall mean calendar month.

03 Approved, Selected or Directed : The terms `approved’, `selected’ or `directed’

SCOPE AND BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

06 The Works as contained in this Contract comprises of new extension and

09 Take over in such sequence or section as directed by the Architect.

Item Description RM Sen

ORDER OF WORKS (CONT'D)

COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF VARIOUS AUTHORITIES AND

03 Restrictions may be imposed by the various Authorities including Local

CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY REGULATION 1996

04 The Contractor shall comply to Part VIII of the Lembaga Pembangunan

05 Stoppage of works due to non-compliance of the above shall entitle the

PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES, ANTI-POLLUTION / DOE

06 The Contractor shall carry out dilapidation survey before commencement of

Item Description RM Sen

PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES, ANTI-POLLUTION / DOE

03 The Architect’s instruction or approval of any safety measure shall not

PRICING OF BILLS OF QUANTITIES

DISCREPANCY BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND CONDITIONS ON SITE

06 No claim by the Contractor for any extra cost incurred as a result of

Item Description RM Sen

01 The Contractor shall as a condition precedent to the commencement of any

02 The Contractor is to allow the cost of Tender and Contract Documentation

OTHER CONTRACTORS ON THE SITE

Item Description RM Sen

03 The Contractor is to note that additional clauses, if any, stipulated in this

04 The following particulars will be inserted in the appendix attached to the

Clause 19.1 & 20.A

Insurance deductible Amount : RM 50,000.00

Amount for removal of Debris : 1%

Fixed Completion Period : 4 months

Clause 30.1& 30.13

Item Description RM Sen

APPENDIX TO CONTRACT (CONT'D)

EMPLOYEE SOCIAL SECURITY ACT

CONTRACTOR'S ALL RISK INSURANCE POLICY

Item Description RM Sen

WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION POLICY

01 A Workmen's Compensation Policy shall be affected in respect of personal

03 This insurance policy shall be maintained by the contractor separately at their

EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS AND SPECIALISTS

RESTRICTION OF PERSONS TO SITE

07 The Contractor is to provide all necessary noise abatement control in order to

08 Any instructions to stop work or summons/fines issued by Local Authorities as

Item Description RM Sen

SITE MANAGEMENT TEAM